Full text of "A. L. A. Cataloging Rules For Author And Title Entries"

See other formats

A.L.A.

Cataloging Rules for

Author and Title

Entries

ADVISORY BOARD

A.L.A. Cataloging Rules, Second Edition

RUDOLPH GJTELSNESS

EVELYN M. HENSEL MARY HAYS MARABLE

M. RUTH MACDONALD LUCILE M. MOHSCH

HARRIET D. MACPHERSON ARNOLD H. TROTIER

(ex officio) ETHEL BOND, President

American Library Association
Division of Cataloging and Classification

A. L. A.

Cataloging Rules for

Author and Title

Entries

Prepared by the Division of Cataloging and

Classification of the American

Library Association

SECOND EDITION

Edited by
CLARA BEETLE

American Library Association

Chicago, 1949

The Preliminary American Second Edition of A.L.A. Catalog Rules, on
Part I of which the present volume is based, was prepared by:

AMERICAN LIBRARY ASSOCIATION

Catalog Code Revision Committee

Rudolph Gjelsness Chairman and Editor-m-Cfiief

Nella J. Martin Executive Assistant and General Editor

Charles Martel Consultant

EXECUTIVE COMMITTEE

Rudolph Gjelsness, Chairman

T* Franklin Currier Harriet D. MacPherson

J. C. M. Hanson Margaret Mann

Keyes D. Metcalf

CHAIRMEN OF SUBCOMMITTEES AND EDITORS OF SECTIONS

Definitions Anna M. Monrad and Anonymous classics Amelia Krieg

Clara Newth de Villa S. Periodicals Mary W. MacNair

Documents James B. Childs CapitalizationDelia J. Sisler

Societies and institutions Harriet W. Incunabula T. Franklin Currier

Pierson Maps and atlasesFrances Ambuhl

Religious entries Julia Pettee MusicEva J. O'Meara
Index Katherine E. Schultz

EDITORIAL SUBCOMMITTEE

Margaret Mann
Harriet D. MacPherson Arnold H. Trotier

ADVISORY COMMITTEE

Effie G. Abraham, Frances Ambuhl, Hazel Bartlett, Bertha Bassam, Ethel Bond,
James B. Childs, Flora Eckert, Mrs. Anna S. Erichsen, Reverend Colman Farrell
Sophie K. Hiss, Amelia Krieg, Mary W. MacNair, Lucy W. Markley, Anna M. Monrad,
Isadore G. Mudge, Theodore A, Mueller, Eva J. O'Meara, Julia Pettee, Miss Clyde
Pettus, Harriet W. Pierson, Harriet B, Prescott, Mrs. Elizabeth S. Radtke, William M.
Randall, Marion M. Root, Bertha M. Schneider, Katherine E. Schultz, Delia J. Sisler,
Arnold H. Trotier, Mrs. Clara Newth de Villa S., Rufh Wallace, Katherine Warren,
Wyllis E. Wright.

(BRITISH) LIBRARY ASSOCIATION, CATALOGUING RULES COMMITTEE

James D. Stewart, Bermondsey Public Library (Chairman) ; Henry W. Acomb, Dur-
ham University (Honorary secretary); E. Ansell, Cambridge University Library-
Herbert M. Cashmore, Birmingham Public Library; F. J. King, Bodleian Library;
C. B. Oldman, British Museum; C. J. Purnell, London Library; James Ross, Bristol
Public Library; F. E. Sandry, Edmonton Public Libraries; Henry A, Sharp, Croydcn
Public Libraries; Margaret S. Taylor, School of Librarianship, University College
London. * *

Preface

The cataloging rules here presented are an expansion and revision of
the rules of entry and heading of the 1908 edition of CATALOG RULES,
AUTHOR AND TITLE ENTRIES. They go back in origin to the rules presented
at the Buffalo conference of the American Library Association in 1883,
which were printed in the Library journal of that year (v. 8: 251-54)
and reprinted in Cutter's Rules for a dictionary catalog, 3d edition, 1891.
For an earlier forerunner, with its concise statement of many of the
principles underlying the rules, reference should be made to Panizzi's
British Museum Rules of 1841, the most important codification up to that
time and one which greatly influenced subsequent rules in many countries
and especially in the United States. Incidentally it may be noted that
these revised rules have profited from a study of the application of
existing rules to specific cases as revealed in the British Museum Catalog
and other catalogs of comparable character, especially the files of printed
cards of the Library of Congress.

History. The Rules of 1908 were the product of an American Library
Association committee which was organized in 1901, a year notable also
for the initiation by the Library of Congress of its printed card service
to other libraries. The rules formulated by that committee were developed
over a period of experimentation when libraries were beginning in a
tentative way to incorporate these printed cards into their catalogs. The
chairman of that committee was James C. M. Hanson, for many years
chief of the Catalog Division of the Library of Congress. It was a for-
tunate circumstance that the Library of Congress was engaged in revising
its own rules and its own catalogs at a time when the Association was
seeking a standardization of cataloging practices in order to further
cooperative or centralized cataloging. The committee which drew up
the 1908 rules was in a position to reconcile to a great degree the prac-
tices of the Library of Congress with those of other scholarly libraries
in the United States.

Since that time there has been steady progress in the standardization
of library catalogs, furthered by the increasing use of Library of Congress
printed cards. American libraries have revised their catalogs extensively,
frequently at great cost, in order to incorporate easily these printed
cards. It has followed that cards prepared in individual libraries for

PREFACE

purely local use have also tended to observe Library of Congress prac-
tices with such modifications as the local situation might prescribe.
In the absence of any supplementary rules from the American Library
Association between 1908 and 1941, libraries had to formulate their own
rules, relying for guidance chiefly on rules issued occasionally by the
Library of Congress, added to such deductions relating to practice as
could be made from the printed cards as examples.

In 1930, the American Library Association Committee on Cataloging
and Classification, in response to an inquiry from the Association regard-
ing needed publications in the field of cataloging, suggested among other
projects a revised code of cataloging rules as being of first importance.
A subcommittee, the Catalog Code Revision Committee, with Charles
Martel of the Library of Congress as chairman, was appointed to begin
work on a revision. This subcommittee was made an independent com-
mittee of the Association in 1932 "to make necessary revisions in the
A. L. A. Catalog rules with authority to cooperate with the Library Asso-
ciation of Great Britain and with such other national library associations
as it may think appropriate."

The work was actually inaugurated during the years 1930 to 1935.
In this period, cataloging groups studied and discussed the direction
the revision should take, and material pertinent to the revision was as-
sembled. Opinions were sought from members of the profession and a
considerable body of data was collected. This included suggested new
rulings, additional examples to accompany old rules, and numerous
questions which the old Rules did not answer. The Committee met at
annual conferences, and some new rules were promulgated and approved.
Being dependent entirely on voluntary effort, progress was necessarily
slow. This was perhaps not unfortunate as it provided a period of stock
taking, allowed a preliminary investigation of the extent of the project
and some experimentation in its execution. From the evidence before
the Committee, it soon became apparent that dissatisfaction with the
1908 code rested not with its inclusions but rather with its omissions.
The basic rules were on the whole satisfactory but did not meet the
present day needs of the cataloger in the large scholarly or specialized
collection. Expansion was needed rather than change. This was clearly
brought out in a meeting of the New York Regional Group of Catalogers
in April, 1931, under the chairmanship of Minnie E. Sears, where re-
vision needs were discussed. 1 It was emphasized further in Mr. Hanson's
address before the Catalog Section at the A. L. A. Conference of 1932. 2

/New York Regional Group of Catalogers, "Summary of discussion of need for re-
7I ?SV f 5 a S log code ' c d*bo* * classifier^ yearbook no, 3 (1932), p. 250-29.
J. C. M. Hanson, "Revision of A. L. A, Catalog rules," ibid., p, 7-19

PREFACE

The needs were emphasized and elaborated upon by a member of the
Committee, Julia Pettee, in the Library Journal of April 15, 1936.

Relation to cooperative cataloging. In the meantime cooperative cata-
loging activities had experienced considerable growth under a committee
of the American Library Association (Keyes D, Metcalf, chairman)
aided by a grant from the General Education Board. As a consequence,
a larger number of libraries became involved in the work of supplying
copy for printing and distribution by the Library of Congress, and the
amount of copy provided by libraries previously cooperating was greatly
increased. This created an urgent demand from such libraries for rules
which would answer the many questions arising in the preparation of
this copy. Much time was lost by individual catalogers seeking prece-
dents in the files of printed cards, and, if this source failed, engaging in
complicated correspondence with cooperative cataloging headquarters
at the Library of Congress. It was this demand, along with the growing
realization that voluntary effort could not produce a new code within
a reasonable time, which culminated in a decision to seek a subvention
to hasten the revision.

Carnegie Corporation grant. With the aid of the Executive Com-
mittee of the Catalog Code Revision Committee in December, 1935, the
chairman prepared a statement outlining the plans and stating the
financial needs of the Committee. This was endorsed by the members
of that committee (W. W. Bishop, James C. M. Hanson, Harriet D. Mac-
Pherson, Margaret Mann, Keyes D. Metcalf), was submitted by the
chairman to Carl H. Milam, Executive Secretary of the American Library
Association, and by him to the Executive Board of the American Li-
brary Association, urging that a subvention be secured. The Carnegie
Corporation, friend of so many worthy publishing projects in the library
field, made a grant in April, 1936 to further the revision. Nella Martin
from the staff of the Library of Congress was appointed executive assis-
tant and began work in September, 1936.

Plan of work. The revision progressed in two main directions: from
the central headquarters under the direction of the executive assistant;
and in the field through subcommittees appointed to prepare rules for
special classes of material.

The committee met at annual conferences of the American Library
Association to discuss questions which arose in the progress of the work
and to make necessary decisions. The subcommittees were responsible
for the inclusion of much new material not previously available in so
systematic or full a form. These subcommittees and their chairmen were
as follows: Definitions (Anna M. Monrad), Religious entries (Julia
Pettee), Anonymous classics (Amelia Krieg), Documents (James B.

PREFACE

Childs), Music (Eva J. O'Meara), Incunabula (T. Franklin Currier),
Societies and institutions (Harriet W. Pierson) . In most cases the rules
were circularized first by the subcommittees and revised by them, and
were later edited by Miss Martin to bring them into conformity with
the rest of the code. The rules for music were developed in collabora-
tion with a committee of the Music Library Association.

The formulation of definitions of cataloging terms, recognized as one
of the major tasks of the committee from the beginning, was investigated
carefully by the subcommittee from 1935 to 1938, and a considerable
number of tentative definitions were formulated. The task of carrying
this on and preparing the list for printing was entrusted to Mrs. Clara
Newth de Villa S. who is chiefly responsible also for the form in which it
appears in the revised second edition.

The preliminary edition. The preliminary edition, published in 1941,
expanded the rules of 1908 to make more provision for special classes of
material, e.g., serial publications, government documents, publications of
religious bodies, anonymous classics, music and maps; to amplify exist-
ing rules to cover specific cases of frequent occurrence; to provide better
examples and more adequate definitions. It was divided into two parts:
"Part I. Entry and heading;" "Part II. Description of book." As certain
parts of the rules were criticized as being overelaborate and likely to
make cataloging unduly expensive, a Committee on the Use of the Code
was appointed to consider the various points of view and to make recom-
mendations bearing on further revision. This committee, in 1944, sub-
mitted its report 3 to the Executive Board of the American Library Asso-
ciation, which accepted the recommendations of the Committee and in-
structed the Catalog Code Kevision Committee to proceed with the
revision of Part I in the light of the criticism available. Further work
on Part II was deferred.

As the Catalog Code Revision Committee had no funds at its dis-
posal little could be done before 1946, when it received a grant from the
American Library Association. By direction of the American Library
Association Council, the Catalog Code Revision Committee, which was
an Executive Board committee, was discontinued and the responsibility
for the revision of Part I placed with the A. L. A. Division of Cataloging
and Classification.

The revised edition, In July, 1946, an editor, Clara Beetle, was ap-
pointed by the Division of Cataloging and Classification, and, having boon
granted six months' leave from the Library of Congress, she began the
editorial revision of Part I on September 1, 1946. She was guided in her
work by the suggestions and criticisms already available, some sent to
3 A. L. A. bulletin, v. 38. Oct. 1, 1944.

VUl

PREFACE

the editor of the 1941 edition and some in print, and by the aid and
counsel of an Advisory Board. The Board, appointed by the Division
of Cataloging and Classification, was composed of the following mem-
bers: Rudolph Gjelsness, Evelyn M. Hensel, M. Ruth MacDonald, Har-
riet D. MacPherson, Mary Hays Marable, Lucile M. Morsch and Arnold
H. Trotier. Many others were consulted by the Board or by the editor
on both general and specific questions raised by the comments on the
preliminary edition.

The chief changes from the preliminary edition are a rearrangement
of the material to emphasize the basic rules and subordinate their ampli-
fications, and to make the sequence of rules logical so far as possible;
reduction of the number of alternate rules; omission of rules of descrip-
tion; rewording to avoid repetition or to make the meaning clearer; and
revision, where possible, of rules inconsistent with the general principles. 4
Acknowledgements. It is impossible to list all the individuals who
assisted in one way or another in the preparation of the preliminary
edition (1941) . The editors had the cooperation not only of the mem-
bers of the committee, the chairmen of subcommittees, editors of sec-
tions, and members of the editorial subcommittee, but also of a large
advisory committee. Other individuals whose assistance should be ac-
knowledged are Catharine Keyes Millfer and Richard S. Angell, in con-
nection with the music rules; Margaret B. Stillwell and Dean P. Lock-
wood with the incunabula rules; Leon Nemoy, especially on Oriental
names, Shio Sakanishi, Naomi Fukuda, and Da-June Lu on Japanese
and Chinese names; David J. Haykin, especially in preparing the trans-
literation tables; and Horatia Corbin, in preparation of the Index. As-
sistance or criticism of the tentative revisions was given by W. W.
Bishop, Susan Grey Akers, Alice Charlton, Jens Nyholm, Andrew D.
Osborn, and Esther A, Smith, and by Charles Harris Hastings, Jessie
McL. Watson and other members of the Library of Congress staff.

In the preparation of the revised edition, the editor had the assistance
not only of the Advisory Board, but also of members of the former com-
mittee, especially the editors of sections. Thanks are due particularly
to Amelia Krieg, Julia Pettee and Harriet W. Pierson, and also to mem-
bers of the Library of Congress staff who answered questions and pre-
pared or criticized drafts of rules in their special fields. Mrs. Clara Newth
de Villa S.'s offer to undertake revision of the Glossary was most grate-
fully accepted. The definitions and rules for music were prepared by a
joint committee of the A. L. A. Division of Cataloging and Classification

*Cf. "Progress report on the editing of Part I of the A. L. A. catalog rules," News
notes of the Board of Directors (A. L. A. Division of Cataloging and Classification,
1947) v. 3, no. 2, p. 4-8.

PREFACE

and the Music Library Association, with Mrs. Virginia Cunningham as
chairman.

The British Committee, whose cordial cooperation was interrupted in
1939 by the outbreak of war, has been kept informed of progress and
general agreement is assured. The work on the preliminary edition
profited throughout from suggestions that came through the Honorary
Secretary, H. S. Acomb, Librarian of Durham University, reporting on
sections of the tentative rules as they passed through the hands of the
British Committee.

RUDOLPH GJELSNESS, Chairman

A. L. A. Catalog Code Revision Committee

Contents

Preface v

Introduction x i x

Rules of Entry and Heading

I. Choice of Main Entry

1. General rule 3

2. Individual author, Works by 3

3. Joint authors, Works by 4

4. Composite works 5

A. Collaborators, Works by 5

B. Debates, conversations, interviews, table-talk ... 6

5. Collections and serials 7

A. Collections 7

B. Encyclopedias and dictionaries 10

C. Periodicals and newspapers 10

D Almanacs, yearbooks, etc 14

E. Directories 14

F. Series 15

Works of Special Type

6. Correspondence and letters 16

7. Expeditions (Reports, etc.) 17

8. Inscriptions t 20

9. Manuscripts 21

A. Manuscripts and facsimiles of manuscripts .... 21

B. Calendars of manuscripts 25

10. Maps and atlases 26

11. Mediumistic writings 28

12. Music 28

13. Private collections (Catalogs) 35

CONTENTS

14. Radio scripts 37

15. Scenarios (Motion picture) 38

16. Ships' logs 38

17. Theses and dissertations 38

18. Visitations, Heraldic 40

19. Works of art 49

Works Belated to Previous Publications

20. Revisions 43

21. Translations 43

22. Abridgments, adaptations, excerpts 44

23. Dramatizations and novelizations 45

24. Parodies and imitations 46

25. Continuations (Supplements) 47

26. Sequels 48

27. Indexes 48

28. Concordances 50

29. Commentaries and scholia 50

Works of Doubtful or Unknown Authorship

30. Pseudonymous works 52

31. Spurious works and works of doubtful authorship ... 54

32. Anonymous works (General) 57

33. Anonymous classics 62

34. Bible 74

35. Sacred literature (other than the Bible) 78

A. Jewish sacred literature 78

B. Buddhist scriptures 80

C. Hindu scriptures 81

D. Koran 81

H. Personal Authors (Form of Entry)

36. General rule g2

37. Modern authors g2

38. Compound surnames 82

39. Surnames with prefixes 83

40. Forenames (form when used with surname) 86

41. Titles of nobility, office, etc 37

xii

CONTENTS

42. Dates and designations 88

43. Forename as entry word 89

44. Writers known under sobriquets, nicknames, etc. ... 89

45. Changed names 90

46. Married women 91

47. Saints 94

48. Popes 96

49. Patriarchs 9$

50. Cardinals 97

51. Ecclesiastical princes 97

52. Bishops and archbishops 97

53. Religious orders, Changed names of persons in .... 100

54. Bible characters 102

55. Sovereigns and rulers 102

56. Princes of the blood 105

57. Noblemen 106

Ancient and Medieval Writers

58. Ancient Greek writers 109

59. Byzantine writers 109

60. Classical Latin writers 110

61. Medieval writers HO

62. Medieval, Renaissance and Reformation writers with
classicized names 112

63. Post-Reformation and modern writers with classicized

names 113

Oriental Names

64. Arabic names 113

65. Hebrew names 116

66. Japanese names 118

67. Chinese names 119

68. Annamese names 120

69. Burmese and Karen names 121

70. Indie names 123

HI. Corporate Bodies as Authors

71. General rule and specification 126

xiii

CONTENTS

Government Publications

72. General rule 126

73. Sovereigns, presidents, governors, etc 128

74. Legislative bodies 130

75. Executive departments, etc 131

A. Bureaus or offices subordinate to a department . . 131

B. Divisions and other units 131

C. Reports, papers, etc., by an official 132

D. Reports not by an official 132

E. Collection or series of reports 133

76. Armies, navies, etc 133

77. State Guards and National Guard (U. S.) 135

78. Embassies, legations, consulates, etc 135

79. Delegation, delegates, delegate 135

80. Archives 135

81. Government commissions and committees 136

82. Special local government districts 137

83. Laws, Ancient and medieval 137

84. Laws, Modern 137

85. Constitutions 140

86. Constitutional conventions 140

87. Charters 140

88. Treaties 140

89. Courts 142

90. Trials 144

A. Pleas and briefs 144

B. Civil actions 145

C. Contested elections 145

D. Crown, state, and criminal trials 146

E. Impeachment trials 146

F. Courts-martial and courts of inquiry 147

G. Admiralty proceedings 147

H. Collected reports of trials 147

Societies and Institutions

91. General rule (Societies) 14g

92. General rule (Institutions) 151

xiv

CONTENTS

93. Entry word (Societies or institutions) 154

94. Corporate names practically unknown 157

95. Incorporated societies 158

96. Political parties 158

97. International societies 159

98. Orders of knighthood, secret orders, etc 160

99. Federated societies 164

100. Affiliated societies 164

101. Societies related to, but not an integral part of, a larger
organization 164

102. Institutions forming an integral part of a larger organization 166

103. Institutions located in suburbs later absorbed in a metro-
politan area 167

104. State and provincial institutions (U. S. and Canada) . . 167

105. American state historical and agricultural societies ... 168

106. Agricultural experiment stations 169

107. Public schools 170

108. Private and endowed schools 170

109. Indian schools (U. S.) 171

110. Radio stations 171

111. University and union league clubs 172

112. Volunteer fire companies and associations ..... 172

113. Mercantile library associations 172

114. Gilds 172

Religious Societies and Institutions

115. Churches not organized within national bounds .... 173

116. Catholic and Eastern churches 173

A. Local ecclesiastical units 173

B. Orthodox Eastern Church 174

C. Lesser Eastern churches 174

D. Eastern churches in communion with Rome ... 174

E. Ecclesiastical documents 175

F. Liturgies 175

117. Canon law (Catholic and Eastern churches) 178

118. Catholic Church (special rules) 180

A. Pope and Holy See 180

B. Congregations, etc 181

CONTENTS

118. Catholic Church (special rules) continued

C. Concordats 181

D. Indulgences 182

119. Councils and synods 183

120. Protestant denominations 184

A. Denominations with corporate names 184

B. Denominations without corporate names (state or na-
tional churches) 184

C. Denominational bodies congregational in polity . . . 184

D. Legislative and administrative departments and organi-
zations 185

E. Local administrative units 186

F. Local ecclesiastical councils 187

G. Creeds, hymnals, and service books 187

121. Creeds, hymnals, and service books (Jewish) . ... 187

122. Religious orders 187

123. Monasteries, abbeys, convents, etc 189

124. Churches, cathedrals, etc 191

125. Church vs. parish, society, etc 194

126. Subsidiary church institutions 195

127. Denominational societies with local units 197

128. Church auxiliary societies 197

129. Temples 197

130. Mosques 198

Miscellaneous Bodies Not Included in the Specifications
for Societies and Institutions

131. Diplomatic congresses 199

132. International meetings 200

133. Congresses of groups of states having .similar language or
culture 202

134. National congresses 202

135. Institutes, conferences, conventions, etc 203

136. Exhibitions, etc 203

137. Pre-congress or pre-exhibition publications 204

138. Festivals ^ * 205

139. Commissions and committees 205

140. Committees and meetings of citizens 206

xvi

CONTENTS

141. Classes of citizens ............. 207

142. Boards, trustees, etc ............. 207

143. Foundations, endowments, funds ........ 208

144. Firms, business corporations, etc ......... 208

145. Banks ................ 210

146. Chambers of commerce, boards of trade, stock, produce,
and other exchanges ............ 211

147. Parks ................ 213

148. Cemeteries ............... 213

149. Botanical and zoological gardens ........ 214

IV. Geographic Headings

150. Language of heading ............ 215

151. States, provinces, etc ............. 215

152. Counties ................ 216

153. Cities and towns ............. 216

154. Political division in heading .......... 217

155. Places of the same name in one country ...... 218

156. Special rulings .............. 219

V. Added Entries. References

157. Added entries .............. 220

158. References ............... 221

Appendixes

L Glossary ................. 229

II. Abbreviations Used in Headings ......... 236

III. Rules of Style for Headings ........... 238

IV. Transliteration ............... 243

251

xvn

Introduction

The A. L. A. CATALOGING RULES are intended to represent the best or
the most general current practice in cataloging of the libraries of the
United States. The rules are not few nor are they, in total, simple, for
the material to which they are to be applied is almost as multitudinous
and complicated as humanity itself. The world may have become one
world, but we certainly do not yet speak with one tongue nor even
write our various languages in one alphabet. Our names are formed
differently, our governments and institutions are variously organized,
our ways of publishing are not the same.

Whether books are to be read from the left or the right, the top or
the foot of the page, whether authorship is individual or collective, all
books are written to express man's ideas and libraries are formed be-
cause other men wish to read and study those ideas.

The cataloger's main business is to make the collection of books and
other materials accessible to all who have a legitimate claim on its
resources. These persons include not only readers and research workers,
but members of the administrative, order, reference and cataloging staffs
of the library itself. Determination of the extent, nature and fullness
of cataloging needed for various types of material and by any particular
library should be reached through study of the needs of all these groups.

The A. L. A. CATALOGING RULES, however, are intended neither as a
handbook of cataloging nor as a manual of procedure. They give no
instructions on the selection of material for cataloging, nor on research
methods; only incidentally do they list any bibliographical aids to re-
search. After decision to catalog a work has been made and the necessary
information in regard to its authorship has been obtained, these rules aid
the cataloger in the choice of entry and form of the heading so that a
reasonable degree of standardization and uniformity may prevail, not
only within one catalog, but especially in enterprises such as centralized
and cooperative cataloging, the making of union catalogs and the com-
piling of bibliographies. Such uniformity makes the use of a catalog
easier, since the user learns what to expect. It helps both research
workers and library workers who go from one library to another to
find that the same rules have been applied in the making of the catalogs.

xix

INTRODUCTION

As the catalogs of most American libraries are dictionary card cata-
logs, the rules are prepared with that type particularly in mind. These
rules, however, are restricted primarily to author and title entry. Sub-
ject headings are mentioned only where they bear an important relation-
ship to the choice of main entry or where there would be a choice between
a subject entry and some other form of added entry.

The principle on which the cataloging is planned is the use as main
entry of the author, personal or corporate, considered to be chiefly re-
sponsible for the creation of the intellectual content of the work. 1 Thus
the finding list function of the catalog is extended beyond what is re-
quired for location of a single book to the location of literary units 2
about which the seeker has less precise information. Added entries
provide alternative means of approach to help those who lack complete
knowledge of a specific work desired or those who lack sufficient ac-
quaintance with the rules of entry to enable them to reach quickly the
heading chosen as the main entry. Added entries serve also to complete
the assembling of related material as part of a literary unit.

In establishing headings, preference is usually given to authoritative
forms: to full names and real names of persons, to full legal names of
corporate bodies, to the use of the vernacular in both personal and
corporate names. Exceptions are made to allow use of shorter or dif-
ferent forms made familiar by an author's consistent use or by literary
custom. Names of corporate bodies also may be -used in a shortened
form when the full corporate name is so little used as to be practically
unknown. Preference is given to English when an international organ-
ization has its name in many languages. Geographic names are given in
English when that is a well-established usage. In all cases, references
from forms not used lead to the established heading.

Similarly, exceptions or qualifications are made when too strict an
application of a general rule 3 would result in a heading not giving the
most direct approach. Perhaps there should be other similar modifica-
tions, but they could be made wisely only on the basis of many more
studies of reader approach and catalog use than are now available.

The exceptions to the general principles and to the general rules result
from practical experience and make the rules, not arbitrary decisions
reached by a theoretical plan alone, but decisions sufficiently flexible to
require the exercise of sound judgment on the part of the cataloged

^ P**h. in cataloging," Catalog and

< development of authorship enfcy ,' Library quarterly, v. 6

****** < 4th ** ^written,
XX

INTRODUCTION

interpreting and applying them. Similar good judgment is needed in
extending and adapting the general rules to problems not specifically
covered.

Examples are given to aid in understanding and interpreting the rules,
but they are illustrative only of the points of entry and heading covered
by the rides. None are complete catalog entries. No attempt should be
made to use them as examples for description of the book, nor to derive
rules of description from them.

The cataloger must determine for each work cataloged: (1) what the
author or main entry should be; (2) what the form of the heading
should be in what language, under what part of a name, whether
corporate bodies should be entered under their names directly or as
subheadings under country, state or city, etc.; (3) what references should
be made to lead to the heading chosen; (4) what added entries should
be made. These decisions should be made within the framework of the
rules, unless the library has determined a different policy.

Since promoting increased uniformity and standardization is an im-
portant purpose of the rules, few alternative rules have been suggested.
It is recognized, however, that some other variations may be justifiable.
For example, libraries which provide material for general reading rather
than for research work may prefer to use an English form of name in-
stead of the recommended vernacular or classical form, or a well-known
pseudonym instead of the real name; the fullness of name entries may
be reduced; the subdivision of the author entry need not be so minute. 4
It should be emphasized, however, that such deviation should be made
only to gain some distinct advantage, since libraries benefit most from
the work of other libraries when all conform to standard practice.

In the present edition, an effort has been made to bring the rules
abreast of practice that has changed since 1941 and to fill any notable
gaps in the rules as given in the preliminary edition. There can, how-
ever, be no expectation that provision has been made for all contingencies
nor that changes and modifications will not be required by future de-
velopments, either in publishing fields or in library administration.

CLARA BEETLE, Editor
Second edition

* Cl Susan G. Alters, Simple library cataloging (3d ed.; Chicago, American Library
Association, 1944).

xxi

Rules of
Entry and Heading

I. Choice of Main Entry

1. General rule.

Enter a work under the name of its author whether personal or
corporate.

The author is considered to be the person or body chiefly respon-
sible for the intellectual content of the book, literary, artistic or musical.
(2, 6-19) When that responsibility is divided, the choice of main entry
may be the first author mentioned, as with joint authors, or if there
are many contributors, the collector or editor of the material may be
considered the author. (3-4) The work of many contributors issued
serially or in many volumes or editions is usually entered under title,
since the editors may vary. (5)

When authorship is undeterminable, entry is made under a head-
ing substituted for an author's name (as a pseudonym) (30, 31C) or
under title. (32-35)

Governments, societies, institutions, and other organizations are to
be regarded as the authors of the publications for which they as cor-
porate bodies are responsible, but the papers, addresses, etc., of their
officials, members or employees as individuals, are entered under per-
sonal author, even though issued by the corporate body. (Cf. III.
CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS.)

A form subdivision is sometimes added to the heading to assemble
material in a group or in a desired order. (Cf. 31, 33A(1), 85-88,
116-118.)

2. Individual author, Works by.

Enter a work under the name of its author, when known, whether
or not his name appears in the publication. (Cf. 32.) Enter revisions
and other modifications under the original author whenever the work
remains substantially his, especially if the book purports to be an
edition of the original work. (Cf. 20-22.)

Holbrook, Stewart Hall, 1893-

Lost men of American history, by Stewart H. Holbrook.
i. Title.

cBlunden, Edmund Charles, 1896-

De bello Gennanico, a fragment o trench history, written in
1918 by the author of Undertones of war.

i. Title.

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

cKerr, Doris Boake, 1893-

The twig is bent, by Capel Boake

i. Title.
Biemann, Hugo, 1849-1919.

Hugo Riemanns Musik-Lexikon. 11. Aufl. bearbeitet von Alfred
Einstein.

t Einstein, Alfred, 1880-

Adler, Alfred, 1870-1937.

Understanding human nature . . . translated by Walter B6ran
Wolfe.

i. Wolfe, Walter B6ran, 1900-1935, tr. n. Title.
Joint authors, Works by.

A. Enter under the first author mentioned on the title page a work
produced jointly by two or more authors in which the contribution
of each is not a separate and distinct part of the whole. Make added
entry 1 with designation JOINT AUTHOR for any author after the first
whose name is included in transcribing the title.

Nichols, Boy Franklin, 1896-

America yesterday, by Roy F. Nichols, William C. Bagley and
Charles A. Beard, with drawings by George M. Richards.

r ' . Wi ^m Chandler, 1874- joint author, n. Beard,

Charles Austin, 1874- ^oint author, m. Title.

B, In a work of joint authorship in which the chief responsibility
rests with one author, but the title page reads "with the collaboration
of . . ." or words to that effect, the making of added entries for the
coUaborators will depend on (1) the nature of the work; (2) the
number of collaborators and the importance of their contribution.
Warden, Carl John, 1890-

Animal motivation; experimental studies on the albino rat
by C. J. Warden . with the collaboration of T. N. Jenkins, Marion
Jenkins, L. H. Warner, E. L. Hamilton t and 3 H. W. Nissen

f lumbia Unive ^ C <* *
University ' Council f or Resea *& in the Social Sciences.

C. If in a work of more than one volume, the names of the joint
authors do not appear in the same order on the title pages of the
different volumes, enter under the name which appears first on the
title page of the first volume and give variation in a note,
Woody, Clifford, 1884-

w^ h Jl d " We i^ a ^ e o CS W ' %**** book series > b y Clifford
Woody . . . Frederick S. Breed . . . t and 3 James R. Overman

^l der T ick S J 8 ^ J a* R- Overman and Clifford
S Oveman >

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 4A(1)

D. If on the title page of a second or later edition, the order of
the joint authors has been changed, enter under the name which
appears first on the earliest edition and add an explanatory note.

Blackmar, Frank Wilson, 1854-1931.

Outlines of sociology, by John Lewis Gillin . . . and Frank
W. Blackmar . . . 3d ed.

In the earlier editions Blackmar's name appeared first on the title-
page.

i. Gillin, John Lewis, 1871- joint author.

E. Enter a narrative told by one person to another person (re-
porter, "ghost writer," etc.) who prepares the matter for publication,
under the narrator. Make added entry for the writer.

Jewitt, John Rodgers, 1783-1821.

The adventures of John Jewitt, only survivor of the crew
of the ship, Boston, during a captivity of nearly three years
among the Indians of Nootka Sound, in Vancouver Island, edited
with an introduction and notes by Robert Brown . . .

"Written by ... Richard Alsop . . . c who] drew from Jewett his story
during repeated interviews." Hist. mag. v. 4, 1860, p. 91.

I. Alsop, Richard, 1761-1815. n. Brown, Robert, 1842-1895, ed.

Belmonte y Garcia, Juan, 1892-

Juan Belmonte, killer of bulls; the autobiography of a mata-
dor ... as told to Manuel Chaves Nogales. Translated from the
Spanish and with a note on bull-fighting by Leslie Charteris.

i. Chaves Nogales, Manuel, 1897- n. Charteris, Leslie, 1907-

tr.

Distinguish from works in which the narrator is the actual author
those in which the writer has merely used the narrator form for an
original work (e.g., autobiography of a fictitious person, or fictitious
memoirs of a real person) .

4, Composite works.

Enter composite works (Cf. GLOSSARY.) under the author chiefly
responsible for the work, under the author first mentioned on the title
page, or under title, according to the specific rules A-B.

A. Collaborators, Works by.

(1) Enter a work produced by the collaboration of two or more
authors, in which the contribution of each forms a distinct part or
section of a planned whole, under the author chiefly responsible for it.
Whenever their contributions warrant, make added entry for each
of the other contributors without the designation JOINT AUTHOR. If
a corporate body is considered to be chiefly responsible for the work,
make an added entry for at least the first personal author mentioned
on the title page.

Dubech, Lucien, 1882-1940.

Histoire generate illustree du theatre, par Lucien Dubech,
avec la collaboration de Jacques de Montbrial et de Madeleine
Horn-Monval . .

4A(2) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

"Toute une part du texts, dans chacun des cinq volumes, est de M,
Jacques de Montbrial, et toutes les illustrations ont ete rassemblees par
Mme. Horn." Pret

Vols. 3-5 "avec la collaboration de Jacques de Montbrial, de Claire
Engel et de Madeleine Horn-Monval."

i. Montbrial, Jacques de, n. Horn-Monval, Madeleine, in. Engel,
Claire Eliane.

International Institute of Intellectual Co-operation*

The educational role of broadcasting, by F. W. Beidler-
Wagner, Henry Bonnet, Kristine Bonnevie t and others 3 . . . Paris,
International Institute of Intellectual Co-operation, 1935.

i. Beidler-Wagner, F. W. n. Title.

(2) If origin, chief interest, or responsibility is not clearly identi-
fied with or attributable to any one of the contributors, enter under
the first-named author 2 if there are not more than three and the title
of the whole work is applicable to each of the contributions, with added
entry for the other authors. Otherwise, enter under title, with added
entry for the first author mentioned and for as many others as the
individual case warrants.

Buckley, Homer John, 1879-

Mail-order and trade-paper advertising, by Homer J. Buckley
. . . G. D. Crain, Jr. ... and Maxwell Broke . . .

CONTENTS. Mail-order advertising, by H. J. Buckley. Industrial
and trade-paper advertising, by G. D. Crain, Jr. Advertising letters,
by Maxwell Droke.

i, Crain, Gustavus D., 1885- u. Droke, Maxwell, 1896-

Por que ser anti-semita? Um inquerito entre intellectuacs
brasileiros; collaboradores: A. C. Pacheco e Silva, Afranio
Peixoto, Alfredo Ellis Junior . . . c e outros ;
J, Silva, Antonio Carlos Pacheco e. n. Peixoto, Afranio, 1876-

m. Ellis, Alfredo, 1896-

Is unemployment inevitable? An analysis and a forecast; a

continuation of the investigation embodied in "The third

winter of unemployment," published in 1923.

"This volume is ... in the form of a series of essays for which the

authors alone are responsible, together with an introductory report

which represents our views of the questions which our inquiry covers.**

Introd. signed: J. J. Astor, A. L. Bowley r and others]*

*o*n Astor ' Hon - J oh ? Jacob, 1886- n. Bowley, Arthur Lyon,

1869- m. The third winter of unemployment.

B, Debates, conversations, interviews, table-talk,

(1) Enter a debate, dialogue, conversation, under the participant

whose name appears first on the title page. Make added entry for

each name after the first.

Darrow, Clarence Seward, 1857-1938.

Debate, subject, resolved: That the United States continue the
policy of prohibition as defined in the eighteenth amendment.

iin'iW J<W ^J^^^f*^ writings of two or more authors ar* entered
under toe first-named author only when there is no collective title.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 5A(1)

Clarence Darrow, negative, versus Reverend John Haynes
Holmes, affirmative; introduction by Hon. Royal S. Copeland.
i* Holmes, John Haynes, 1879-

Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1749-1832.

Conversations of Goethe with Eckermann and Soret Trans-
lated from the German by John Oxenford,

I. Eckermann, Johann Peter, 1792-1854. n. Soret, Frederic Jacob,
1795-1877. m. Oxenford, John, 1812-1877, tr.

(2) Enter an interview under the person interviewed if his ideas
only are presented; enter under the interviewer if he has added com-
ment and interpretation or if he has interviewed several persons.

MacVeagh, Franklin, 1837-1934.

Interview, concerning the proposed changes in design and size
of paper money, of the Honorable Franklin MacVeagh, Secretary
of the Treasury, September 10, 1910.

(3) Enter table-talk under the talker with added entry under the
compiler.

Selden, John, 1584-1654.

The table-talk of John Selden; edited with an introduction and
notes by Samuel Harvey Reynolds . . .

Originally recorded by Kichard Milward, Selden's secretary.

i. Milward, Richard, 1609-1680. n. Reynolds, Samuel Harvey, 1831-
1897, ed.

5. Collections and serials.

Specification. This group of rules applies to material in which the
responsibility for the intellectual content is so divided that no one of
the contributors can be considered the chief author. The choice then
is between entry under the agency responsible for editing, assembling
or issuing the material, as a government agency, society, institution
(Cf. 71.), a personal editor, a publisher, etc., or entry under title.
Preference is given to entry under title when it is distinctive or when
it is the least variable element and it is, of course, the only possible
entry when no editorial or publishing responsibility is apparent.

A. Collections.

(1) With collective title. Enter under the compiler or editor, in-
dividual or corporate, a collection of independent works by various
authors, artists, composers, etc., issued with a collective title, except
as noted in (a) to (c) below.

Chandler, Frank Wadleigh, 1873- ed.

Twentieth century plays, edited by Frank W. Chandler . . .
and Richard A. Cordell . . .

i. Cordell, Richard Albert, joint ed. n. Title.
Sobering, Arnold, 1877-1941, ed.

Geschichte der Musifc in Beispielen; dreihundertfiinfzig
Tonsatze aus neun Jahrhunderten, gesammelt, mit Quellenhin-
weisen versehen und herausgegeben von Arnold Schering.

t. Title.

5A(la) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Muratori, Lodovico Antonio, 1672-1750, ed.

Rerum Italicarurn scriptores ab anno ^Erae Christianae quin-
gentesimo ad millesimum quingentesimum quorum potissima
pars nunc primum in lucem prodit ex Ambrosianse, Estensis,
aliarumque insignium bibHothecarum codicibus. Ludovicus
Antonius Muratorius . . . collegit, ordinavit, & praefationibus
auxit . . .

Edited by F. ArgeUati.

i. Argellati, Filippo, 1685-1755, ed.

(a) Enter such collections under title if the work of the editor or
editing body seems to be but slight and their names do not appear
prominently in the publication or if there are frequent changes of
editor. Make added entry under editor.

Galleria delle piu belle incisioni in acciaro. Prima versione dall 7
inglese, col testo a fronte, arricchita di scritti original! sopra i
soggetti italianL Dai signori: Giacinto Battaglia, Giambattista
Bazzoni . . . ecc. . . .

A Book of broadsheets, with an introduction by Geoffrey Daw-

son . . . 2d ed.

Selections from the pocket literature provided by the Times, and
originally printed in 1915 in the form of broadsheets for distribution to
the men in the trenches, c/. Introd.

i. Dawson, Geoffrey, 1874- n. The Times, London, m. Title:

Broadsheets.

A Second book of broadsheets, with an introduction by Geoffrey

Dawson . . .

Selections from the pocket literature provided by the Times, and
originally printed in 1915 in the form of broadsheets for distribution
to the men in the trenches, cf. Introd.

i. Dawson, Geoffrey, 1874- n, The Times, London, m. Book
of broadsheets, iv. Title: Broadsheets, A Second book of.

(b) Enter under title such compilations as monumenta, scriptores,
anecdota, etc., when they are generally referred to by title. Make
added entry under editor.

. . . Monumenta minora saeculi secundi. Ed. altera emcndata.
Edited by Gerhard Rauschen.
i. Rauschen, Gerhard, 1854-1917, ed.

Scriptores rerum Svecicarum Medii $)vi, ex schedis praecipue
Nordinianis collectos, dispositos ac emendates, edidit Ericus
Michael Fant . . .

Vol. 2: "Jussu regis augustissimi post D. Ericum Michaelem Fant
ediderunt ac ulustrarunt Ericus Gustavus Geijer . . . et Johannes
Henricus Schro'der"; v. 3: "Edidit et illustravit Claudius Annerstedt"

1783-

> >

7 ^t' r 1791^1857, ed. w. Annerstcdt,

Claes, 1839-1922, ed. v. Nordin, Carl Gustaf, 1749-1812.

Corpus scriptorum ecclesiasticorum Latinorum. Editum consilio
et impensis Academiae Litterarum Caesareae Vindobonensis

L Akademie der Wissenschaften, Vienna.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 5A(lc)

Anecdota varia Graeca et Latina, ediderunt Rud. Schoell et Guil.

Studemund . . .

1 Schoell, Rudolf, 1844-1893, ed. n. Studemund, Wilhelm Friedrich
Adolf, 1843-1883, joint ed.

(c) Enter festschriften 3 and simflar collections published by a so-
ciety or an institution in honor of a person, or to celebrate an anni-
versary, under the society or institution. When not published by a
society or an institution, enter under editor, if the editor's name
appears prominently in the publication; otherwise enter under title.
In any case, make added entry under editor or distinctive title when
not main entry, and make subject entry under the person in whose
honor the collection is published.

Germania Mannerchor, Baltimore.

Festschrift zum goldenen Jubilaum 10. Oktober 1906 des
Germania Mannerchor von Baltimore, Md., gegrundet am 10.
Oktober 1856. Im Auftrage des Ausschusses fur Vereinsge-
schichte zusammengestellt von Carl Laegeler.

i. Laegeler, Carl.

Lille. Facultes catholiques. Faculty des lettres,

. . . Melange de philologie et d'histoire, publies a Toccasion du

cinquantenaire de la Faculte des lettres de 1'Universite cath-

olique de Lille.

CONTENTS. t

Frankfurter, Felix, 1882- ed.

Mr. Justice Holmes; contributions by Benjamin N. Cardozo,
Morris R. Cohen, John Dewey c and others^ . . . edited by Felix
Frankfurter.

Published on the occasion of the ninetieth birthday of Oliver Wen-
dell Holmes, March 8fli, 1931.
CONTENTS.
1. Holmes, Oliver Wendell, 1841-1935. i. Title.

Festschrift Alexander Cartellieri, zum sechzigsten Geburtstag
dargebracht von Freunden und Schulern.
CONTENTS.
1. Cartellieri, Alexander, 1867-

Essays in biology in honor of Herbert M. Evans, written by his
friends.
CONTENTS.
1. Evans, Herbert McLean, 1882-

* This rule concerns only festschriften that fall into the category of "collections."
A festschrift consisting of an edition of the works of one author, or of a single work
to which definite authorship can be assigned, or for which a specific heading is
appropriate, such as an anonymous classic, is of course cataloged as any other publi-
cation of the same nature.

Margaret, Saint. Legend.

*r J^&tPtt^^V 5 * ?' Christophori; edldit Hermanmis Usenet. cBonn, Uni-
versitats-Buchdruckerei von C. Georgl, 18863

' 1 ??!^ ,? e stschrilt zur fiinften SScularfeier der Carl-Ruprechts-
mmi Heidelberg, tiberreicht von Rector und Senat der Rhelnischen
h-Wllhelms-XIniversitat.
1. Heidelberg. UniversitSt. i. Bonn. UniversitSt. tend other added entries

5A(2) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(2) Without collective title. Enter two or more writings by dif-
ferent authors, published together but having no collective title, under
the one named first on the title page, or lacking such indication, under
the heading appropriate to the first work in the collection. Make added
entries for other works mentioned on the title page and for the editor.

Lowell, James Russell, 1819-1891.

. . . The vision of Sir Launfal, by James Russell Lowell; The
courtship of Miles Standish, by Henry Wadsworth Longfellow;
Snow-bound, by John Greenleaf Whittier; edited with an intro-
duction and notes, by Charles Bobert Gaston . . .

I. Longfellow, Henry Wadsworth, 1807-1882. The courtship of Miles
Standish. n. Whittier, John Greenleaf, 1807-1892. Snowbound, m.
Gaston, Charles Robert, 1874- ed.

B. Encyclopedias and dictionaries. Enter encyclopedias and dic-
tionaries under title unless decidedly better known by the name of
their editors. In either case make added entry under the form not
chosen for main entry, and for the publisher if the work is likely to
be referred to by his name,

Cyclopedia of American government, edited by Andrew C. Me-
Laughlin , . . and Albert Bushnell Hart . . .

I. Mclaughlin, Andrew Cunningham, 1861- ed. n. Hart Albert
Bushnell, 1854-1943, joint ed.

Larousse, Pierre, 1817-1875.

^Grand dictionnaire universel du xix c si^cle, fran$ais, historique,
geographique, mythologique, bibliographique, litteraire, artis-
tique, scientifique, etc. . . . par Pierre Larousse . . .

I. Title.

Heath's standard French and English dictionary, edited by J. E.
Mansion . . .

London edition (G. G. Harrap & company, ltd.) has title: Harrap's
standard French and English dictionary.
I. Mansion, Jean Edmond, ed*

C. Periodicals 4 and newspapers*

(1) Enter a periodical (Cf. GLOSSARY.) under its latest title. Make
a reference or an added entry for any earlier title or titles under
which the periodical may have been issued. In the case of a periodical
which has ceased publication, make exception in favor of entry under
an earlier title used for a much longer period than the later title. A
publication which does not continue the volume numbering of an
earlier publication is usually considered a new periodical, and should
have separate entry,

A periodical issued by a society, institution, or government body

*The rules for cataloging periodicals as stated here are based on TJ.S. Library of
K^Kwn ^^T- 011 ^ 1 ^ % faeMtety*! of periodical* (3d cd. Prepared
LS v ^te5 a ^!S r; /S 7 ^5 g SS n ' W 3E 3 rihat Of! " 1925 >' ft*Priftted im. For
S2fJ?w rff^S? ^U C ^\ C !i er ' $i ule * for a <*fcttonary catalog (4th ed, re-
written; Washington, Govt Print 0&, 1904), sec. 133, p. 59 and sec. 145, V 62T

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 5C(1)

is ordinarily to be entered tinder its title (especially if this is dis-
tinctive in character) with added entry for the issuing body. (Cf . 71.)
For the more important periodicals, make added entries for editors
included in the title or mentioned in a note; for compilers of indexes
when of sufficient importance; and for societies or other bodies of
which the periodical is an organ. The name of each editor is followed
by the abbreviation ED. not JOINT ED.

The Children's home magazine.

Vol. 1, no. 1 has title: The Children's monthly messenger.
Merged into Boys' and girls' treasury.

Refer from
The Children's monthly messenger.

California schools; official publication of the state Department
of Education,
i. California. Dept. of Education.

The American labor legislation review. Published quarterly by
the American Association for Labor Legislation.
Founded and edited by J. B. Andrews,
i. Andrews, John Bertram, 1880-1943, ed. n. American Association

for Labor Legislation.

When the title of a periodical begins with the initials of the name
of a corporate body, enter under the initials and make added entry or
reference under the name of the body for which they stand.

A.SJVLE. news. v.l-

with added entry under
American Society of Mechanical Engineers.

AAA travel . . . v.l-

with added entry under
American Automobile Association.

. . * A, and G. motor vehicle year book.

Refer from
Armstrong and Gans motor vehicle year book.

B.-M. Go's cumulative code annotations and current digest.

Refer from

Bender-Moss Company's cumulative code annotations and
current digest.

When the title of a periodical begins with the initials of the fore-
names of the editor or publisher, omit the initials. Refer from the
exact title, and from the title following the name, if distinctive.

. . , Case's botanical index; an illustrated quarterly botanical

magazine.
Title reads: L. B, Case's botanical index . . .

Refer from
L. B. Case's botanical index.

. . , Pepper piano music magazine.
Title reads: J. W. Pepper piano music magazine.

5C(2) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

JRefer from

J. W. Pepper piano music magazine.
Piano music magazine.

When the title begins with a forename, use the forename as entry
word but refer from other forms of the name, and if necessary, from
the part of the title following the personal name.

Carl Hagenbecks illustrierte Tier- und Menschenwelt.

Refer from
Hagenbecks illustrierte Tier- und Menschenwelt.

Justus Liebigs Annalen der Chemie.

Refer from

Liebigs Annalen der Chemie.
Annalen der Chemie.

(2) Enter a newspaper under its latest title* Refer from earlier
titles, if any, and from catch titles by which the paper may be popu-
larly known. In the case of newspapers which appear in several
editions (Sunday, morning, evening, etc.) under slightly varying titles,
enter each edition independently, but with added entry under the
main title, and reference under the name of the city unless this occurs
as the first word of the title.

Boston Evening Transcript.

Refer from

Boston Daily Evening Transcript.
Boston Transcript.
Evening Transcript, Boston.
The Transcript, Boston.

The Westminster Gazette.

Refer from
London. Westminster Gazette.

The Sunday Star.

with added entry
The Evening Star, Washington, D. C.

and reference from
Washington, D, C. Sunday Star.

(3) If it is desirable to catalog a special number of a newspaper or
periodical independently, enter it under the name of the newspaper
or periodical unless a more definite authorship can be established, in
which case make added entry under the name of the newspaper or
periodical.

Springfield Daily Times.

The village of Holyoke, Massachusetts . . .
Issued as a special number of the Springfield Daily Times, no. 5, 1894.
L'Ulustration.

. . * S. M. la reine Astrid, 1905-1935.
"Album hors serie. Juzn 193$.**

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 5C(4)

Holme, Geoffrey, 1887- ed.

Children's toys of yesterday, edited by C. Geoffrey Holme.
"Special winter number of 'The Studio'."
I. The Studio.

When the place is not included in the name of a newspaper used
as a heading, it is to be added. Add the place of publication to a
periodical title used as a heading where necessary to distinguish be-
tween two periodicals of the same title.

The Times, London.

. . . War graves number ... no. 10, 1928.
"The Times ... no. 45,047."

Times-Dispatch, Richmond.
Annual educational number.

Life. Chicago.
War art.

Life. New York.
Men, women and birth,

For monographs issued as supplements to a periodical or news-
paper see 25C-D.

(4) Enter a collection of extracts by various authors from a single
periodical or newspaper under the name of the periodical or news-
paper. Make added entries under the title of the collection and the
name of the collector if given.

Blackwood's Edinburgh magazine.

Humorous tales from Blackwood.
i. Title.

The Atlantic monthly.

Youth and the new world, essays from the Atlantic monthly,
edited by Ralph Boas . . .

I. Boas, Ralph Philip, 1889- ed. u. Tide.

The Sun, New York.

Casual essays of the Sun; editorial articles on many subjects,
clothed with the philosophy of the bright side of things.

i. Title.

CasselTs magazine.

My aunt's match making, and other stories by popular authors.
Running title: Stories from CasselTs.
i. Title.

For entry of a collection of extracts by various authors from dif-
ferent periodicals see 5A.

The work of a single author republished from a periodical (entered
under the name of the author if known, or under title if anonymous)
has no added entry for the periodical, but an added entry is usually
made under the newspaper for the work of a single author repub-

5P _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

lished from it, especially if the author is an editor or official cor-
respondent, or if the article is anonymous.

Phelps, William Lyon, 1865-1943.
As I like it, by William Lyon Phelps . . .

Previously published in Scribner's magazine from September 1922 to
August 1923.

i. Title.

cChurch, Francis Pharcellus, 1839-1906.

Is there a Santa Clans?

The text of the editorial by F. P. Church which appeared in the New
York Sun, September 21, 1897, together with two letters from Mrs
Virginia OUanlon Douglas and a biographical sketch of Mr. Church.

i. The Sun, New York. n. Title.

D, Almanacs, yearbooks, etc. Enter almanacs, general yearbooks
and similar serial publications tinder title.

The Aviation year book . . . 1930-
Editor: 1930- C, E. Lee.
L Lee, Charles E., ed.

Buffalo Evening News almanac and . . , year book. 1933-
The Farmer's almanack . . .

18 by Samuel Burr; 18 by Elisha Dwells; 18 by

Joseph Ray. *

i. Burr, Samuel, n. Dwelle, Elisha, m. Ray, Joseph, 1807-1855.
Who's who in commerce and industry, 1936-
E. Directories.

(1) Enter a directory published serially under the first word of
the title not a serial number or the initial of a compiler or publisher.
The Post Office London directory . . comprising official
streets, commercial . . . parliamentary, postal . and banking
directories ...

Title varies: 18 The Post-Office annual directory . . .

18 The Post Office London directory

1. London Direct.

S, r n eker " Langley San Ewuckco city directory . . ,
-19

* 89 \ Cro <* er ; s San Francisco directory,
i Crocfcer-Langley San Francisco directory.

1930 ' ^ B< ^ c * <wy.

1930- Polk's Crocker-Langley San Francisco city directory

1. San Francisco Direct.

Refer from

Crocker's San Francisco directory.
Crocker-Langley San Francisco directory,

dir 7 ect01 ? - being a statistical book of
for facte relating to the clergy and the church
Subtitle varies slightly.
18 published by H. Cox.

Supersedes the Clerical directory.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 5F(2)

(2) Enter a nonserial directory under the name of the compiler if
mentioned on the title page. If no compiler is mentioned, enter under
title.

Cattell, James McKeen, 1860-1944, ed.

Leaders in education, a biographical directory, edited by
J. McKeen Cattell , . . 1st ed.

i. Title.

(3) Enter a telephone directory issued by a telephone company
under the name of the company.

New England Telephone and Telegraph Company.

last of subscribers . . . and business directory . . .
1. Boston Direct. Telephone.

(4) Enter a telephone directory issued by a compiler or publisher
other than a telephone company under title if published serially. If
it is nonserial, enter under compiler if prominently mentioned on the
title page, otherwise, enter under title.

San Francisco classified business telephone directory for San
Francisco and suburbs.
San Francisco, C. L. Schachtebecfc, c!8
1. San Francisco Direct. Telephone.

Rothermel (Charles T.) & Co., Chicago.

Auxiliary telephone directory o Chicago . . . March, 1896.
Compiled and published by Chas. T. Rothermel & Co.

1. Chicago Direct. Telephone.

F. Series. Enter a series under its title except as noted in para-
graphs (1) and (2) below. In choosing between varying forms of
series title, prefer the title as given on (1) added title page; (2) title
page, unless half title is more exact or gives noteworthy additional
information; (3) half title; (4) cover; (5) any other source. Make
added entry or reference under name of editor.

(1) Enter under editor or publisher a series which is familiarly
known by the name of the editor or publisher. Refer from title.

(2) Enter under the name of a society, institution, or other corpor-
ate body, a series issued by it without distinctive title. However, entry
under title is preferred for a series whose name begins with the word
Biblioteca or its equivalent in other languages, 5 with reference from
the society, institution, or periodical issuing it.

International scientific series.

Historic towns.

Edited by Edward A. Freeman and Rev. William Hunt.

Make added entry or reference
Freeman, Edward Augustus, 1823-1892, ed.
Hunt, William, 1842-1931, ed.

* To avoid confusion with entry for the library of the organization.

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Grober, Gustav, 1844-1911.

Grundriss der romanischen Philologie. Neue Folge.
Refer from title.

Catholic University of America.

Canon law studies.
Refer from title.

Toledo University, Toledo. College of Law.
Lectures on the problems of the practicing lawyer.
Refer from title.

Haskell lectures in comparative religion delivered before the
University of Chicago.

Refer from
Chicago. University.

Haskell lectures in comparative religion.

Works of Special Type

6. Correspondence and letters.

A. Enter correspondence between two or more persons under the
first one mentioned on the title page, with added entry for the other
party or parties to the correspondence, and for the editor or compiler.

Terry, Dame Ellen, 1848-1928.

Ellen Terry and Bernard Shaw; a correspondence, edited by
Christopher St. John (pseud.^

i. Shaw, George Bernard, 1856* n. Marshall, Christabcl, ed.

B. Enter collected letters of one writer under the writer with added
entry under the editor or compiler.

Sedgwick, Anne Douglas, 1873-1935.

Anne Douglas Sedgwick; a portrait in letters, chosen and
edited by Basil de Selincourt

x. De Selincourt, Basil, 1876- ed.

(1) H the letters are all addressed to the same person, make added
entry for the addressee. Extend this treatment to include two writers
or two recipients. When more than two writers are involved apply
rule C, p. 17.

Cobbett, William, 1763-1835.

B Letters from William Cobbett to Edward Thornton, written
? tk 6 y^rs 1797 to 1800; edited with an introduction and notes
by G. D. H. Cole . . .

Howard > 1B89 ' * n - ^omton, Sir

Browning, Elizabeth (Barrett) 1806-1861.
Twenty-two unpublished letters of Elizabeth Barrett Brown-

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 7A

ing and Robert Browning, addressed to Henrietta and Arabella
Moulton-Barrett

I. Browning, Robert, 1812-1889. n. Cook, Henrietta (Barrett) d. 1860.
m. Barrett, Arabella, d. 1868.

cHobbs, Mary (Mendenhall) 3 1852-

Letters to Gertrude, 1910-1913, edited by Mary I. Shamburger.

"The letters comprising the present volume were written cbyj two
Carolina Quakers, Mary Mendenhall and Lewis Lyndon Hobbs ... to
their young daughter in a boarding school near Philadelphia." Introd.

i. Hobbs, Lewis Lyndon, 1849- 11. Shamburger, Mary Ina, 1898-
ed. m. Korner, Gertrude Mendenhall (Hobbs) 1896- iv. Title.

(2) When the collected letters of a single writer are accompanied
by biographical matter and the whole is entitled "Life and letters,"
or words to that effect, choice of entry under the writer of the letters
or under the author of the biography is governed by the relative
extent and importance or interest of the letters as compared with the
biography. In case of doubt, prefer entry under the author of the
biography. If entry is made under the writer of the letters, make
added entry under the author of the biography; if under the author
of the biography, make subject entry under the writer of the letters.
If the latter is a very voluminous writer, both a subject and an added
entry may be made.

Barrus, Clara, 1864-1931.

The life and letters of John Burroughs, by Clara Barrus . . .
1, Burroughs, John, 1837-1921.

MacCallum, John Bruce, 1876-1906.

Short years; the life and letters of John Bruce MacCallum,
M.D., 1876-1906, by Archibald Malloch.

"It seemed best to let MacCallum tell his own story through extracts
from his letters and his 'Memories' which are preserved in his note-
books. I have added connecting paragraphs and explanations as ap-
peared necessary." Pref.

r. Malloch, Archibald, 1887- ed. n. Title.

C. Enter collected letters by various writers under the compiler
or editor. (Cf. 5A.) If the letters are all addressed to the same person,
make added entry for the addressee. Extend this treatment to include
two recipients. (Cf . B (1) above.)

Taintor, Sarah Augusta, comp.

The book of modern letters, compiled by Sarah Augusta
Taintor and Kate M. Monro; illustrated by W. M. Berger.

i. Monro, Kate M., joint comp. n. Title.

7. Expeditions (Reports, etc.).

Enter official accounts and publications of results of scientific and
exploring expeditions as follows:

A. When the work is clearly the production of one person or of
two or more persons working in conjunction, enter under author
or compiler.

7B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Wilkes, Charles, 1798-1877.

Narrative of the United States Exploring Expedition. During
the years 1838, 1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. By Charles Wilkes, u. s. N.,
commander of the expedition . . .

L, United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-1842.

tThe first five volumes of the official reports of the expedition copy-
righted and published by the author^

Beebe, Charles William, 1877-

The Arcturus adventure; an account of the New York Zoolog-
ical Society's first oceanographic expedition, by William Beebe
. . , Published under the auspices of the Zoological Society.

1. Arcturus (Ship) i. New York Zoological Society.

Hooker, Sir William Jackson, 1785-1865.

The botany of Captain Beechey's voyage; comprising an ac-
count of the plants collected by Messrs. Lay and Collie, and other
officers of the expedition, during the voyage to title Pacific and
Behring's Strait, performed in His Majesty's ship Blossom,
under the command of Captain F. W. Beechey ... in the years
1825, 26, 27, and 28. By Sir William Jackson Hooker ... and
G. A. Walker Arnott . . .

1. Blossom (Ship) i. Arnott, George Arnott Walker, 1799-1868, joint
author, n. Beechey, Frederick William, 1796-1856.

B. When the work consists of contributions by several persons,
choice of heading is governed by the way in which the expedition is
generally designated, or by the prominence given on the title page
to any one of the headings suggested below. 5 In cases of doubt, give
preference to this order.

(1) The official name of the expedition, followed by the date.

United States Exploring Expedition, 1838-1842.

United States Exploring Expedition. During the years 1838
1839, 1840, 1841, 1842. Under the command of Charles Wilkes'

X7.S.N. ...

r. Wilkes, Charles, 1798-1877. n. U. S. Congress.
tThe complete report of the expedition (19v.) published under act of
Congress of Aug. 26, 1842. cj. L. C. card 14-19399)

Navy-Princeton Gravity Expedition to the West Indies, 1932.

The Navy-Princeton Gravity Expedition to the West Indies in
1932.

L TL S. Navy. n. Princeton University.

(2) The society, institution, government department, or individual
assuming the responsibility of the expedition and the publication of
the results.

Gesellsdiaft fiir Erdkunde 211 Berlin. Gronland-Expeditivn,.
^oS^^;? 3 ^ 6 ^ 1011 der Gesellschaft fur Erdkunde zu Berlin,
1891-1893. Unter Leitung von Erich von Drygalski . .
r. Drygalski, Erich von, 1865-

entries have been indicated only when the name dTtfe
* solved Other appropriate subject entries would ol

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 7B(5)

Pennsylvania. University. Babylonian Expedition.

The Babylonian Expedition of the University of Pennsylvania.
Series D: Researches and treatises, edited by H. V. Hilprecht.

L Hilprecht, Hermann Vollrat, 1859-1925, ed. n. Pennsylvania. Uni-
versity. Dept. of Archaeology.

Gt Brit Challenger Office.

Report on the scientific results of the voyage of H.M.S. Chal-
lenger during the years 1873-76 under the command of Captain
George S. Nares , . . and the late Captain Frank Tourle Thom-
son, R. N. Prepared under the superintendence of the late Sir
C. Wy ville Thomson . . . and now of John Murray . . . Published
by order of Her Majesty's government.

1. Challenger Expedition, 1872-1876. 1. Thomson, Sir Charles Wyville,
1830-1882. n. Murray, Sir John, 1841-1914. in. Nares, Sir George
Strong, 1831-1915. iv. Thomson, Frank Tourle. v. Gt. Brit. Admiralty,
vr. Royal Society of London. Circumnavigation Committee.

Albert I, Prince of Monaco, 1848-1922.

Resultats des campagnes scientifiques accomplies sur son yacht
par Albert i er , prince souverain de Monaco. Publics sous sa
direction avec le concours du baron Jules de Guerne.

1. Hirondelle (Yacht) i. Guerne, Jules de, baron, 1855-

(3) The commander of the expedition, especially when he edits
the results.

Beechey, Frederick William, 1796-1856, ed.

The zoology of Captain Beechey's voyage; compiled from the
collections and notes made by Captain Beechey, the officers
and naturalist of the expedition during a voyage performed in
His Majesty's ship Blossom under the command of Captain F W
Beechey . . . in the years 1825, 26, 27, and 28 ... Published
under the authority of the lords commissioners of the Admiralty.

1. Blossom (Ship) and added entries i-x for the ten members of the
expedition whose contributions are shown in the Contents note, and
xr, Gt. Brit. Admiralty.

(4) The editor of the results.

Adams, Arthur, 1820-1878, ed.

The zoology of the voyage of HJVLS. Samarang; under the
command of Captain Sir Edward Belcher . . . during the years
1843-1846 . . . edited by Arthur Adams . . . Published under the
authority of the lords commissioners of the Admiralty.

1. Samarang (Ship) and added entries i-iv for the four members of
the expedition whose contributions are shown in the Contents note and
v. Gt. Brit. Admiralty.

(5) The name of the vessel, followed by the date of the expedition.
If more than one vessel participates, enter under the first-named
vessel, with added entry for the others.

Scotia (Ship) 1913.

Ice observation, meteorology and oceanography in the North
Atlantic Ocean. Report on the work carried out by the S.S.
"Scotia" in 1913.

7B(6) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Expense of the expedition shared by the Board of Trade and the
shipowners concerned.

Added entries for authors of special reports mentioned in Contents
note and Gt. Brit. Board of Trade.

(6) The first word of the title.

Exploration scientifique de 1'Algerie pendant les annees 1840,
1841, 1842. Publiee par ordre du Gouvernement , , .
I. France. Ministere de la Marine.

In all cases make added entries freely for government departments,
names of vessels, commanders, societies, editors, etc.

8. Inscriptions.

A. Enter a single inscription of unknown authorship under the
editor unless it is generally known and referred to by a distinctive
name, in which case enter under that name as a uniform heading.

Comparetti, Domenico Pietro Antonio, 1835-1927, ed.

Iscrizione arcaica del Foro romano, edita ed illustrata da
Domenico Comparetti.
but

Moabite stone.

The Moabite stone; a facsimile of the original inscription,
with an English translation, and a historical and critical com-
mentary . . .

B. Enter a collection of inscriptions ordinarily under the editor
or compiler; however, if the editorial work is slight, or if the collec-
tion is better known by title or by some distinctive name, enter under
title or distinctive name with added entry for editor or compiler; or,
if the collection is the property of a private individual or of a cor-
porate body, entry under the name of the owner may be preferred,

Hughes Clarke, Arthur William, 1873-

Monumental inscriptions in the church and churchyard of
St. Mary's, Wimbledon, transcribed and annotated by A W
Hughes Clarke ...

1. Wimbledon, Eng. St. Mary's Church.

Inscriptiones Graecae, consilio et avctoritate Academiae Litter-

arvm Regiae Borvssicae editae , . .

t. Akademie der Wissenschaften, Berlin.
Tell el-Amarna tablets*

. . . Oriental diplomacy: being the transliterated text of the
cuneiform despatches between the kings of Egypt and Western
Asia in the xvth century before Christ, discovered at Tell
el-Amarna . . ,

British Museum. Dept of Egyptian and Assyrian Antiquities.
Coptic and Greek texts of the Christian period from ostraka

S3 a f Vi-' ^ the r^ iti S l MUS * U - By H. R. Hall London
Printed by order of the Trustees, 1905.

I. Hall, Harry Reginald Holland, 1873-1930.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 9A

9. Manuscripts. 7

A. Manuscripts and facsimiles of manuscripts. Enter a manuscript
or the facsimile of a manuscript according to the rules for printed
books. Make the usual added entries for editors, compilers, titles, etc.,
and in addition, make added entry for the manuscript as such, if it
belongs to a collection of manuscripts or has a distinctive name. The
added entry may be for the collection, followed by the abbreviation
Mss. and the name or number of the manuscript or it may be the name
of the manuscript, if distinctive. If the two are equivalent, make a
reference from one to the other rather than two added entries.

If the main entry heading is one under which there are likely to
be many entries, make an assembling added entry consisting of the
heading followed by the abbreviation Mss. and the particular designa-
tion of the manuscript if it has one. For exception to this treatment
see A(l), p. 22.

For every manuscript or facsimile of a manuscript make a form
subject heading: MANUSCRIPTS, ^LANGUAGE] or MANUSCRIPTS, [LAN-
GUAGE] FACSIMILES, e.g., MANUSCRIPTS, FRENCH, or MANUSCRIPTS,
FRENCH FACSIMILES.

Homerus.

Homeri Hias cuin scholiis. Codex Yenetus A, Marcianus 454
phototypice editus . . .

1. Manuscripts, GreekFacsimiles. I. Venice. Biblioteca nazionale
marciana. Mss. (454) n. Homerus. (Codex Venetus A)

Zul-Fakar, Kiwam uU)m Husain ibn adr ul-Dm 'AH STiir-

wani, 13th cent.

... A facsimile of the manuscript (Or. 9777) of Dlwan i
Zul-Fakar, the collected poems of Zul-Fakar Shirwani . . .

1. Manuscripts, Persian Facsimiles, i. British Museum. Mss. (Ori-
ental 9777) n. British Museum. Dept. of Oriental Printed Books and
Manuscripts, m. Title: Dlwan i Zu'1-Fakar.

Chaucer, Geoffrey, d. 1400.

The Cambridge ms (University Library, Gg. 4.27) of Chaucer's
Canterbury tales . . ,

1. Manuscripts, English Facsimiles, i. Cambridge. University. Li-
brary. Mss. (Gg. 4.27) n. Chaucer, Geoffrey. Mss.

7 The rules presented under this heading are based on the cataloging of manuscripts
occurring most frequently in the average library in the form of facsimiles,
^cataloging manuscripts, the following points should be kept in mind:
' ij r? e Designation for a manuscript whether added to the main entry or used as
an added entry requires that the work be either the original manuscript or a facsimile.
If a facsimile, the reproduced text should constitute a considerable part of the entire
manuscript (as preserved) or be arranged to read consecutively.

(2) If the reproductions are interspersed as facsimile pages through a work which
deals with the manuscript, make subject entry under the heading appropriate to the
entire manuscript rather than main or added entry.

(3) A text edited from a manuscript for which the maiu entry is its name or desig-
nation, may (even though not a reproduction) be entered under the same heading,
but without use of the form subject heading MANUSCRIPTS CLANGUAGEU FACSIMUJES.

9A(1) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Keats, John, 1795-1821.

Hyperion, a facsimile of Keats's autograph manuscript . . .
1. Manuscripts, English Facsimiles, i. Keats, John, 1795-1821. Mss,

Villon, Francois, b. 1431.

Deux manuscrits de Frangois Villon (Bibliotheque nationale,
Fonds francais 1661 et 20041) reproduits en phototypie . . .

1. Manuscripts, French Facsimiles, i. Paris. Bibliotheque nationale.
Mss. (Fr. 1661) n. Paris. Bibliotheque nationale. Mss. (Fr. 20041)

A Coptic gnostic treatise contained in the Codex Brucianus
< Bruce ms. 96. Bod. Lib. Oxford > . . .

1, Manuscripts, Coptic Facsimiles, i. Oxford. University. Bodleian
Library. Mss. (Bruce 96) n. Codex Brucianus.

Orthodox Eastern Church. Liturgy and ritual. Menologion.
II menologio di Basilio n (Cod. vaticano greco 1613) . .

1. Manuscripts, Greek Facsimiles, i. Vatican. Biblioteca vaticana.
Mss. (Graec.1613)

Edda Snorra Sturlusonar.

Codex Wormianus (The Younger Edda) Ms. no. 242 fol. in
the Arnamagnean collection in the University Library of Copen-
hagen . . .

1* Manuscripts, Icelandic and Old Norse Facsimiles, i. Copenhagen.
Universitet. Bibliotek, Mss. (Arnamag. 242f)

with reference Codex Wormianus sec Copenhagen. Universitet
Bibliotek. Mss. (Arnamag. 242f)

(1) Enter a manuscript or the facsimile of a manuscript of the
Bible or parts thereof under BIBLE, followed by tibu> word MANUSCRIPTS,
the language of the text, and by further designations appropriate to
the heading for the work concerned. (Cfc 34.) If the manuscript has
a particular name, add it at the end of the heading iix parentheses. 8
When a manuscript is known by a distinctive name and also by a letter
or number, 9 prefer the name in the heading. Make added entry under
the collection or collections to which the manuscript belongs, and
make added entry or reference under the particular name of the
manuscript.

Bible. Manuscripts, Greek (Codex Alexandrinus)

. . . The Codex Alexandrinus (Royal ms. 1 p v~vnx) in reduced
photographic facsimile . . .

1. Manuscripts, Greek Facsimiles, x, British Museum. Mss. (Royal
ID 7-vm)

with, reference Codex Alexandrinus see Bible* Manuscript*. Grefc
(Codex Alexandrinus)

Bible. Manuscripts, Greek. 0. T. Genesis (Wiener Genesis)
Die Wiener Genesis . . ,

use P? ren the$es for Bible manuscripts.
iE?^ catalogue of Greek New Testament manuscripts In

BS24

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 9A(4)

1, Manuscripts, Greek Facsimiles, i. Vienna. Nationalbibliothek.
Mss. (Theol, Graec, 31)

with reference Wiener Genesis see Bible. Manuscripts, Greek. O. T.
Genesis (Wiener Genesis)

(2) For manuscripts in two languages, make the main entry for
the principal language, with added entry for the other.

Bible. Manuscripts, Greek. N. T, Epistles of Paul (Codex Bcer-

nerwnus)

Der Codex Boernerianus der Briefe des Apostels Paulus f Msc.
Dresd. A 145*) ...

Greek with Latin interlinear translation.

1. Manuscripts, Greek Facsimiles. 2. Manuscripts, LatinFac-
similes, i. Bible, Manuscripts, Latin, N. T. Epistles of Paul (Codex
Boernerianus) n. Dresden. Sachsische Landesbibliothek. Mss. (A 145 b )

with reference Codex Bcernerianus see Bible. Manuscripts, Greek.
N. T. Epistles of Paul (Codex Boernerianus)

(3) Enter a manuscript which has neither author nor title under
the name by which it is generally known; or, lacking a name, under
the collection to which it belongs followed by the specific designation
of the manuscript.

Book of Leinster.

The Book of Leinster, sometime called the Book of Glenda-
lough, a collection of pieces (prose and verse) in the Irish
language . . .

1. Manuscripts, IrishFacsimiles. L Dublin. University. Trinity
College. Library. Mss. (H.2.18)

Edwin Smith surgical papyrus.

. . . The Edwin Smith surgical papyrus . . .

The papyrus is named after Edwin Smith, who purchased the docu-
ment in January 1862 during his stay at Thebes. After his death in
1906 it was presented to the New York Historical Society, ct General
introduction.

L New York Historical Society. Library. Mss.

Codex; Fejervary-Mayer.

Codex Fejervry-Mayer: an old Mexican picture manuscript
in the Liverpool Free Public Museums 12014.

~~M~

1. Manuscripts, Mexican Facsimiles. I. Liverpool. Public Libraries
Museums and Art Gallery. Museum. Mss. (M, 12014)

Paris. Bibliotheque nationale. Mss. (Fr. 19152)
. . . Le manuscrit 19152 du Fonds frangais de la Bibliotheque

nationale . . .

Anonymous anthology (without title) of 61 poems.
1. Manuscripts, French Facsimiles.

(4) Enter reproductions of initials, miniatures, or other ornamen-
tations without text, under the artist if known, with subject entry
under the heading appropriate to the entire manuscript. If the artist
is unknown, enter under compiler or editor.

9A(5) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Huntington, Archer Milton, 1870- ed.

Initials and miniatures of the ixth, xth, and xith centuries
from the Mozarabic manuscripts of Santo Domingo de Silos in
the British Museum; with introduction by Archer M. Hunt-
ington . . .

From British Museum Additional mss. 30844-48, 30850-55 ("Visi-
gothic codices")

i. British Museum. Mss. (Additional 30844-30855) n. Title, m
Title: Visigothic codices.

(5) Treat a collection of facsimiles of manuscripts like other col-
lections. (5A) Make added entry under the library or other institu-
tion to which the originals belong.

Budge, Ernest Alfred Thompson Wallis, 1857- ed and tr.
Miscellaneous Coptic texts . , .

1. Manuscripts, Coptic Facsimiles. 2. Manuscripts, Ethiopic _ Fac-
similes. i. British Museum. Mss. (Oriental)

(6) If such a collection is published by the library owning the
manuscripts, enter under the name of the library, without subheading
Mss., or, if the library has a special department to which the collec-
tion belongs, e.g., Department of Manuscripts, enter under the name
of the library with the name of the department as subheading. If the
collection is limited to manuscripts in a specified group make added
entry under the name of the library with subheading Mss. followed
by the name of the group in parentheses.

British Museum. Dept of Manuscripts.
Facsimiles of ... manuscripts in the Stowe collection.
i. British Museum. Mss. (Stowe)

Paris. Bibliothcque nationale. Department des manuscript
... Fac-suniles de manuscrits grccs, latins et francais du
v* au xiv* siecle exposes dans la Galeric mazarine . . .

Prefer the Latin form when the word CODEX or its equivalent occurs
at the beginning of a uniform heading. Refer from other forms.

Codex Ramirez
Refer from
Codice Ramirez,

Codex Mariano Jimenez

Refer from
Codice Mariano Jimenez.

iS*^ referenC from the de P ar tment heading to individual

British Museum. Dept. of Manuscripts,
For individual manuscripts see under

British Museum. Mss. (subdivided by the designation of the

Picuiar manuscript, e.g., British Museum ! (Jlarietei

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY

(7) Treat a single manuscript or facsimile of a manuscript compris-
ing a miscellaneous collection as a single work, not as a collection.

Walters Art Gallery, Baltimore. Mss. (514)

Proverbes en rimes; text and illustrations of the fifteenth
century from a French manuscript in the Walters Art Gallery,
Baltimore, by Grace Frank and Dorothy Miner.
m "The manuscript bears no title and that adopted by us, Proverbes en
rimes, is the one given the related collection, now in the British
Museum, by the cataloguers of the Bibliotheque A. Firmin-Didot.
There is nothing to indicate whether the manuscript is complete or
not." Introd., p. 26.

1. Manuscripts, French Facsimiles, i. Frank, Grace, ed. n. Miner.
Dorothy Eugenia, ed. m. Title.

Paris. Bibliotheque nationale. Mss. (Fr. 837)

Fabliaux, dits et contes en vers frangais du xm 8 siecle; fac-
simile du manuscrit frangais 837 de la Bibliotheque nationale,
public sous les auspices de Tlnstitut de France (Fondation De-
brousse) par Henri Omont . . .

1. Manuscripts, FrenchFacsimiles, i. Omont, Henri Auguste, 1857-
1940. n, Institut de France, Paris. Fondation Debrousse. m. Title.

B. Calendars of manuscripts. Enter calendars of collections of
manuscripts under the person or corporate body responsible for their
preparation* This may be the owner of the collection who prepares
or causes the calendar to be prepared, or an independent person or
body for whose work the owner has no responsibility.

When entry is under owner, make added entry for the person who
does the actual work of preparing the calendar; when entry is under
the compiler, make added entry under the owner of the collection.
If a collection has changed hands but continues to be known by the
name of the original collector, make added entry under that name also.

In the case of a calendar of the collected manuscripts of one person,
make subject entry under the author.

Enter the calendar of a single document under the heading appro-
priate for the document itself.

Enter all calendars of court records, by whomsoever prepared,
under the name of the court,

Wisconsin State Historical Society. Library.

The Preston and Virginia papers of the Draper collection of
manuscripts.

"The work of calendaring the volume has been performed by Miss
Mabel Clare Weaks," Prefatory note.

1. Preston, William, 1729-1783. i. Draper. Lyman Copeland, 1815-
1891. n. Weaks, Mabel Clare.

Chapman, Charles Edward, 1880-

Catalogue of materials in the Archive General de Indias for
the history of the Pacific Coast ... by Charles E. Chapman.

i. Spain. Archivo General de Indias, Seville.

10 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Carnegie Institution of Washington. Dept. of Historical Re-
search.

Calendar of manuscripts in Paris archives and libraries re-
lating to the history of the Mississippi Valley to 1803. Edited
by N. M. Miller Surrey (Mrs. F. M. Surrey) . . . Privately
printed E Washington, D. C. 3 Carnegie Institution of Washing-
ton, Department of Historical Research, 1926-28.
i. Surrey, Nancy Maria (Miller) ed.

Gormanston register.

Calendar of the Gormanston register, from the original in the
possession of the Right Honourable the Viscount of Gormanston.
Prepared and edited by James Mills . . . and M. J. McEnery.

Printed for the Royal Society of Antiquaries of Ireland.

The ancient register book of the Lords of Gormanston seems to
have been prepared or begun in 1397-8 for the purpose of registering
the title-deeds of the property inherited or acquired by Sir Christopher
Preston.

I. Gormanston, Christopher Preston, 2d baron, d. 1422. u. Royal So-
ciety of Antiquaries of Ireland, in. Mills, James, 1849-1914, ed. iv.
McEnery, Michael Joseph, ed.

Chichester, Eng. (Diocese) Consistory Court.

. . . Calendar of wills in the Consistory Court of the Bishop
of Chichester, 1482-1800. By Edward Alexander Fry.

i. Fry, Edward Alexander.

10. Maps 10 and atlases.

A, Enter a map under the name of the person or corporate body
responsible for the content of the map, as, cartographer, editor, pub-
lisher, government bureau, society or institution. 11 Preference should
be given to (1) the person or corporate body stated in the title to be
responsible; (2) cartographer; (3) engraver, if known to be a map
maker; (4) publisher; (5) copyright claimant. If responsibility can-
not be determined, enter under title*

Early maps are usually known as the work of the individual car-
tographer, engraver, or surveyor; recent maps are in most cases issued
by a publishing house or government bureau which assumes full
responsibility for the production.

*For assistance hi the technical problems which arise in connection with maps,
S? i ca ^? ot be 5 ared for x3? a , s tat ment of rules, catalogers are referred to A. H.
mnks. Maps and survey (Cambridge, University Press, 1913) ; S. W. Bogfrs and Dor-
othy C. L^wis, The classification and cataloging of maps and atlwc* (Now York,
Special Libraries Association, 1945) ; L. A. Brown, Notes on the care <fc cataloguing
of old maps (Wmdham, Conn., Hawthorn House, 1940) and Walter Thiele, Official
map publications (Chicago, American Library Association, 1938). The last three con-
^ fences. Maps reprinted or extracted from atlases often can be
through indexes in U. S. Library of Congress, Division of Maps, A list of

PVI^/W * L ? W K * C Sy r ^ 9 ^ Compiled under fflrfct on 3
ashington, Govt Print. Off,, 1909-20).

^ dual 5 corporate author is consistent with the tisage estab-
catal ? gin S and mates possible one catalog for both books and map.

rvT**' ^ nd $ an entry under s ^ ject (U " area Capped) is
A ' American Library Association, Pamphlet* and minor Entry
American Library Association Publishing Board, 1917).) and

^ undcr a -^ - -^ h **&*

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY

Make added entries for publisher and editor if not the main entry,
for engraver if important, and title if distinctive.

U. S. Bureau of Insular Affairs.

Map of the Philippines, prepared in the Bureau of Insular
Affairs, War Department September 1902. Washington, D C
C 1902 3

Rocque, Jean, d. 1762.

Rocque's map of London, 1746. Published by John Pine &
John Tinney in October 1746 according to act of Parliament.
London, London Topographical Society, 1913-19.

Canada. Dept. oj Crown Lands.

... Map of the counties of Gaspe and Bonaventure; exhibit-
ing the lands adjudicated, unsurveyed, clergy reserves, &c . . .
Reduced and compiled from original surveys, by G. G. Dun-
levie . . .

1. Gaspe Co., Quebec Descr. & trav. Maps. 2. Bonaventure Co.,
Quebec Descr* & trav. Maps. i. Dunlevie, G. G.

American Geographical Society of New York.

Physical map of the Arctic.

Translated and revised by the American Geographical Society of
New York from map in Andree's Hand atlas, 8th ed., 1924.

1. Arctic regions Descr. & trav. Maps. i. Andree, Karl Theodor,
1808-1875.

B. Enter atlases under the person or corporate body responsible
for their production: cartographer, publisher, government bureau, so-
ciety, or institution. If responsibility cannot be determined, or if the
work is familiarly known by title, enter under title. Make added
entry for any person or corporate body, other than the one chosen
for main entry, who has had any significant share in or responsibility
for the work. For comprehensive works, make form subject entry
under the form heading ATLASES.

Paullin, Charles Oscar.

Atlas of the historical geography of the United States by
Charles O. Paullin . . . edited by John K. Wright . . . E Wash-
ington, D. C., New York, Published jointly by Carnegie Insti-
tution of Washington and the American Geographical Society
of New York, 1932.

1. Atlases, i. Wright, John Kirtland, 1891- ed. n. Carnegie In-
stitution of Washington. Division of Historical Research, m. American
Geographical Society of New York. iv. Title.

U. S. Geological Survey.

. , . World atlas of commercial geology . . .

1. Atlases, z, Title.
Ogle (George A.) & Co., pub.

Standard atlas of Ford County, Illinois, including a plat book
of the villages, cities and townships of the county . . .

The People's illustrated & descriptive family atlas of the world,
indexed.

Maps by George F. Cram.
1. Atlases, i. Cram, George Franklin, 1841-1928.

11 _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

11. Mediumistic writings.

Enter a work received through a medium (automatic writing, table
rapping, ouija board, etc.) under the medium with added entry for
the purported author.

Ramsdell, Sarah A*

Food for the million; or, Thoughts from beyond the borders
of the material. By Theodore Parker, through the hand of
Sarah A. Ramsdell, medium.

L Parker, Theodore, 1810-1860. n. Title.

Livingston, Marjorie (Prout) 1893-

. . . The new Nuctemeron (the twelve hours of Apollonius
of Tyana) preface by Sir Arthur Conan Doyle, and explanatory
note by the amanuensis.

"This remarkable script purports to be produced under the direct
inspiration of Apollonius of Tyana."
i. Apollonius, of Tyana. n. Title.

12. Music. 12

A. Enter a single musical work or the collected works of one
composer under the name of the composer. Make added entries for
arrangers and editors, and if there is text, make added entry for its
author and title. When several authors are represented, make added
entries as necessary.

Instrumental work:

Elgar, Sir Edward William, 1857-1934.

. . . Introduction and allegro for strings (quartet and orches-
tra) composed by Edward Elgar. (Op. 47) ...

Song:

Homer, Sidney, 1864-

. . . Sing to me, sing; song with piano accompaniment. Poem
from "Hawthorn and lavender," by W, E. Henley . . ,

x. Henley, William Ernest, 1849-1903. Sing to me, sing.

Collection of songs by one composer:

Elgar, Sir Edward William, 1857-1934.

. . , Sea pictures, a cycle of five songs for contralto . . . The
music by Edward Elgar, Op. 37 ... The words by Radon Noel,
C. A. Elgar, Elizabeth Barrett Browning, Richard Garnett, Adam
Lindsay Gordon.

cAdded entries are not made for the authors in tKia casci
Opera:

Parker, Horatio William, 1863-1919.
Mona, an opera in three acts, the poem by Brian Hooker,

t to A*$?*5?y **wwy to establish a conventional or
n occu P l t es . th * By between the author entry and the title as

nJ W5f^ I * T ^ e *T5 k *. bai ? 3L J . 3Ch ^ e Pte the conventional title is
not shown, nor are title added entries indicated. In preparing cards for the catalog,

*^ 1 conventional titl & not given, a line should be left blank for

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 12A(2)

the music by Horatio Parker . . .
i. Hooker, Brian, 1880-1946. Mona.

(1) Enter a folk song or traditional melody under the composer
responsible for the arrangement in hand, with added entry for the
title. If the composer is not known, enter under title. 13

Gould, Morton, 1913-

Sometimes I feel like a motherless child, Negro spiritual; A
Morton Gould string choir arrangement.

(2) Enter a libretto of an opera, oratorio, masque or other dramatic
work under the composer of the music, with added entry for the
librettist and the title. If the same text is published as a literary work
rather than as a libretto, or if there is no ascertainable connection
between the text and a particular composer or performance, enter
under the author of the text. If an earlier work, such as a novel,
drama or poem has been adapted, make added entry under the author
and title of the original work. 14

Composer and librettist named on title page:

Gruenberg, Louis, 1883-

Jack and the beanstalk, a fairy opera for the child-like, by
John Erskine; for music by Louis Gruenberg.

i. Erskine, John, 1879- Jack and the beanstalk.

Composer not named on title page; named in dedication:

Purcell, Henry, 1658 or 9-1695.

King Arthur; or, The British worthy. A dramatick opera.
Perform'd at the Qveens Theatre by Their Majesties servants.
Written by Mr. Dryden.

i. Dryden, John, 1631-1700. King Arthur.

Performance mentioned; composer not named:

[Monsigny, Pierre Alexandra de] 1729-1817.
Le deserteur, drame en trois actes, en prose, mele de musique;

13 The title may take the form of a uniform heading following the rule for anony-
mous classics. (33)

"Alternative: Enter a libretto under the librettist, with added entry under the
composer and title of the work. If the author is not known, enter under title.

Composer and librettist named on title page:

Erskine, John, 1879-

Helen retires; an opera in three acts, by John Erskine; for music
by George Antheil.

i. Antheil, George, 1900- Helen retires.

Composer named; libretto anonymous:

La finta giardiniera. Dramma giocoso da rappresentarsi in Prato nel
camevale delT anno 1775-nel teatro pubblico dei Nobili Accademici
Semplici . . .

i. Anfossi, Pasquale, 1727-1797. La finta giardiniera.

12A(3) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

par M. Sedaine. La musique par M.*** Represente a Paris pour
la premiere fois par les Comediens italiens ordinaires du Roi,
le lundi 6 mars 1769.
i. Sedaine, Michel Jean, 1719-1797. Le deserteur.

No mention of composer or of performance:

Zeno, Apostolo, 1668-1750.
Merope.
(In his Poesie drammatiche, Venezia, 1774, 1. 1, p. 81-171)

cNo composer is mentioned- The libretto was set to music by various
composers]

Libretto adapted from earlier work:

Thomas, Ambroise, 1811-1896.

Hamlet, opera en cinq ac.tes par Michel Carre et Jules Barbier,
musique de Ambroise Thomas.

Adapted from Shakespeare's Hamlet.

i. Carre, Michel, 1819-1872. Hamlet, n. Barbier, Jules, 1825-1901
Hamlet, m. Shakespeare, William. Hamlet.

Identical text published as a literary work and as a libretto:
Millay, Edna St. Vincent, 1892-
The King's henchman; a play in three acts . . .

Taylor, Deems, 1885-

The King's henchman, lyric drama in three acts: book by
Edna St. Vincent Millay, music by Deems Taylor.

i. Millay, Edna St. Vincent, 1892- The King's henchman.

iThe examples given below show the kind of references which may
be used to connect entries under both librettist and composer]

Millay, Edna St. Vincent, 1892-
The King's henchman.

Editions of this work published as librettos of the opera by Deems
Taylor are entered under the name of the composer.

Taylor, Deems, 1885-
The King's henchman.

B^u^S* without *** usi $ Polished as literary works rather than
as librettos, are entered under the name of the dramatist Edna St
Vincent Millay.

(3) Enter a pasticcio under the name of the person responsible for
the arrangement of the material in this form. If, however, there is
difficulty in determining which of several persons would have the
status of author or editor, enter under title. Make added entries as
necessary for the composers and librettists whose work is adapted or
parodied for the author of the new libretto, and for any others who
have contributed important work,

Bishop, Sir Henry Rowley, 1786-1855
K

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY _ 12A(6)

tA collection of musical numbers with v&ry slight plot and little ref-
erence to Faust. Bishop's name, although third on the title-page, is
printed in larger letters than those of the others; he contributed six
of the twelve numbers, Horn, three, Cooke,

(4) For incidental music, make added entry under the author and
title of the play for which the music was composed.

Sharp, Cecil James, 1859-1924.

The songs and incidental music arranged and composed by
Cecil J. Sharp for Granville Barker's production of A mid-
summer night's dream at the Savoy Theatre in January, 1914 . . .

i% Shakespeare, William. A midsummer night's dream.

(5) For ballets, pantomimes and other dance compositions, make
added entry for the author and title of the scenario or program, and
for the choreographer if his work is represented. Where the scenario
or choreography is published apart from the music, enter under its
own author, with added entry for the composer and title of the work.

Score:

Falla, Manuel de, 1876-1946.

El sombrero de tres picos. Le tricorne. The three-cornered
hat. Ballet de G. Martinez Sierra d'apres le roman de P. A. de
Alarcon. Musique de Manuel de Falla.

i. Martinez Sierra, Gregorio, 1881- El sombrero de tres picos.
n. Alarcon, Pedro Antonio de, 1833-1891. EH sombrero de tres picos.

Scenario:

Bosato, Arturo.

Castello nel bosco, azione coreografica in un quadro, per la
musica di Franco Casavola.

i. Casavola, Franco, 1892- Castello nel bosco.

(6) liturgical music. Enter music officially prescribed by a church,
or music authorized by a church council or other governing body,
under the name of the church, with an appropriate subheading, if
needed. (Cf. rules 116F and 120G.)

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Hymnary.

The hymns of the Dominican missal and breviary, edited with
introduction and notes by Aquinas Byrnes . . .

I. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual, Dominican, n. Byrnes,
Aquinas, ed.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Psalter.

The Psalms with Gregorian notation for Sundays and feast-
days at vespers and compline.

i. Bible. O. T. Psalms. Latin. Selections. 1938.

Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A.

The hymnal; published by the authority of the General
Assembly of the Presbyterian Church in the United States of
America, 1933.

Clarence Dickinson, editor; C. W. Laufer, assistant editor, cf. p. c li

i. Dickinson, Clarence, 1873- ed. n. Laufer, Calvin Weiss, 1874-
1938, joint ed.

12A(7) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(7) Enter a musical setting of a mass, requiem or other text for
church use under the composer. Prefer a subject (or form) heading
to which a general reference is made from the church heading, to
added entry for the text under the name of the church.

Beethoven, Ludwig van, 1770-1827.

Messe (Missa solemnis) fur 4 Solostimmen, Chor und Orchester
von L. van Beethoven.

1. Masses.

Make general reference:

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Missal.

For musical settings of the mass see entries under the sub-
ject heading, Masses.

Yon, Pietro Alessandro, 1886-1943.
Missa "Regina Pacis" in honor of St. Vincent Ferrer.
1. Masses.
[Added entry not made for the person honored)

Bruckner, Anton, 1824-1896.

. . . Te Deum laudamus, for chorus, soli and orchestra by
Anton Bruckner . . ,

1. Te Deum laudamus.

(8) Enter a psalter with music by one composer under the com-
poser. For psalters officially prescribed for church use, see (6) above.
If the composer is unknown or if there are several composers, enter
under the heading for the text. (Cf, 34.)

Playford, John, 1623-1686?

Psalms & hymns in solemn musick of foure parts on the com*
mon tunes to the Psalms in metre: used in parish-churches . .
By John Playford.

L Bible. O. T. Psalms. English. Paraphrases. 1671. Sternhold and
Hopkins.

Bible. O. T. Psalms. French. Paraphrases. 2920.
. . . Psaumes, avec les mdlodies.
Translator's name, Clement Marot, at head of title.
"Introduction" signed: Th6odore Gerold.
i. Marot, Clement, 14957-1544, tr. re. Gerold, Theodore, 18G6- cd.

(9) Enter a cadenza under the composer of the concerto or other
work with which it is associated, with added entry under the com-
poser of the cadenza.

Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus, 1756-1791.

Cadenzas for the flute concerto in G major (K.313) by
Mozart . . . [By] Georges Barrfere.

r. Barrere, Georges, 1876-1944.

(10) Enter arrangements, transcriptions, paraphrases and other
compositions in which the work of the original composer has been
changed, extended, or used in a new context under the original com-

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 12A(11)

poser or under the arranger, depending on Hie extent of new composi-
tion involved. Criteria for determining whether a composition is a
new work are: marked difference in length, introduction of new
thematic material, marked differences in harmonization. The mere
addition of embellishments (trills, runs, and passage work) does
not constitute a new work. In case of doubt, enter under the orig-
inal composer.
Arrangement:

Schubert, Franz Peter, 1797-1828.

. . . Franz Schubert's Marsche flir das Orchester iibertragen
von F. Liszt . . . Partitur.

i. Liszt, Franz, 1811-1886, arr.

Transcription, not constituting new work:

Beethoven, Ludwig van, 1770-1827.

Adelaide de Beethoven, transcrite pour piano par H. Cramer.
I. Cramer, Heinrich, b. ca. 1818, arr.

Transcription, constituting new work:

Respighi, Ottorino, 1879-1936.

"Rossiniana": suite for orchestra, from "Les riens" of G.
Rossini. Freely transcribed by Ottorino Respighi.

i. Rossini, Gioacdbino Antonio, 1792-1868. Les riens.

Paraphrase:

Liszt, Franz, 1811-1886.

. . . Concert-Paraphrasen iiber Verdi's Rigoletto, Trovatore,
Ernani, fur Pianoforte von Franz Liszt.

i. Verdi, Giuseppe, 1813-1901.

Opera adaptation:

Bizet, Georges, 1838-1875.

Carmen Jones, by Oscar Hammerstein n, based on Meilhac
and Halevy's adaptation of Prosper Merimee's Carmen.

i. Hammerstein, Oscar, 1895- Carmen Jones, n. Meilhac, Henri,
1831-1897. Carmen, m. Halevy, Ludovic, 1834-1908. Carmen.

(11) Enter fantasias, rhapsodies, caprices, medleys, potpourris,
variations, etc., under the composer of the medley, unless it is made
up of excerpts from the work of one composer. In such cases enter
under the original composer. If the title indicates the use of bor-
rowed thematic material, make added entry for the composer whose
work has been borrowed. (Cf. 22.)

Fantasia:

Smith, Edward Sydney, 1839-1889.

. . . Fra Diavolo, fantaisie brillante pour piano sur Topera
comique d'Auber par Sydney Smith. Op.67 . . .

i. Auber, Daniel Francois Esprit, 1782-1871. Fra Diavolo.

12B _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Composition on borrowed theme:

Rachmaninoff, Sergei, 1873-1943.

. , . Rapsodie sur un theme de Paganini, op.43, pour piano
et orchestre . . .

r. Paganini, Nicolo, 1782-1840.

Work modelled upon the style of another composer:

Tausig, Karl, 1841-1871.

Nouvelle soirees de Vienne, Valses-caprices d'apres J. Strauss
[par] Ch. Tausig . . .

I. Strauss, Johann, 1825-1899.

Medley:

Paul, S T

"Hodge podge," medley . . . Two-part chorus for female
voices. Arranged by S. T. Paul.

Works included: Waltz from Faust (Gounod); Soft and light as
mists of the morning; Jingle bells (J. S. Pierpont) ; Old folks at home
(S. C. Foster); The rally (S. T. Paul); Nelly Gray (B. R. Hanby);
Kentucky home (S. C. Foster) ; The flag of freedom.

Potpourri, from one composer:

Strauss, Johann, 1825-1899.

Streifzug durch Johann Straussche Opcretten. Potpourri fur
kleines Orchester, von Ludwig Schlogel.

i. Schlogel, Ludwig,

B. If the composer is not known, enter the work under title
(Cf. 32.)

Les amusements d'Orphee, Menuet italien pour les violons,
flute et hautbois.

C. Enter a spurious work or a work of doubtful authorship (Cf.
31.) under the name of the composer to whom it has been generally
attributed, followed by the designation SUPPOSED COMPOSER. The
designation is used in an added entry as well as in main entry.

D. Enter a composition written by two or more composers in col-
laboration under the one first mentioned on the title page, with com-
poser and title added entries under the others*

Schumann, Robert Alexander, 1810-1856.

F, A. E. In Erwartung der Ankunft des verehrten und gelieb-
ten Freundes Joseph Joachim schriebcn diose Senate Robert
Schumann, Albert Dietrich und Johannes Brahms * . .

1829 - 1908 - F - A * *

E. Enter collections of compositions by several composers under
the compiler or editor. If, in the case of collections containing both
text and music, the work of the editor of tho text seems to be more
important than that of the compiler or the editor of the music, enter

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY ISA

under the editor of the text. If the work of the editor or editing body
appears to be slight, enter under the title, with added entry for
the editor.

Robert.

from the hills of Vermont, sung by James and Mary
Atwood and Aunt Jenny Knapp. Texts collected and edited
by Edith B. Sturgis. Tunes collected and piano accompaniment
arranged with historical notes by Robert Hughes.
i. Sturgis, Edith B.

Friedlaender, Max, 1852-1934, ed.

Gedichte yon Goethe in Compositionen . . . Herausgegeben
von Max Friedlaender.

L Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1749-1832.

Larkin, Margaret, 1899- comp.

Singing cowboy; a book of Western songs, collected and edited
by Margaret Larkin; arranged for piano by Helen Black.

i. Black, Helen, 1890- arr.

Bing Crosby's album of song souvenirs . . . with arrangements
of the . . . songs for all Bb and Eb instruments . . .
i. Crosby, Bing, 1901-

F, Enter a thematic catalog under the compiler, if known, other-
wise under the publisher. Make subject entry for the composer.

Kochel, Ludwig Alois Friedrich, Ritter von, 1800-1877.

Chronologisch-thematisches Verzeichnis samtlicher Tonwerke
Wolfgang Amadeus Mozarts . . . von Dr. Ludwig Ritter von
Kochel. 3. Aufl. bearbeitet von Alfred Einstein.

1. Mozart, Wolfgang Amadeus Thematic catalogs, i. Einstein, Al-
fred, 1880- ed.

Breitkopf & Hartel, Leipzig, pub.

Thematisches Verzeichnis samtlicher in Druck erschienenen
Werke von Ludwig van Beethoven.

1. Beethoven, Ludwig van Thematic catalogs.

13. Private collections (Catalogs).

A. Enter catalogs, lists, etc., of private collections (libraries, art
galleries, numismatic cabinets, stamp collections, etc.) under the name
of the owner of the collection, with added entry under the name of
the author (compiler) of the work, and under place when known
also by the latter.

Walters, William Thompson, 1820-1894.

Oriental collection of W. T. Walters, 65 Mt Vernon Place,
Baltimore.

Brinley, George, 1817-1875.

Catalogue of the American library of the late Mr. George
Brinley . . .

Compiled by J. H. Trumbull.

i. Trumbull, James Hammond, 1821-1897.

13B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

B. When a private collection has passed into the possession of
some institution, society, or other body, entry for all subsequent pub-
lications is to be made under the name of that body, with added entry
under the name of the collection and the original collector. Publica-
tions issued before the change of ownership are to have added entry
under the name of the institution or other body into whose possession
the collection has passed.

Boston. Public Library. Prince collection.

The Prince library. A catalogue of the collection of books and
manuscripts which formerly belonged to the Reverend Thomas
Prince, and was by him bequeathed to the Old South Church,
and is now deposited in the Public Library of the city of Boston.

i. Boston. Old South Church, n. Prince, Thomas, 1687-1758.

Grace, Frederick, 1779-1859.

A catalogue of maps, plans, and views of London, West-
minster & Southwark collected and arranged by Frederick Grace;
edited by his son John Gregory Grace. London, 1878.

Collection purchased by the British Museum in 1880.

i. Grace, John Gregory, n. British Museum. Dept. of Printed Books.
Map Room.

C. Enter under the name of the compiler unofficial catalogs of
books or other objects in libraries, exhibitions, galleries, museums,
etc., private or public; i.e., catalogs which are not issued as publica-
tions under the auspices of the owners or custodians of the collections
concerned, though possibly with their approval. Make added entry
under the name of the personal or institutional owner.

Daley, Charles Marie, 1897-

Incunabula of Albert Magnus in the Library of Congress, by
Rev. Charles M. Daley.

r. U. S. Library of Congress.

D. Enter dealers' sales catalogs limited to an individual collection
under the name of the collector (individual, association, institution,
or firm)*

Thomas, George Clifford, d. 1909.

. . . Autographs, rare books and fine bindings, the collection
of the late George C. Thomas, to be sold . . . November 18 . . ,
and . . . November 19, 1924 ... in our art gallcri*.* . . . und<>r
the management of Samuel T. Freeman & Co., auctioneers . . .

If the catalog covers several collections, one of which is the principal
or featured collection, enter under the name of the principal collector,

Salter, Allen, 1864-1933.

TII" * *^ e * enow ?? d ^dical library of Allen Salter, M.D., of
111., with a few additions, for sale by Argosy Book Stores, inc.

Unidentified collections and miscellaneous sales catalogs are entered
under the name of the dealer.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 14C

Maggs Bros., London.

. . . English literature of the 19th & 20th centuries, being a
selection of first and early editions of the works of esteemed
authors & book illustrators, together with books on sports and
pastimes , . .

14. Radio scripts.

A. Enter a radio script or series of scripts under the author, when
known. If all of the series were written for a named program or for
a single broadcasting company, make added entry under the name
of the program followed by RADIO PROGRAM in parentheses, or tinder
the name of the broadcasting company.

Corwin, Norman Lewis, 1910-
Thirteen by Corwin, radio dramas.

Fane, Guy.

Over the garden wall (Mrs. "H." and Mrs. "C." gossip, as
broadcast in Monday night at seven") A series of comedy
episodes, by Guy Fane.

I. Monday night at seven (Radio program)

B. Enter a single script, when no author is named, under a named
program or a broadcasting company or station, if any is mentioned;
otherwise under title.

Columbia Broadcasting System.

CBS open letter on race hatred. Saturday, July 24th, 1943
(as broadcast)
i. Title.

C. Enter collections of radio scripts by different authors or by un-
named authors under editor or under title. However, if all were
written for a named program or broadcast by a single company or
station, enter under the name of the program or the name of the
company or station, giving preference to the name of the program,
if distinctive. Make added entry for the name of the company.

Rees, Leslie, 1905- ed.
Australian radio plays, edited by Leslie Rees.

Americans at work (Radio program)
Americans at work. May 20, 1939-
i, Columbia Broadcasting System.

The family hour (Radio program)

United nations; six radio dramatizations presented on "The
family hour," starring Gladys Swarthout, Deems Taylor and
Al Goodman.

Amigos inolvidables (Radio program)

Amigos inolvidables; recopilacion de los folletos correspon-
dientes a la ... serie de audiciones del programa "Amigos
inolvidables," auspiciado por la Asociacion de Difusion Inter-
americana, transmitido por LR1, Radio El Mundo y la Red azul
y blanca, Buenos Aires.

15 _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

National Broadcasting Company, inc.

These four men; radio biographies of the four most talked-
about men in the world, Winston Churchill, Joseph Stalin,
Adolf Hitler, Franklin D. Roosevelt, presented by the National
Broadcasting Company.

15. Scenarios (Motion picture).

Enter scenarios of motion pictures under the title of the picture,
with explanatory phrase MOTION PICTURE added in parentheses to
the heading.

Elephant boy (Motion picture)

16. Ships' logs.

Enter the official log of a ship under the name of the ship. Make
added entry for the commanding officer if his name appears promi-
nently on the title page.

Gloucester (17. S. gunboat)

Log of the U. S. gunboat Gloucester, commanded by Lt-Com~
mander Richard Wainwright, and the official reports of the
principal events of her cruise during the late war with Spain.

i. WainwrigHt, Richard, 1849-1926.

Bon Homme Richard (Ship)

The log of the Bon Homme Richard; with introduction by
Louis F. Middlebrook.

Includes the account by Nathaniel Fanning of tho sea battle of
September 23, 1779 (p. 49-61)

I. Fanning, Nathaniel, 1755-1805. n. Middlebrook, Louis Frank, 1866*

Ariel (Steam yacht)
Log of the "Ariel" in the gulf of Maine.

17* Theses and dissertations. 15

A, Eater under the author theses and dissertations issued after
1800 with the exceptions noted in C, p. 39,

B. Enter under praeses dissertations issued before 1800 at con-
tinental European universities and faculties. Make added entry under
the respondent. Include the word PRABSES or RESPONDENT in the
heading.

Schurtzfleisch, Conrad Samuel, 1641-1708, praeses.
. . . Lemmata antiqvitatum francicarum . , .
Diss, Wittenberg (P. C. Scheibler, respondent)
i. Scheibler, P. C., respondent

ReinJharth, Tobias Jacob, 1684-1743, praese*.

. . . De^rervm vxoriarvm marito traditarvm favore. et qvibvs-
dam cavtionibvs earvm cavsa attendis . . ,

Diss. Erfurt (G, L. Hoyer, respondent and author)

L Hoyer, Georg Leopold, respondent

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY

> -

Make exception in favor of entry under respondent in cases of well-
authenticated authorship. 16 In case of doubt prefer main entry under
praeses.

Rudolphi, Karl Asmund, 1771-1832, respondent and author.
Observations circa vermes intestionales . . .
Diss. Greifswald.
Part 1, Joannes Quistorp, praeses; pt. 2, Chr. Ehrenfr. Weigel, praeses.

; 9o i ? OIp Joannes > P^eses. n. Weigel, Christian Ehrenfried von,
1784-1831, praeses.

If two respondents are named without a praeses, and without
designating the author, enter under the first and make added entry
for the second.

C. Treat in the same way as in B, p. 38-39, the later dissertations of
certain universities at which the old custom continued after 1800 (e.g.,
the Swedish and Finnish, and some of the German, particularly
Tubingen) .

Schuebler, Gustav, 1787-1834, praeses.

Untersuchungen iiber das specifische Gewicht der Samen und
naheren Bestandtheile des Pflanzenreichs . . .

Inaug.-Diss. Tubingen (C. F. Renz, respondent)

i. Renz, Carl Friedrich, respondent.

D. Enter a dissertation consisting of an edition or translation of
the work of another under the original author. (Cf. 2.)

Alanus de Insulis, d. 1202.

The Anticlaudian of Alain de Lille; prologue, argument and
nine books, translated, with an introduction and notes . . . rby 3
William Hafner Comog.

W. H. Cornog's thesis (PHJD.) University of Pennsylvania, 1934.
1, Cornog, William Hafner, 1909- tr. n. Titie.

E* Enter a program dissertation under the author of the disserta-
tion. If a program is accompanied by two or more dissertations, enter
each independently. Added entry under the institution (or, if the
case require, form subject entry) may be made.

Elter, Anton, 1858-1925.

. . . De Henrico Glareano geographo et antiquissima forma
'Americae' cotnmentatio.

Programme-Bonn (Natalicia GvHelmi n)

i. Bonn. Universitat

"The respondent's designation as "auctor" on the title page, however, is not to be
accepted as proof of his authorship without other evidence. Concerning the author-
ship of dissertations entered under the praeses, see the following: Ferdinand Eichler,
"Die Autorschaft der akademischen Disputationen," Sammlung Ubliothekswissen-
schaftlicher Arbeiten, Hft. 10 (1896), p. 24-37; Hft 11 (1898), p. 1-40. Ewald
Horn, 'Die Disputationen und Promotionen an den deutschen Universitaten, vornehm-
lich seit dem 16. Jahrhundert/' Centralblatt jur Bibliothekswesen, 11. Beiheft (1893)
and Georg Kaufmann, u Zur Geschichfce dor aeadermschen Grade und Disputationen,"
ibid., XI. Jahrg. (May, 1894), p. 201-225.

18 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Jeitteles, Ludwig Heinrich, 1830-1883.

Ueber einige seltene und wenig bekannte Saugethiere des
siidostlichen Deutschlands . . .

Programm N. <D. Landes-Ober-Realschule, St. Polten.

I. Sankt Polten, Austria. Landes-Real- und Ober- Gymnasium.

Rydberg, Johannes Robert, 1854-1919.
Fysikens utveckling till allman tillstandslara . . .
Programm Lund (with list of doctors' degrees)
1. Lund. Universitet. Doctors' degrees, 1903.

18. Visitations, Heraldic.

Enter heraldic visitations under the name of the herald or king-of-
arms who makes the visitation. Make added entries for other heralds
assisting in or continuing the visitation, for the editor, for the college
or king-of-arms, and make form subject entry under the heading
VISITATIONS, HERALDIC.

Bysshe, Sir Edward, 16157-1679.

The visitation of Sussex, anno Domini 1662, made by Sir Ed-
ward Bysshe, knt . . . edited and annotated by A. W. Hughes
Clarke, F. s. A.

1. Visitations, Heraldic Sussex, Eng. I. Hughes Clarke, Arthur Wil-
liam, 1873- ed. H. England, College of Arms. m. Title.

19. Works of art.

A. Enter under the artist collections of drawings, or reproduc-
tions of drawings, engravings, paintings, sculptures, photographs, or
designs of other art objects, which are the work of a single artist, and
issued without text, with prefatory notice and list of plates only, or
with a brief descriptive or other text of obviously secondary im-
portance. Make added entry for the editor or compiler, personal or
corporate (museum, gallery, association, etc.) as the case may be,
Capon, William, 1757-1827.

Views of Westminster, sketched 1801-1815 and drawn in water-
colours by William Capon. Reproduced from the originals in the
possession of the Society of Antiquaries with Capon's descrip-
tions annotated by Philip Norman . , .

i. Norman, Philip, 1842-1931. n. Society of Antiquaries of London,
m. Title.

Diirer, Albrecht, 1471-1528.

Albrecht Diirers samtliche Kupferstiche im Grossc dor Qrig-
inale in Lichtdruck wiedergegcben, ncbst einem erlnuternden
Vorwort von Dr. Franz Friedrich Leitschuh . . >

I. Leitschuh, Franz Friedrich, 1865-1924, od.
Brangwyn, Sir Frank, 1867-

The British Empire panels designed for the House of Lords
by Frank Brangwyn, R, A.; descriptive text by Frank Rutter,
foreword by the Earl of Iveagh.

i. Rutter, Frank Vane Phipson, 1876-1937. , Title.
Rubens, Sir Peter Paul, 1577-1640.

The masterpieces of Rubens . . . sixty reproductions , ,
from the original paintings . *

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 19C

Rodin, Auguste, 1840-1917.
Sculptures de Rodin,

Adams, Ansel Easton, 1902-

The four seasons in Yosemite National Park; a photographic
story of Yosemite's spectacular scenery, photographed by Ansel
Adams, edited by Stanley Plumb.

i. Plumb, Stanley, ed.

B. Enter engravings which reproduce the work of another artist
under the original artist with added entry for the engraver, but enter
reproductions of the work of several artists by a single engraver
under the engraver.

Turner, Joseph Mallord William, 1775-1851.

Picturesque views on the southern coast of England, from
drawings made principally by J. M. W. Turner, R. A., and en-
graved by W. B. Cooke, George Cooke, and other eminent
engravers . . .

I, Cooke, William Bernard, 1778-1855, engr. n. Cooke, George 1781-
1834, engr. me. Title.

Feuchere, Leon, 1804-1857.

^L'art industriel, recueil de dispositions et de decorations in-
terieures, comprenant des modeles pour toutes les industries
d'ameublement et de luxe ... 72 planches composees et des-
sinees jpar Leon Feuchere . . . gravees par Varin freres et
precedees d'une introduction sur TappHcation de Tart a
Tindustrie.

i. Varin, Amedee, 1818-1883, engr. n. Varin, Eugene Napoleon, 1831-
engr.

Finden, William, 1787-1852.

Views of ports and harbours, watering places, fishing villages,
and other picturesque objects on the English coast. Engraved
by William and Edward Finden, from paintings by J. D, Harding,
G. Balmer, E. W. Cooke, T. Creswick and other eminent artists.

Text by W. A. Chatto.

i. Finden, Edward Francis, 1791-1857. n. Chatto, William Andrew,
1799-1864, ed m. Title.

C. If the drawings, engravings, etc., form part of a work, even a
more or less independent part (portfolio, or separate volume or vol-
umes) in conjunction with a substantial text by a person (or persons)
other than the artist himself, make the main entry under the author
of the text with added entry, or subject (depending on the individual
case) under the artist. In case of doubt, prefer main entry under the
author of the text, with subject entry under artist.

Hind, Charles Lewis, 1862-1927.
Augustus Saint-Gaudens, by C. Lewis Hind.
1. Saint Gaudens, Augustus, 1848-1907.
c47 pages of text, 52 plates^

19D _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Home, Herbert Percy, 1864-1916.

Alessandro Filipepi, commonly called Sandro Botticelli,
painter of Florence, by Herbert P. Horne.

1, Botticelli, Sandro, 14477-1510.

t366 pages of text, 42 plates^

D, When an artist and an author collaborate in the production
of a work, enter under the one whose contribution forms the pre-
dominant feature of the work, and make added entry for the other.
In case of doubt, prefer entry under the author of the text.

Smith, Alice Ravenel Huger, 1876-

A Carolina rice plantation of the fifties; 30 paintings in water*
colour, by Alice R. Huger Smith, narrative by Herbert Ravenel
Sass, with chapters from the unpublished memoirs of D. E. Huger
Smith.

x. Sass, Herbert Ravenel, 1884- n. Smith, Daniel Elliott Huger.
m. Title.

Kemble, Edward Windsor, 1861-1933.
Cartoons by E. W. Kemble; limericks by G. Mayo . . .
L Mayo, Gertrude, 1879-

Casdprff, Heinz.

Heiteres Capri, von Heinz CasdorfL Mit Bildern von Erica
Casdorff-Westendorff.
i. Casdorff-Westendorff, Erica, illus. n. Title.

E. When the contribution of the artist is limited to the illustration
of a work independently written by another person, make added entry
for the illustrator only if the illustrations are a noteworthy feature
of the work.

Dante AKghieri, 1265-1321.

The Divine comedy of Dante Alighieri, translated by Jeffer-
son Butler Fletcher . . .

Illustrations from drawings by Botticelli.

Butler ' 1865 " tr ' n " Botticem '

Coleridge, Samuel Taylor, 1772-1834.

Rime of the ancient mariner. By Samuel Taylor Coleridge.
With twenty illustrations by J. Noel Paton, R.S.JU

I. Paton, Sir Joseph Noel, 1821-1901, illus. n. Title.
Barne, Kitty, 1883-

She shall have music, by Kitty Barne; illustrated by Ruth
Gervis , , .

x. Title. [No added entry for illustrator]

But if the illustrations are assembled and published without the
text, enter under the illustrator with subject entry under the name
of the author of the text with subheading ILLUSTRATIONS,

Paton, Sir Joseph Noel, 1821-190L

Compositions from Shakespeare's Tempest Fifteen
ings in outline. By Sir J. Noel Paton.

1. Shakespeare, William*- Illustrations.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 21A

F. Enter architectural drawings and plans of buildings tinder the
person (architect) or corporate body responsible for them.
Burges, WHKam, 1827-1881.

The architectural designs of William Surges, A. R. A, edited
by Richard Popplewell Pullan, F. R. i. B. A.

i. Pullan, Richard Popplewell, 1825-1888, ed.
Kaufmann, Oskar, 1873-

Der Architekt Oskar Kaufmann; Vorwort von Oscar Bie: mit
140 Abbildungen auf 127 Tafeln und 5 Farbentafeln.

i. Bie, Oskar, 1864-1938.

Northwestern Lumbermen's Association, Minneapolis.

Practical small homes. 3d ed. . . . Designs by Northwestern
Lumbermen s Ass'n, Minneapolis, Minn.

Works Related to Previous Publications

20. Revisions,

Enter a revision under the name of the original author with added
entry for the reviser* (Cf. 2.)

c Chisholm, George Goudie, 1850-1930.

. . . Europe . . . edited by B. C. Wallis . . . London, E. Stan-
ford, ltd. c 1924-25? 3

The work of G. C. Chisholm in the previous edition, 1899-1902, has
been largely retained. It has been brought up to date by B. C. Wallis.

i. Wallis, Bertie Cotterell, ed.

The rule applies as long as the work remains substantially that of
the original author, especially if it purports to be an edition of his
work. If, however, the revision is substantially a new work, enter
it under the reviser with added entry for the author and title of
the original work.

Mudge, Isadora Gilbert, 1875-

New guide to reference books, by Isadore Gilbert Mudge . . .
Based on the 3d edition of Guide to the study and use of refer-
ence books by Alice Bertha Kroeger as revised by I. G. Mudge.

i. Kroeger, Alice Bertha, d. 1909, Guide to the study and use of
reference books,

Seubert, Adolf Friedrich, 1819-1890, ed.

Allgemeines Kiinstler-Lexicon; oder, Leben und Werke der
beruhmtesten bildenden Ktinstler. 2. AufL umgearbeitet und
erganzt von A. Seubert

Second edition of Friedrich Miiller's Die Kiinstler aller Zeiten und
Volker.

i. Muller, Friedrich, d. ca. 1858. Pie Kiinstler aller Zeiten und
Volker.

21. Translations*

A. Enter a translation tinder the author of the original work, with
added entry for the translator. (Cf. 32G, 33A.)

21B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Maurois, Andre, 1885-

The Edwardian era, by Andre Maurois; translated by Hamish
Miles.

I. Miles, Hamish, 1894-1937, tr. n. Title.

B. Enter translations from various authors by a single translator,
published as one work, under the translator.

Underwood, Edna (Worthley) 1873- tr.

Short stories from the Balkans, translated into English by
Edna Worthley Underwood.

CONTENTS.

C. Enter translations from various authors by different trans-
lators under the compiler or editor, or under title. (Cf. 5A.)

Cohen, Gustave, 1879- ed.

... La "comedie" latine en France au xn e siecle; textes
publies sous la direction et avec une introduction de Gustave
Cohen . . . Textes etablis et traduits par Marcel Abraham,
Robert Baschet, Andre Cordier L etc . . .

r, Abraham, Marcel, tr. n. Baschet, Robert, tr. m. Cordier, Andre,
tr. rv. Title. '

Specimens of the German lyric poets: consisting of translations
in verse, from the works of Burger, Goethe, Klopstock,
Schiller, &c., interspersed with biographical notices, and orna-
mented with engravings on wood . . .

22. Abridgments, adaptations, excerpts.

A. Enter an abridgment, epitome, or outline under the same head-
ing as the original work with added entry for the abridger, epit-
omizer, etc.

Scott, Sir Walter, bark, 1771-1832.

Scott's Ivanhoe; modernized and abridged by Carolyn Pulcifer
Timm . . .

r. Timm, Carolyn (Pulcifer) n. Title: Ivanhoe.
Remarque, Erich Maria, 1898-

. , . Im Westen nichts Neues. (Abridged ed,) Prepared with
introduction, notes and vocabulary by Waldo C. Peebles , . ,

i. Peebles, Waldo Cutler, 1895- ed. n. Title.

B. Enter an adaptation, a paraphrase, or a free translation, as a
general rule, under the same heading as the original work with added
entry for the adapter, paraphraser, etc. (Cf. 33D.)

iBlackmore, Richard Doddridge, 1825-1900.

Lprna Doone, adapted by Rachel Jordan, A. 0. Berglund t and,
Carleton Washburne, illustrated by Alexander Key.

i. Jordan, Rachel, n. Berglund, Albert Olaf, 1902- in. Wash-
burne, Carleton Wolsey, 1889- rv. Title.

Vergilius Mato, PuTblius.

Stories of old Rome. The wanderings of dEneas and the
founding of Rome. By Charles Henry Hanson . . .

"Little more than a simplified paraphrase of the po<m''~OPref,
i. Hanson, Charles Henry, n. Title.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 23A

Rosenkranz, Karl, 1805-1879.

The science of education. A paraphrase of Dr. Karl Rosen-
kranz's Paedagogik als System. By Anna C. Brackett.

i. Brackett, Anna Callender, 1836-1911, ed. and tr.

However, if the adaptation or paraphrase has been so freely made
as to bear slight kinship with the original work as in the case of many
adaptations for the use of juvenile readers, or if it has become a
classic in its own right, prefer entry under the adapter or paraphraser,
with added entry under the author and title of the original work. In
doubtful cases, prefer entry under heading used for the original work.

When entry is under adapter or paraphraser and the paraphrase
is not limited to a single work, or if the work paraphrased is by a
voluminous author under whose name there is a systematic arrange-
ment of material in the catalog, make added entry under the author's
name with subheading PARAPHRASES, TALES, ETC.

Hosford, Dorothy G.

Sons of the Volsungs; adapted by Dorothy G. Hosford from
Sigurd the Volsung by William Morris . . .

i. Morris, William, 1834-1896. The story of Sigurd the Volsung and
the fall of the Niblungs. n. Volsunga saga.

Lamb, Charles, 1775-1834.

Tales from Shakespeare, by Charles & Mary Lamb; with
sundry pictures and illuminations (now for the first time pub-
lished) both in colour and in line, by Elizabeth Shippen Green
Elliott ...

i, Shakespeare, William. Paraphrases, tales, etc. n. Lamb, Mary
Ann, 1764-1847, joint author, m. Elliott, Elizabeth Shippen (Green)
illus. rv. Title,

cGreene, Edward Burnaby 3 d. 1788.

The Satires of Juvenal paraphrastically imitated, and adapted
to the times. With a preface . . .

i. Juvenalis, Decimus Junius. Paraphrases, tales, etc.

C. Enter excerpts (selections) from a single author under that
author, with added entry under compiler.

For entry of excerpts, etc., from several authors see 5A.

Plato.

Gleanings from Plato, being analects selected by J. R. Whit-
well, M. B.

i. Whitwell, James Richard, ed. n. Title.

Dickens, Charles, 1812-1870.

Dickens all the year round; a Dickens anthology, arranged by
H. N. Wethered & Charles Turley, with an introduction by
Bernard Darwin.

i. Wethered, Herbert Newton, 1869- ed. n. Turley, Charles, joint
ed. ra. Title.

23. Dramatizations and novelizations.

A. Enter a dramatization based on a novel, legend, poem or other

23B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

literary form under the playwright, with added entry under the author
and tide of the work upon which the dramatization is based.

Howard, Sidney Coe, 1891-1939.

Sinclair Lewis's Dodsworth, dramatized by Sidney Howard . . .
I. Lewis, Sinclair, 1885- Dodsworth. n. Title: Dodsworth.

White, Edward Joseph, 1869-

Patient Griselda, a drama of the eleventh century (from
Chaucer's Canterbury tales) Adapted for the screen. By Edw.
J. White . , .

I. Chaucer, Geoffrey. Canterbury tales. Clerk's tale. n. Title.

For musical dramas, see the rule for librettos, 12A (2) .

B. Enter a novelization based on a play or other literary form under
the novelist, with added entry under the author and title of the work
upon which the novelization is based.

Miln, Louise (Jordan) 1864-1933.

The green goddess, by Louise Jordan Miln . . . based on the
play, "The green goddess," by William Archer.

I. Archer, William, 1856-1924. The green goddess, n. Title.

24. Parodies and imitations.

Enter a parody or an imitation under its own author with subject
entry for the author and title of the work parodied or imitated.

For parodies not limited to a single work or for a parody of a single
work by a voluminous author under whose name in the catalog there
is a systematic arrangement of material, make subject heading under
the name of the author parodied with subheading PARODIES, TRAV-
ESTIES, ETC*

Downey, Fairfax Davis, 1893-

When we were rather older, by Fairfax Downey . ,
A parody of "When we were very young/ 1 by A. A. Milne.
1. Milne, Alan Alexander, 1882- When we were very young.

I* JLluLe*

Desfontaines, Pierre Francois Guyot, 1685-1745.

novo Gulliver, ou Viagem de Joao Gulliver, filho do capitao
Gulliver. Traduzida de hum manuscrito inglez pelo abbade des
Fontaines, trasladada do francez . .

An imitation of Gulliver's travels by the Abb6 Dosfontaines.
1. Swift, Jonathan, 1667-1745. Gulliver's travels. x. Title,

Stevens, Harold Charles Gilbard, 1892-

. . . High-speed Shakespeare: "Hamlet,** "Julius Caesar,"
*Romeo and Juliet"; three tragedies in a tearing hurry.

At head of title: H. C. G. Stevens.

1. Shakespeare, William Parodies, travesties, etc. I. Title.
Rice, George Edward, 1822-1861.

4 ,5 n !2 pl ?* y ** n gar ]? ; ( Hamlet > ^nce of Denmark;) in
three acts. By Geo. Edward Rice ... *

1 Shakespeare, William Parodies, travesties, etc. x. Title,

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 25B

25. Continuations (Supplements).

A. Enter a continuation which is in the form of an independent
work with author and title differing from that of the original work
under its own author. Make added entry under the name of the
original author followed by a brief title of his work, or, if preferred,
a reference may take the place of an added entry.

Donaldson, John William, 1811-1861.

A history of the literature of ancient Greece; from the founda-
tion of the Socratic schools to the taking of Constantinople by the
Turks. Being a continuation of K. (X Mutter's work. By John
William Donaldson.

I. Muller, Karl Otfried, 1797-1840. Geschichte der griechischen
Literatur.

or, instead of added entry make reference:

Muller, Karl Otfried, 1797-1840.

Geschichte der griechischen Literatur . . .

For a continuation of this work

see
Donaldson, John William, 1811-1861.

A history of the literature of ancient Greece . . , Being a con-
tinuation of K. O. Miiller's work.

Copinger, Walter Arthur, 1847-1910.

Supplement to Hain's Repertorium bibliographicum. Or, Col-
lections towards a new edition of that work. In two parts
by W. A. Copinger . . .

i. Hain, Ludwig Friedrich Theodor, 1781-1836. Repertorium biblio-
graphicum.

or, instead of added entry make reference:

Hain, Ludwig Friedrich Theodor, 1781-1836.
Repertorium bibliographicum . . .

see also

Ecbasis captivi.
Isengrimus.

[etc., etc.; list all available versions]

or better an explanatory reference card:

Reynard the Fox.

The story of Reynard the Fox appears in many versions in
varying languages. Versions will be found in this catalog under
their own titles. Here are entered critical discussions of the
cycle, and miscellaneous editions, adapted or abridged, chap-
books, juveniles, etc., etc., of which the immediate source or
relation to other versions is not known or is uncertain.
For the varying versions see entries under:
Ecbasis captivi.
Isengrimus.
Reinaert de Vos.
[etc.]

Translations of parts of cycles are entered under the uniform head-
ing for the part. 38

Reinke do Vos.

Reynard the Fox, a renowned apologue of the middle age,
reproduced in rhyme . . .

"The Low-German edition ... is that from which I have worked:
Covering . . . between translation and paraphrase* ." Pref. signed:
S. Naylor.

Reinke de Vos.

Die Historie von Reineke dem Fuchs nach dem nieder-
deutschen Epos von 1498 neuerzahlt . . .

Perlesvaus.

The high history of the Holy Graal. Translated from the Old
French . , .

(3) Added entries and references. In large collections where it is
desirable to assemble in one place all the entries for a cycle, see also
or explanatory reference cards indicated in (2) above, may be omitted
and an added entry for each work, including editions, translations
and adaptations, may be made under a uniform heading for the cycle

language oi the tQXt may bc specified i n &e heading, e.g.,
68

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 33C(3)

followed by the language of the text. Such added entries may also be
used to assemble texts influenced by or based upon cycle versions.

If necessary to conserve space, only one edition of a given text
need be represented under a specific assembling added entry. The
note "For other editions see cards under [heading]" on one card, or an
explanatory reference card, may stand for many available books.

Assembling added entries are not to be made for (1) mere title
allusions to cycle stories, (2) minor incidents or references to a hero
or event, (3) musical scores unaccompanied by words. Form subject
subdivisions may be used to gather together these and other types of
related materials where the size of the collection and needs of scholars
warrant such treatment

Libro de Alixandre.

... El libro de Alixandre . . .

I. Alexander the Great (Romances, etc.) Spanish.
Prise de Defur.

La prise de Defur et Le voyage d'Alexandre au paradis
terrestre . . .

i. Voyage d'Alexandre au paradis terrestre. n. Alexander the Great
(Romances, etc.) French.

Wars of Alexander.

The wars of Alexander; an alliterative romance . . .
i. Alexander the Great (Romances, etc.) English.

Version entry Cycle entry

E No original version^ Reynard the Fox. English.

Renart-le-Nouvel. Reynard the Fox. French.

Roman de Renart. Reynard the Fox. French.

Goethe, Johann Wolfgang
von.

Reineke Fuchs Reynard the Fox. German.

[an adaptation] 59
Reinhart Fuchs Reynard the Fox. German.

[an edition in the original

language]
Reinke de Vos

Reinhart Fuchs Reynard the Fox. German.

[a translation in German,

^ from the low German]
Reinke de Vos. Reynard the Fox. Low German.

Version entries with added entries for cycles.

Chrestien de Troyes, 12th cent.
Perceval le Gallois; ou, Le conte du Graal . . .
"Earliest known account of the GraiL"

I. Perceval (Romances, etc.)* n. Grail. Legend.* 1 French.

80 See 33D.

40 Here and in the examples following, this heading might also be divided by
language.

41 For a discussion of the use of Legend in this heading, see Clarice Krieg, "The
cataloging of Grail literature. Abstract/* Catalogers* and classifiers' yearbook, no. 5,
(1936), p. 91-92.

33C(3) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Lovelich, Kerry, fl. 1450.

. . . The history of the Holy Grail, English . . .
i, Grail. Legend. English. 11. Estoire del Saint Graal.
[Based on the Estoire del Saint Graal]

Perceval of Galles.

... Sir Perceval of Gales . . .
r. Perceval (Romances, etc.)

[The one Perceval story which does not mention the Grail]

Perlesvaus.

Le haut livre du Graal; Perlesvaus . . .
i. Grail. Legend. French, n. Perceval (Romances, etc.)
[Original French]

Perlesvaus.

The high history of the Holy Graal . . .
i. Perceval (Romances, etc.) n. Grail. Legend. English.
[A translation in English]

La queste del Saint Graal.

The quest of the Holy Grail . . .
i. Grail. Legend. English.
[A translation in English]

La queste del Saint Graal.
... La queste del Saint Graal . . .
i. Grail. Legend. French.
[Original French]

La queste del Saint Graal.

... La versione catalana della Enchiesta del San Graal . . .
i. Grail. Legend, Catalan.
[Translation in Catalan]

Y Seint Greal.

Y Seint Greal . . .

i. Grail, Legend. Welsh, n. Grail. Legend. English, m, Perceval
(Romances, etc.) iv. Galahad (Romances, etc.)
[Welsh text with English translation]

Wagner, Richard, 1813-1883.

Parsifal, von Richard Wagner. Vocal score with pianoforte
accompaniment by R. Kleinmichel. With original German text
and English translation.

x. Perceval (Romances, etc.) IT. Grail legend. English, in. Grail
Legend. German.

Wolfram von Eschenbach, 12th cent.
. . . Parzival . . .

i. Perceval (Romances, etc.) n. Grail, Legend, German.
[Original German]

Wolfram von Eschenbach> 12th cent.
Parzival, a knightly epic . . ,

i. Grail. Legend. English, . Perceval (Romances, etc.)
[English translation]

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY _ 33D(2a)

D. Adaptations. (Cf. 22B.)

(1) Enter an adaptation 42 which is more or less a free translation
of the original text under the uniform heading of the original text
with an added entry under the adapter or translator.

Lancelot

. . . Les amours de Lancelot du Lac . . .
Modern French version by Jacques Boulenger, adapted and abridged
from the Vulgate romance, Le livre de Lancelot del Lac.
i. Boulenger, Jacques Romain, 1879-

(2) Enter adaptations or paraphrases which have become literary
works in their own right, or which have been freely made from many
texts, as in the case of many adaptations for the use of juvenile readers,
under the author of the adaptation. Make added entry under the
uniform heading for the anonymous classic.

Lovelich, Herry, fl. 1450.

Merlin, a Middle-English metrical version of a French ro-
mance'. . .

i. Merlin.

Gray, Terence.

Cuchulainn, an epic drama of the Gael . . .
1. Cuchulain. i. Cuchulain.

[Long discussion of the legend justices the subject.]

Colnm, Padraic, 1881-
The island of the mighty.
x. Mabinogion. n. Title.

(a) The versions of the King Arthur stories which bear Malory's
name on the title page are always entered under Malory even though
they are not always editions nor confined to adaptations of Malory's
version of the tales of the cycle.

Malory, Sir Thomas, 15th cent.

The boy's King Arthur; Sir Thomas Malory's history of King
Arthur and his knights of the Round Table; edited for boys by
Sidney Lanier . . .

I. Arthur, King (Romances, etc.) n. Lanier, Sidney, 1842-1881, ed.

[Follows the wording of Malory]
Malory, Sir Thomas, 15th cent.

The story of Sir Galahad, retold from the Le morte d'Arthur
of Sir Thomas Malory and the original stories, by Mary Blackwell
Sterling . . .

i. Sterling, Mary Blackwell. it. Galahad (Romances, etc.)
out

Westwood, Thomas, 18147-1888.

The sword of kingship. A legend of the < Mort d'Arthure" . . .
_ "The framework of the following legend will be found in ... the

term adaptation as used on title pages of anonymous classics may denote
either a free translation of a given version, or a rewritten work possibly based on
many versions. The term translation is sometimes used when adaptation would be
more exact. When loosely used on title pages, the terms should be properly inter-
preted in notes.

33D(2b) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

first book of 'La mort d'Arthure' as compiled by Sir Thomas Malory."
Prefatory note.

I. Arthur, King (Romances, etc.) n. Malory, Sir Thomas, 15th cent.
Le morte d'Arthur. in. Title.

Pyle, Howard, 1853-1911.

The story of the GraH and the passing of Arthur . . .
I. Arthur, King (Romances, etc.) n. Grail. Legend, m. Title.

(b) For adaptations of parts of cycles, make added entry for the
uniform heading 43 for the part of the cycle involved, as well as that
for the whole classic. The language, if specified in the heading, is the
language of the text in hand.

Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1749-1832.
Reineke Fuchs . . .

Based upon Gottsched's prose version of the Low German poem
Reinke de Vos.

I. Reinke de Vos. German, n. Reynard the Fox. German, ui. Title.

Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1749-1832.

Reynard the Fox, after the German version of Goethe, by
Thomas James Arnold, esq. . . .

A translation of Goethe's Reineke Fuchs.

I. Reinke de Vos. English, n. Reynard the Fox. English.

Johnson, Clifton, 1865-1940.

Reynard the Fox, by Clifton Johnson; adapted from Goethe's
Reineke Fuchs . . .

i. Goethe, Johann Wolfgang von, 1749-1832. Reineke Fuchs, n.
Reinke de Vos. English, m. Reynard the Fox. English.

(3) Enter any anonymous adaptation under the uniform heading
for the anonymous classic.

Reynard the Fox. English.
The history of Reynard the Fox, and Reynardine his son . . .

E. Annals, chronicles, and similar records (chiefly medieval). 44

Enter annals and anonymous chronicles clearly known to have orig-

^Popular and school libraries may prefer a subject entry, if a hero, event or place
is involved.

Wolfram t>on Eachenbach, 12th cent.
The story ot Parzival, the Templar . . .
1. Percival. i. Title.

"Ctoonicles differ from annals in that the former are usually in narrative form
and fuller in content than the latter, which merely record individual occurrences
under the successive years or other dates. According to H, F, Deiaborde (feole des
cnartes) the term chronicle applies to accounts of a universal character while annals
relate to a locality or religious community. Medieval scribes, however, apparently
made no clear distinction between the two, often using the terms indiscriminately,
tfotn nad tneir origin for the most part in abbeys and monasteries as marginal or
interlinear notes of current events made by various hands in the church calendar
and were, of course, without titles; these were assigned later by editors, the title
varying with the editor. As these chronicles developed, they wore loaned by one
institution to another where they were copied in whole or in part, often without indi-
cation of source, so that in many cases the place of origin is difficult to determine.
Cf. R. L. Poole, Chronicles and annals (Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1926) ; T. F. Tout
The study o/ medieval chronicles (Manchester, University Press, 1922); Encyclo-
paedia Bntannica; New International encyclopaedia.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 33E

inated in an institution under the institution with, added entries for
editors, translators, titles, variant titles, attributed authors, and other
individuals whose names have for some reason become closely asso-
ciated with the work.

If not of institutional origin, or if the institution of origin is doubt-
ful, enter under a uniform heading for the title by which the work is
best known. Make added entries for the institution with which the
work is associated, editors, translators, etc., and references from
variant titles. Added entries need not be made for earlier titles used
as sources even though known.

Warneton, Belgium (Augustinian abbey)

Chronicon abbatise Warnestoniensis, ordinis canonicorum reg-
ularium S. Augustini, ex actis quibusdam monasterii et ex auc-
toribus collectum, cura et studio duorum Dioec. Brug. sacer-
dotum C C. L. Carton et F. van de Putte^

i. Carton, Charles Louis, 1802-1863, ed. n. Putte, Ferdinand van de,
1807-1882, ed. m. Title.

Annals of the Four masters.

. . . Annals of the kingdom of Ireland, by the Four masters,
from the earliest period to the year 1616. Edited from the mss.
in the library of the Royal Irish Academy and of Trinity College,
Dublin, with a translation and copious notes, by John O'Don-
ovan . . .

English title preceded by title in Irish; Irish and English on oppo-
site pages.

"The Four masters . . . were Michael, Conary, and Cucogry O'Clery,
together with Ferfeasa O'Mulconry " Introductory remarks, v. 1, p. xix.

The Catalogue of Irish manuscripts in the British Museum, v. 1,
p. 20, gives Peregrine (Cucogry) O'Duigenan in place of Conary
O'Clery, which agrees with Colgan's statement in his Acta sanctorum
Hibernise, 1645.

Known also as the Annals of Donegal.

i. O'Clery, Michael, 1575-1648. n. O'Clery, Cucogry, d. 1664. m.
O'Mulconry, Ferfeasa, fl. 1636. rv. O'Duigenan, Cucogry, fl. 1636.
v. O'Clery, Conary, fl. 1636. vi. ODonovan, John, 1809-1861, ed. and
tr. TO. Title.

Refer from
Four masters
Annals of Donegal
Donegal, Annals of
Annales Dungallensis
Annales quatuor magistrorum

Sachsische Weltchronik.

Das Zeitbuch des Eike von Repgow in urspriinglich nieder-
deutscher Sprache und in fruher lateinischer tJbersetzung her-
ausgegeben von H. F. Massmann.

The first German chronicle in prose, formerly ascribed to Eike von
Repgow, who possibly wrote the prologue in rime, in which his name
appears. The Latin translation formerly held to be the original has
title: Historia imperatorum.

i. Massmann, Hans Ferdinand, 1797-1874, ed. n. Title.
Refer from

Chronica imperatorum Saxonica

Chronica Romanorum

34 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Chronicon imperatorum et pontificum

Chronicon Liineburgicum Saxonica lingua conscriptum

Chronicon Repegovii

Chronicon Keren Eiken von Repgow

Historia Romanensis

Historia imperatorum

Repgauische Chronik

Sachsenchronik

Sassenkroneke

34. Bible.

Enter the Bible or any part of it 45 (including the Apocrypha) under
the word BIBLE. Include as subheading, O. T. (Old Testament) , N. T.
(New Testament), the name of the book or group of books, as the
case requires, the language of the text, the date of publication, and
when known, the version.

Bible. English. 1611. Authorized.
Bible. O. T. German. 1876.
Bible. O. T. Genesis. English. 1851.
Bible. N. T. John. English. 1900.
Bible. O. T. Pentateuch. English. 1904.
Bible. N. T. Gospels. Greek. 1896.
Bible. 0. T. Kings. English. 1900.

[includes 1-2 Kings}
Bible. 0. T. 1 Kings. English. 1900.
Bible. 0. T. Apocrypha. English. 1938. Goodspeed.
Bible. O. T. Apocryphal books. 1 Enoch. Ethiopia 1851.

For the form and spelling of the names of Biblical books, follow the
Authorized version of the English Bible. Refer from variant forms
and spellings.

Bible. Paralipomena see Bible. O. T. Chronicles,
Bible. Canticles see Bible, O. T. Song of Solomon.

Refer also from the names of individual books to the heading under
which they appear in the catalog.

Song of Solomon see Bible. O. T. Song of Solomon.

Isaiah (Book of the Old Testament) see Bible. O. T. Isaiah.

A. Polyglot texts. Enter Bibles containing the identical Biblical
text in three or more languages under the heading BIBLE. POLYGLOT,
the word polyglot bearing the same relation to the heading as the
name of a language.

Bible. Polyglot. 1629.

Bible. O. T. Psalms. Polyglot 1900.

B. Diglot texts.

(1) Enter a Bible containing the identical Biblical text in two
languages under the original language, if one is the original.

(2) If the two languages are of equal importance, and there is but
one title page, enter under the one mentioned first in the title, or if

46 The Library of Congress, by exception, uses Lord's prayer as author entry.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY ^^ 34C(4)

neither is mentioned in the title, under the one whose text precedes.

(3) If the two languages are of equal importance and there are two
title pages facing each other preceded by a half title that names both
languages, enter under the one named first on the half title page.

(4) If one of the two languages is clearly of more importance or
interest because the purpose is to edit the text in that language and
the other is printed for convenience, enter under the more impor-
tant language.

In each case make added entry for the language not adopted for
the main entry.

C. Name of language in the heading.

(1) The language of the text is specified in the heading in the form
adopted in the Library of Congress list of literature and language
subject- headings:

Bible. English (Middle English) 1878.
Bible. Anglo-Saxon. 1857.
Bible. French (Old French) 1890.
Bible. Basque (Labourdin) 1903.
Bible. N. T. English (Scotland) 1867.
but

Bible. Latin. 1647. Old Latin.

because Old Latin is the name of a version (as distinguished from
the Vulgate) not an older form of language.

(2) The language specified in the heading for a translation of a
version is the language into which the translation is made. If the
translation is intended to show the peculiarities of that version as
far as it is possible by means of a translation, make a subject entry
for the version.

Bible. N. T. English. 1855. Murdoch.

. . . The New Testament; or, The books of the Holy Gospel
of Our Lord and Our God, Jesus the Messiah. A literal trans-
lation from the Syriac Peshito version, by James Murdock.

1. Bible. Syriac Translations into English.

(3) For Bibles in which the Old Testament is in Hebrew and the
New Testament in Greek, the whole published as one work, give both
languages in the heading. Make added entry for each Testament
showing the languages involved.

Bible. Hebrew-Greek. 1900.
with added entries:

Bible. O. T. Hebrew. 1900.
Bible. N. T. Greek, 1900.

This is the only instance in which two languages appear in a
heading.

(4) For the Aramaic translations (targumim) of the Old Testa-

34P A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

merit, add the name of the targum after the date if there is more than
one targum to the same Biblical text. 46

Bible. O. T. Ezekiel Aramaic. 1902.

Bible. O. T. Esther. Aramaic. 1920. Targum sheni.

Bible. O. T. Pentateuch. Aramaic. 1900. Targum Onkelos.

Refer from TARGUM to BIBLE. O. T. [PART] ARAMAIC., e.g., Bible.
O. T, Ezekiel. Aramaic.

Since there are no targumim extant for Ezra and Daniel for large
portions of which the original text is in Aramaic, there is no possi-
bility of conflict with the headings

Bible* O. T. Ezra. Aramaic.
Bible. O. T. Daniel. Aramaic.

which headings, as occasion arises, will be used for the original text
of these books if published separately. For works containing all
originally Aramaic portions 47 of the Old Testament the heading is

Bible. O. T. Aramaic. Selections.
D. Date in heading.

(1) If an edition is issued in one binding, but special title page for
the New Testament or for the Apocrypha has a date earlier than the
general title page, use the date of the general title page in the heading.

Bible. Tonga (Tonga Islands) 1862.
Koe Tohi Tabu katoa . . . 1862.

2 v. in 1.

Vol. 2 with trie "Koe Tohi oe Fuakava Foou" has special title-page
only, dated 1860.

(2) If an edition is issued in more than one binding, give the date
of the earliest volume in the heading.

Bible. Malay. 1820.
Biblia malaica . . . C 1820 r 24.

3 v.

Vols. 1-2 (1824) paged continuously.

Vol. 3 has title: Novum Testamentum malaice . . . 1820.

(3) Undated Bibles have the same date in the heading as has been
supplied in the imprint, but without brackets.

Bible. English. 18-~

[avoid such an incomplete date if possible]
Bible, English. 180-?
Bible. English. 1800?
Bible. English, ca.1800.

[appnweiwation, not so close as 1800?!
Bible. English. 1800.

This will apply for all practical purposes only to the Pentateuch for which three
1! * tlftP*/^?^ T ^ um Pseudo-Jonathan, Targum Yerushalmi,

n ,^ 3S S^iMk-?5^x there are a!so throc -
Shem (second), and Shelishi (third).

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 34F

(4) For modern facsimile reprints of old editions give the original
date in parentheses followed by actual date of reprint.

Make added entry with date of actual imprint.

Bible. O. T. Psalms. English (1535) 1838. Coverdale.
with added entry:

Bible. O. T. Psalms. English. 1838.

(5) For ordinary reprints give the date of the reprint only, with
added entry for the date of the Bible reprinted in exceptional cases.

Bible. German. 1904.
Die erste deutsche Bibel . . . 1904.

with added entry:

Bible. German, ca. 1466.

E. Version in heading.

(1) In order to distinguish readily one version from another, add
(if ascertainable) after the date in the heading, in English, the name
of the version or the translator; or the name of the printer; or the
name of the place and printer.

Bible. Dutch. 1690. States-general version.
Bible. English. 1560. Geneva version.
Bible. English. 1611. Authorized.
Bible. English. 1901. American revised.
Bible. N. T. English. 1923. Goodspeed.
Bible. German. 1534. Luther.
Bible. Latin. 1450-1455. Mainz. Gutenberg.

(2) If the translator is not the same as the commentator, use the
name of the translator in the heading for the main entry and make
an added entry giving the commentator's name.

The name of the paraphraser or of the paraphrase may be added
to the heading for all metrical versions of the Psalms.

Bible. O. T. Psalms. French. Paraphrases. 1904. Marot.

F. Form divisions in heading. The form divisions when required
in a Bible heading follow immediately after the language specifica-
tion. These form divisions are FOR THE BLIND; HARMONIES; LESSONS,
LITURGICAL; MANUSCRIPTS; 48 PARAPHRASES; SELECTIONS; SHORTHAND.

Bible. O. T. Psalms. English. For the blind. 1924.

Bible. O. T. Psalms. English. Selections. 1824.

Bible. N. T. Gospels. English. Harmonies. 1937. Mofatt.

If two of these should be applicable in a given instance, use only
one in the heading, making the choice on the basis of the following

48 Reference only in this position. For exceptional treatment of Bible manuscripts
see9A(l).

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

priority 49 table (1) For the blind, (2) Shorthand, (3) Paraphrases,
(4) Harmonies, (5) Lessons, Liturgical, (6) Selections.
Make added entry using the form not adopted in the heading.

Bible. O. T, Psalms. English, Paraphrases. 1858.
A paraphrase of selected Psalms . . .
I. Bible. O. T. Psalms. English. Selections. 1858.

35. Sacred literature (other than the Bible).

A. Jewish sacred literature.

(1) Talmud. Enter editions of the Talmud under the uniform head-
ing TALMITD (for the Babylonian Talmud) or TALMUD YERUSHALMI
(for the Palestinian or Jerusalem Talmud) . Include the language in
the heading for texts other than Hebrew. Distinguish selections from
complete works by means of the form subheading SELECTIONS, Make
added entries for editors, translators, etc.

Talmud.

New edition of the Babylonian Talmud, English translation.
Original text edited, formulated, and punctuated by Michael
Kodkinson,

i. Talmud. English, n. Rodkinson, Michael Levy, ed,

Talmud. English. Selections.

. . . The wisdom of Israel; being extracts from the Baby-
lonian Talmud and Midrash Rabboth, translated by Edwin
Collins . . .

x. Collins, Edwin, tr.

Talmud Yerushalmi.

. . . Yerushalmi fragments from the Genizah. Text with vari-
ous readings from the editio princeps, edited by Louis Ginz-
berg.

i. Ginzberg, Louis, ed.

(a) Enter the various orders (sedarim) as subheadings under the
uniform heading TALMUD or TALMUD YERUSHALMI, as the case may be.

Talmud. Nashim. English.

The Babylonian Talmud; seder Nashim translated into Eng-
lish with notes, glossary, and indices under the editorship of
Kabbi Dr. I, Epstein.

LWith *"* added entries

For the form of the names of the orders and tractates follow the
usage of the Jewish encyclopedia. For necessary references see
(4) below.

(b) Enter separate tractates (masektot) of the Talmud (including
minor treatises) under the uniform heading TALMUD, or TALMUD
Ywowttian, as the case may be, with the name of the tractate as
subheading, disregarding the name of the order.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 35A(4)

Talmud. Hagigah. English.

. . . Translation of the treatise Chagigah from the Babylonian
Talmud, with introduction ... by A. W. Streane . . .

I. Streane, Annesley William, ed.

Talmud YerushalmL Ta'anith.

... A translation of the treatise Taanith . . . from the Pal-
estinian Talmud.

(2) Mishnah. Enter texts of the Mishnah under the uniform head-
ing MISHNAH. In other respects the entries are analogous to those
under Talmud.

Mishnah.

Die Mischna. Text, tJbersetziing und ausfiihrliche Erklariuig

. . . Herausgegeben von G. Beer . . . und O. Holtzmann , . .

i. Mishnah. German, n. Beer, Georg, ed. ra. Holtzmann, O., joint ed.

Mishnah. 'Aboddh zardh. English.

The Mishna of idolatry, 'Aboda zara, ed. by W. A. L. Elms-
lie ...

r. Elmslie, William Alexander Leslie, ed. and tr.

(3) Tosefta. Enter collections of the Tosefta (additions to the
Mishnah) under the uniform heading TOSEFTA. Subheadings corre-
spond to those of the Mishnah.

Tosefta. Baba kamma.

Die Tosefta des Traktates Nesikin Baba kamma geordnet und
kommentiert . . . von Adolf Schwarz.

i. Schwarz, Adolf, ed.

(4) References. Because of the various forms under which an
entry may be made for a given tractate, a complete system of refer-
ences is necessary to indicate the possible entries under which it
may be found the details in the second element of the reference
to be added as material appears in the library.

Baba kamma.

see

Talmud. Baba kamma.
Talmud Yerushalmi. Baba kamma.
Mishnah. Baba kamma.
Tosefta. Baba kamma.

Similarly, reference is made from the name of the orders (sedarim)
to the Talmud.

Nezikin.

see

Talmud. Nezikin.
Talmud YerushalmL Nezikin.
Mishnah. Nezikin.
Tosefta. Nezikin.

Also a general reference from the order (seder) to the tractate.

Talmud. Nezikin.
For separate tractates belonging to this order see under

35A(5) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Talmud. c name of tractate^ e.g.
Talmud. Baba fcamma.

(5) Baraita (Tannaitic traditions not incorporated in the Mishnah
but surviving in the two Talmuds, in the Tannaitic Midrashim, and in
the Tosefta) . To be used as subject heading only. Enter collections
under editor.

(6) Midrash. Enter early anonymous midrashic material under
the uniform heading MIDRASH with the name of the particular midrash
as a subheading. For form of name follow the usage of the Jewish
encyclopedia. For midrashim on a special book of the Bible, make sub-
ject heading appropriate to that book with subheading COMMENTARIES.

Midrash. Mekilta.

. . . Ein tannaitischer Midrasch zu Exodus. Erstmalig ins
Deutsche ubersetzt und erlautert von Jakob Winter und Aus
Wunsche ... **

1. Bible. O. T. Exodus Commentaries, i. Winter, Jakob, ed
n. Wunsche, August, joint ed.

Midrash. Tanhuma.

Midrasch Tanchuma, ein agadischer Commentar zum Penta-
teuch von Rabbi Tanchuma ben Rabbi Abba. Kritisch bear-
beitet . . . von Salomon Buber.

1. Bible. O. T. Pentateuch Commentaries, i. Buber, Salomon, ed.

For the sake of uniformity prefer the use of the period in the head-
ing even in cases where the word Midrash is an integral part of the
name of the particular midrash, e.g.,

Midrash. Kohelet.
not Midrash Kohelet.
nor Midrash. Midrash Kohelet.
but by exception

Midrash ha-gadol.

Where midrashim with identical names deal with different books
of the Bible, add the name of the book in parentheses.

Midrash. Sifre (Numbers)
Midrash. Sifre (Deuteronomy)

B. Buddhist scriptures. Enter the collected Buddhist scriptures
under the heading TRIPITAKA; the three divisions, Vinayapitaka, Sut~
tapijaka, and Abhidhamma under those names; and each individual
treatise under its own name. Correlate the whole by means of see also
references from the subject heading BUDDHA AND BUDDHISM SACRED
7f S ; ^ y V he T he * di *g> if desirable, versions, and language
of text, Distinguish selections from complete works by means of the
form subheading SELECTIONS.

Tripitaka.

Tripitaka. German. Selections.

Vinayapitaka.

Suttapitaka.

CHOICE OF MAIN ENTRY 35D

Abhidhamma.

Dhammapada. Chinese version (Fa chu pi yu) English.

Jatakas.

C. Hindu scriptures.

(1) Enter general collections of Vedic texts under the uniform
heading VEDAS using language specification and the form subheading
SELECTIONS when such delimitation is desirable.

Vedas. German. Selections.

(2) Enter the four separate collections of hymns and prayers known
respectively as Rigveda, Samaveda, Yajurveda, and Atharvaveda
under the uniform heading VEDAS. Subdivide by the name of the
collection and refer from it. Further subdivision by version and by
language may be made.

Vedas. Atharvaveda.

Refer from
Atharvaveda.

Vedas. Rigveda. English. Selections.
Vedas. Samaveda.
Vedas. Yajurveda.
Vedas. Yajurveda. Vajasaneyisamhita. English. Selections.

(3) Enter the various collections of commentaries and treatises
known respectively as Brahmanas, Aranyakas, Upanishads, under the
uniform headings BRAHMANAS, ARANYAKAS, UPANISHADS. Subdivide
in each case by the name of individual treatises, and refer from
the latter. 60

Brahmanas. Adbhuta'brahmana.

Refer from
Adbhutabrahmana.
Aranyakas. Aitareyaranyaka.
Upanishads. Chandogya-upanishad.

D. Koran. Enter texts of the Koran under the word KORAN. Refer
from variant transliterated forms. Include the language in the head-
ing for translations and distinguish selections from complete texts by
the use of the form subdivision SELECTIONS.

Koran.

Koran. French.
Koran. Selections.
Koran. English. Selections.
Refer from

Alcoran.

Alkoran.

Goran.

Qu'ran.

50 Library of Congress enters Vedas and Upanishads as above, but enters each
separate Brahmana and Aranyaka tinder its own name.
British Museum usage is as recommended above.

IL Personal Authors

(Form of Entry)

36. General rule*

In the heading give the author's name in full and in the vernacular
form with certain specified exceptions. (See 40, 44, 47-49, 51, 53-56.)
If an author is known in literature, history or common parlance by
more than one name, prefer (1) the most authentic, (2) the best
known when the most authentic has been but little used and another
form has been in use predominantly both by the person concerned
and in records and literature.

The form adopted for a given person is used without variation
whenever it occurs as a heading, whether as author, added entry, or
subject. 1 Kefer from forms not adopted.

37. Modem authors.

Enter persons of modern times under the family name followed by
the forenames and the dates of birth and death when available. Varia-
tions from this practice are noted in succeeding rules.

East, Edward Murray, 1879-1938.
Joad, Cyril Edwin Mitchinson, 1891-
Chase, Mary Ellen, 1887-
Powers, Margaret.
Brennan, Paul C

38. Compound surnames. 2

In general enter compound surnames under the first part of the
name and refer from the other parts, (See also 46F.)

'By exception, the Library of Congress has shortened the author form Dante
Alighien to Dante when the heading is used with a subject subdivision (e,., DANTE-
BIBL.) (Cf. footnote 6 rule 42 for use of dates.)

*Not to be confused with compound names are;

(1) names apparently compound but actually the names of two distinct persons,
*! - Erckmanri-Chatrian, i.e., Emile Erckmann and Alexandra Chatrian

(2) hyphenated names (especially in French) in which the first part of the com-
pound is a forename, e.g., Lassar-Cohn, i.e., Cohn, Lassar

(3) hyphenated names (especially in German) in which the second part of the
compound is the place of residence, e.g., Pelka-Berlin

(4) English names in which the middle name is a family name but not a part of
the surname, e.g., John Stuart Mill p

(5) Hungarian names in which the first part of an apparently compound name is
actually a title, e.g., Korosi Csoma Sandor, Le,, Csoma, Samior, korosl (Cf, 57B, note,)

PERSONAL AUTHORS

Watts-Dunton, Theodore, 1832-1914.
Cotarelo y Mori, Emilio, 1857-1936.
Schulze-Delitzsch, Hermann, 1808-1883.
Vivien de Saint Martin, Louis, 1802-1897.
BijH Nachenius, Henri Joachim de, 1842-1910.

Exception is made, however, in favor of entry under some other
part of the name when it is found that the author's own usage or the
custom of his country as indicated in national biographical diction-
aries, bibliographies, etc., distinctly favors entry under that part of
the name rather than the first part.

Salomons, Sir David Lionel Goldsmid-Stern, bart, 1851-1925.
Fenelon, Frangois de Salignac de La Mothe-, Abp., 1651-1715.

This exception rarely applies to Spanish names since the com-
pound usually consists of the father's surname followed by the
mother's surname. 3

Portuguese and Brazilian names are treated with more variation
since the mother's name is generally the first part of the compound
and the father's normally the last. Enter usually under the last of
the surnames which the author regularly uses in full in his writings
or by which he is known (rather than under the last of the names
found by research). Do not, however, separate parts which form a
phrase, e.g., Espirito Santo, Sao Tiago, Castelo Branco. Entry may be
under a surname other than the last when a compound form is hyphen-
ated, or, rarely, when an author is very well known by the compound
form. (Cf. 42, footnote 7, 46F (2) .)

Siqueira, Jose de Lima.

Refer from
Lima Siqueira, Jose de.

Espirito Santo, Vicente Antonio de.

Refer from

Santo, Vicente Antonio Espirito de.
but

Roquette-Pinto, Edgardo, 1884-

Refer from
Pinto, Edgardo Roquette-.

Machado de Assis, Joaquim Maria, 1834-1908.

Refer from
Assis, Joaquhn Maria Machado de.

39. Surnames with prefixes.

A, Attributive prefixes. Enter under the prefix in all languages
surnames with attributive prefixes such as A', Ap, Fitz, M', Mac,
Me, O', Saint, San, etc.

A'Beckett, Gilbert Abbott, 1811-1856.
Fitz Gibbon, Abraham Coates, 1823-1887.

9 For a treatise on Spanish personal names see C. F. Gosnell, Spanish personal
names; principles governing their formation and use (New York, Wilson, 1938).

39B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

MacDonald, William, 1863-

O'Casey, Sean, 1884-

Saint Jean, Robert de.

San Cristoval, Evaristo, 1894-

Santa Cruz, Alonso de, d. 1567.

B. Prepositions and articles as prefixes. Names beginning with a
preposition, an article, a preposition and an article, or a contraction
of the two are entered under the prefix, or the part of the name fol-
lowing the prefix, variously in different languages.

When the bearer of a name with a prefix has changed his citizenship,
enter according to the rules for the language of the country adopted!

Exception is to be made in any case where established usage or
the known preference of the bearer of the name is contrary to the
prescribed rule.

(1) Enter under the prefix and refer from the part following the
prefix.

(a) English names.

Le Gallienne.
De Morgan.
Van Buren.
De La Rue.
Du Maurier.

(b) French names when the prefix consists of an article or the
contraction of a preposition and an article.

Le Sage.
Des Essarts.
Du Moulin.

La Farina.
Li Gotti.
Lo Savio.

(d) Scandinavian names of romance origin (2) all Swedish names,
and (2) Danish and Norwegian names when the prefix consists of or
contains an article.

De la Gardie, Magnus Gabriel, grefve, 1622-1686.
La Cour, Jens Lassen, 1876-

(e) In all languages when the prefix and name arc written as
one word.

Delacroix.
Lafuente.
Dallolio.
Zurlauben.

Since such names occur sometimes as separate words, make refer-
ence from the component parts, e.g.,

PERSONAL AUTHORS 39B(2f)

Delacroix with references from Croix, de la; La Croix, de.
Zurlauben with reference from Lauben, zur.

(2) Enter under the part of the name following the prefix in all
cases not specified above and refer from name beginning with the prefix.

(a) French names when the prefix consists of a preposition.

Alembert, Jean Lerond d', 1717-1783.
Faye, Eugene de, 1860-1929.

In French names containing a preposition and an article (not a
contraction of the two) the article precedes and the preposition fol-
lows the name.

La Fontaine, Jean de, 1621-1695.
La Borderie, Arthur de, 1827-1901.

(b) Italian names when the prefix consists of or contains a prep-
osition.

Ancona, Alessandro d 5 , 1835-1914.
Alberti, Antonio degli, fl. 15th cent.

Brink, Jam ten, 1834-1901.

Laer, Willem, van.

Vondel, Joost van den, 1587-1679.

Hoff, Jacobus Hendricus van't, 1852-1911.

In Dutch names the prefix de has the same significance as van and
follows the forename as do also articles and prepositions in names
of French origin.

Helm, Cornells de.

Faille, Jacob Baart de la, 1795-1867.

(d) German names.

Hagen, Maximilian von, 1886-
Miihll, Peter von der.
Ende, Erich vom, 1890-
Linde, Otto zur, 1873-1938.
Busch, Josef Paul zunu
Weerth, Ernst aus'm, 1829-1909.
Rhyn, August am, 1880-

(e) Scandinavian names when the prefix consists of the preposi-
tion av (of) or the German equivalent von.

Hallstrbm, Gunnar Johannes af, 1908-
Linne, Carl von, 1707-1778.

(f) Spanish and Portuguese names. With very rare exceptions,
Spanish and Portuguese names are entered under the part of the
name following the prefix.

Ripa, Domingo la, 1622-1696.
Bio, Antonio del.

40 __ _ _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Casas, Bartolome de las, Bp. of Chiapa, 1474-1566.
Cunha, Xavier da, 1840-1920.
Santos, Joao Adolpho dos, 1859-

40. Forenames (form when used with surname).

A. Language. Give forenames in the form most common in the
author's native or adopted language; or in doubtful cases, in the form
proper to the language in which he has written most of his work,
e.g., Masaryk, Tomas Garrigue not Thomas Garrigue. (Cf. 45B.)

In German and Swedish forenames, when the author's usage is in
doubt, prefer f to ph and k to c, e.g., Adolf rather than Adolph, Karl
rather than Carl. In names of classical origin prefer ae to e, Aegidius
not Egidius.

B. Unused forenames. Unused forenames, middle as well as first
names, are as a rule to be omitted in author headings, especially in
the case of living authors. When a shortened form is used, refer from
full name if the first forename has been omitted. 4

Humboldt, Alexander, Freiherr von, 1769-1859,

Refer from

Humboldt, Friedrich Wilhelm Heinrich Alexander, Freiherr
von.

Taridngton, Booth, 1869-1946.

Refer from

Tarkington, Newton Booth.
Windisch-Graetz, Lajos, herceg, 1882-

C. Forenames with variants. Give forenames which have a dis-
tinct variant in the form of the variant whenever the author uses it
regularly. Refer from the original form when necessary.

Droysen, Hans.

Refer from
Droysen, Johannes.
Renter, Fritz*

Refer from
Reuter, Friedrich.
Whitman, Walt, 1819-1892.
Carleton, Will, 1845-1912.

Refer from
Carleton, William McKendrie.

D. Compound forenames.

(1) Do not separate into their component parts forenames that

appear combined in one word unless it is known that the separate

*On entries where a shortened form is used in the heading and the full

bw^tlSS ^% L * raiy , f ?T CS ? S rints ** *& fa a

SES^feaS ^MBS* form:

In the case of Hungarian authors, the full name note is riven in

Futt

Hussia* and Hebrew authors, the full name note is given in roman
86

PERSONAL AUTHORS 41B

form represents the author's own usage. If, however, the author some-
times uses the full and sometimes the contracted form, prefer the
full form.

Martini, Giambattista not Giovanni Battista.
but

Bodoni, Giovanni Battista not Giambattista.
Ortes, Giovanni Maria not Giammaria.

(2) Do not use hyphens between forenames, even though it is the

practice of the country, e.g., Roy, Pierre Georges not Pierre-Georges.

The use of hyphens in Chinese given names (cf. 67) is an exception.

Wang, An-shih, 1021-1086,
41. Titles of nobility, office, etc.

A,^ Included in heading. Add in the heading titles which indicate
nobility and the higher offices or ranks when they are commonly used
in referring to a person.

(1) Titles of nobility are given in the vernacular when surname
is the entry word. (See 43 and 55-56 for language when forename is
entry word,)

Lichnowsky, Karl Max, Filrst von, 1860-1928.

Ferrero, Augusto, barone, 1866-

Du Cange, Charles Du Fresne, sieur, 1610-1688.

(2) Titles indicating office are given in English whenever possible,
whether entry is under forename or surname, and follow titles of
nobility when both are included in the heading.

Andreas, margrave of Burgau, Cardinal, 1558-1600.

Du Perron, Jacques Davy, Cardinal, 15567-1618.

Plunket, William Conyngham Plunket, baron, Abp. of Dublin,

1828-1897.
Calleja, Felix Maria, conde de Calderon, Viceroy of Mexico, b.

1750.
Masaryk, Tomas Garrigue, Pres. Czechoslovak Republic, 1850-

1937.

B. Omitted in heading. Omit from the heading titles of address
(Miss, Mr., Mrs., Frau, Mme., etc.) ; minor ecclesiastical titles (abbe,
archdeacon, dean, rabbi, reverend, etc.); governmental titles below
the highest rank (vice-president, senator, governor, etc.); military
and naval titles; academic and professional titles.

Make exceptions in cases where the inclusion of the title is neces-
sary to distinguish between two or more persons having the same name
and whose dates are unknown, or when needed as an aid in identi-
fication. (Cf.42.)

Mendell, Miss Clyde.
Tourte, Mme. Jo Roger.
Castagnier, Mme. H.
Erskine, Mrs. Payne.

42 _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Deidier, abbe.

Brown, George, captain, (dates unknown)

Brown, Rev. George, (dates unknown)

42. Dates and designations.

For medieval and modern names add dates of birth and death in
the heading when they can be discovered with a reasonable amount
of search. 5 They are not, as a rule, to be given for classical names, and
may also be omitted in the case of well-known persons when the name
is followed by a subheading. 6

Shakespeare, William, 1564-1616.

Shakespeare, William Characters.

Shakespeare, William. Spurious and doubtful works.

Distinguish persons of the same name whose dates are not known,
by descriptive designations denoting profession, occupation, resi-
dence, etc., in English if possible.

Smith, John, 1536-1616.
Smith, John, 1580-1631.
Smith, John, Mar. 8, 1882-
Smith, John, Aug. 5, 1882-

6 Dates are important not only for distinguishing persons of the same name, but
also for placing more or less obscure personalities, even when only approximate dates
can be given. The following practice is observed by Library of Congress:
Smith, John, 1837-18S6. (Both dates established with certainty)
Smith, John, 1836 or 7-1896. (Date o birth deduced from age at date of death)
Smith, John, 18377-1896. (Authorities diJder as to dale of birth; 1837 probable!
Smith, John, 1837 (ca.)-1896. (Date of birth uncertain by several years) '
Smith, John, 1837-ca. 1896. (Date of death approximate only)
Smith, John, ca. 1837-ca. 1896. (Both dates approximate only)
S m }l h ' i!* n ' 5- 182S - < Dale of death unknown with little likelihood of discovery)
Smith, John, or. 1850. (Date of birth unknown with little likelihood of discovery)
Joanne* Dtaconu*, fl. 1210 (fl. 122G-1240; i 1260-1280; fl. 1290; fl. 1287- 1313, as the

case may be; prefer longest ascertalnablc interval)

Joannea Diaconus, mh cent. (When not possible to identify within a more limited
period)

Following is a list of names after which dates arc omitted on Library of Congress
cards when subheadings occur in the heading,
ArioKto, Lodovlco Irving Wa*htnKton

jam Sebastian -, ... I*Kft!nff Gotthold Kphrnlm

Francis, viscount St. Albans Mncoln, Abraham, jW V, S,

<mMow, Henry
laithcr, Martin
M<lri * Antoinette
Milton, John
MoH*e, Jean Hnp

Gre Goraon NoH By.on, ^S^* r^,to.

6th faron Napollon 1

Carlyle, TJioniaa IVtrarca, Frnn<vc<>

<le 'uwlikln, Al*kfmitdr He

f Jean Xtapttot*

TaK<t Torqunto

Tennynon, Alfred T^nnyiion,

,, Prc*. U. S,

PERSONAL AUTHORS 44

Smith, John, clockmaker.

Smith, John, of Malton, Eng.

Smith, John, rector oj Baldock.

Smith, John, surgeon and trading captain.

Evans, Montgomery, n. (author's usage, dates unknown)

Small, Frank, Jr. 7 (author's usage, dates unknown)

Brown, George, F. i. p. s. (dates unknown)

Stuart, John, writer on aviation, (dates unknown)

43. Forename as entry word.

Sovereigns, ruling princes, saints and other persons known by their
forenames only, are entered under forename. (Cf . 47-49, 51, 53-56, 61.)

Add titles of nobility in English. (Cf. 41A.)

Add any epithet, byname or adjective of origin, nationality, etc.,
by which the person is usually known. If such word or phrase may
be considered as part of the name, give it in the same language as
the forename. If a descriptive word or phrase is added for the sake
of identification but is not considered part of the name, give it pref-
erably in English. (Cf. 47, 54, 55, 61.)

Add dates in accordance with rule 42.

Karl, Archduke of Austria, 1771-1847.

Amalie, Princess of Saxony, 1794-1870.

Kazimierz ffl, Wielki, King of Poland, 1310-1370.

Joannes Eleemosynarius, Saint, Patriarch of Alexandria, d. 616?

Guilehnus Arvernus, Bp. of Paris, d. 1249.

Joannes Braidensis, fl. 1419.

Augustine, Saint, Abp. of Canterbury, d. 604.

Elijah, the prophet.

44. Writers known under sobriquets, nicknames, etc.

In a few cases, chiefly names of artists, a universally used sobriquet
or nickname is to be selected as entry word, provided it is not one of
the forenames of the person in question. Refer from real name.

Tintoretto, Jacopo Robusti, known as, 1512-1594.

Refer from
Robusti, Jacopo.

Correggio, Antonio Allegri, known as, 1494-1534.

Refer from
Allegri, Antonio.

Ucello, Paolo di Dono, known as, 1396 or 7-1475.

Refer from
Dono, Paolo di.
Paolo di Dono.

7 The word Junior (Jr.) or a foreign equivalent when used with the author's name on
the title page is disregarded in establishing the heading unless needed to distinguish
between authors of the same name. In Portuguese, refer from the name proper com-
pounded with the word Junior (or Filho). Treat in a similar manner the words
Netto, Neto (grandson) and Sobrinho (nephew) when they are known to express
relationship only, not to form legally part of the name.
Marques Junior, Henrique

see
Marques, Henrique.

45 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

If the real name is chosen as entry word, the sobriquet or nickname
is added in the heading and reference is made from it to the real name.

Grazzini, Antonio Francesco, called II Lasca, 1503-1584.

Refer from
II Lasca.

Theotocopuli, Dominico, called El Greco, d. 1614.

Refer from
El Greco.

Fiorella, Tiberio, called Scaramouche, 1604-1694.

Refer from
Scaramouche.

45. Changed names.

A. Enter under the adopted name a person who in civil life has
changed his name unless the original one is decidedly better known.
(Cfc SOB, 53, 65B(2), 69B.) This includes legal changes of name,
assumed names such as pseudonyms and professional names that have
been adopted for general use, and also cases in which merely the
spelling of the name has been altered. Refer from the form not chosen
as heading. 8

Burn, Bruno, 1891-

Refer from
Birnbaum, Bruno.
France, Anatole, 1844-1924.

Refer from
Thibault, Anatole.

Angell, Sir Norman, 1874-

Refer from

Angell, Sir Ralph Norman.
Lane, Sir Ralph Norman Angell.

Sadleir, Michael, 1888-

Bef er from

Sadler, Michael Thomas Harvey.
Farrere, Claude, 1876-

Ref er from
Bargone, Charles.

Bargone, Frederic Charles Pierre fidouard.
Stalin, losif, 1879-

Refer from

Dzhugashvili, losif Vissarinovich.
Barrymorc, Maurice, 1847-1905.

Refer from
Blythe, Herbert.
Douglas, Melvyn, 1901-

Refer from
Hesselberg, Melvyn.

8 On Library of Congress printed cards the original name is usually given in
b* m ' M * ht - hand corner of ** rd, eg., Warn* ortffinaZty; Bruno Bte

baum.

PERSONAL AUTHORS 46A

B. When a person regularly uses a foreign form of his name, enter
under this form.

Mirkine-Guetzevitch, Boris not

Mirkin-Getsevich, Boris Sergeevich.
Tscbermak, Gustav von, not Cermak.

This practice applies to authors whose works have originally ap-
peared in a foreign or adopted tongue, and whose names may there-
fore be given in the form adopted by them.

Follow this practice also in the case of transliterated names, if the
author has himself consistently used a particular form when among
foreigners, or is always known by a transliteration differing from the
one provided for in these rules.

Rachmaninoff, Sergei, not Rakhmaninov, Sergei Vasirevich.
Rangabe, not Rankabes.
Vlachos, not Blachos.

46. Married women.

Enter a married woman under her latest name unless, as specified
below, she has consistently written under another name.

The heading is to consist of (1) husband's surname, 9 (2) her own
forenames, and (3) her maiden name, when known, in parentheses.
(For the use of the title Mrs., or its equivalent, see 41B.)

Stowe, Emily Howard (Jennings)
Curie, Marie (Sklodowska) 1867-1934.
Benin, Anna (von Zanthier) von, 1856-1933.
Hamsun, Marie (Andersen) 1881-
Viterbi, Bona (Benvenisti)

A* When a woman uses her husband's forenames or initials in
place of her own on the title page of her books, enter under her own
name and refer from her husband's name.

* (1) German women of the 16th to 18th centuries who added the suffix in to their
surname or family name (e.g., Welserin, Gottschedin, Karschin) are entered under
the name without the suffix. Refer from name with suffix.
Kavsch, Anna Lutee (Diirtmch) 1722-1791.

Refer from
Karschin, Anna Luise (Dxirbach)

(2) The enclitic ne added by Hungarian married women is omitted in the head-
ing, e.g.,

Ma^yary, Margit (Techert)

Refer from the form with the enclific added to the surname: Magyaryne,
Margit (Techert)

Refer also from the form with the enclitic added to the husband's fore-
name if the woman has used this form or is known by it.

Magyary, ZoltannS.
Use this last form as the entry if the woman's forenames are not known.

(3) Women's names, both married and single, in Polish, Russian, and Czech retain
the feminine ending with exception in favor of the masculine form when it is the
prevalent usage.

Ellzarova, Anna Il'lnichna (Ul'ianova)
Vototfkova-Lauermannova, O.

46B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Ward, Mary Augusta (Arnold) 1851-1920.

Refer from

Ward, Mrs. Humphry.
Bussy, Dorothy (Strachey)

Refer from
Bussy, Mme. Simon.

B. Omit the name of an earlier husband in the heading unless it
continues to appear in the form of name which the author custom-
arily uses,

Eddy, Mary (Baker) 1821-1910, not Eddy, Mary (Baker) Glover,
but

Jackson, Helen Hunt, 1831-1885.

Refer from

Hunt, Helen Maria (Fiske)
Jackson, Helen Maria (Fiske) Hunt.

C. Enter a married woman who continues to write under her
maiden name under the maiden name. Refer from married name.

Bronte, Charlotte, 1816-1855.

Refer from

Nicholls, Charlotte (Bronte)
Earhart, Amelia, 1898-1937.

Refer from

Putnam, Amelia (Earhart)
Millay, Edna St, Vincent, 1892-

Refer from

Boissevain, Edna St. Vincent (Millay)
Sawyer, Ruth, 1880-

Refer from
Durand, Ruth (Sawyer)

D. Enter a woman who remarries but continues to write or is best
known under the name of a former husband under the name of the
former husband. Refer from later married name.

Wiggin, Kate Douglas (Smith) 1856-1923.

Refer from

Riggs, Kate Douglas (Smith) Wiggin.
Wylie, Elinor (Hoyt) 1885-1928.

Refer from

Benet, Elinor (Hoyt) Wylie.
Forbes, Kosita (Torr)

Refer from

Forbes, Joan Rosita (Torr)
McGrath, Rosita (Torr) Forbes.

E. men a divorced woman resumes her maiden name, enter
under the maiden name. If she has written under her married name
refer from it.

F. Compound names consisting of a combination of the surnames
of husband and wife are frequently found on the title pages of books

PERSONAL AUTHORS

by married women. As a rule these are not treated as compound
names, but are entered according to the general rule for married
women. (46) However, exceptions are sometimes made, especially
in the case of foreign names if custom favors entry under the com-
pound form.

In any language when the maiden name appears in the heading as
a part of a compound name, it is not enclosed in parentheses; and
in all cases references are made from parts of the surname not chosen
as entry word.

(1) Spanish names. 10 In Spanish names the customary usage is
for a woman to add to her own surname the surname of her husband,
connecting the two by the preposition de. Ordinarily the part of each
surname which represents the mother's name is dropped, but it is
sometimes retained if the mother's name is a particularly distinguished
one, or, as a means of identification if the father's name is a very
common one.

Enter according to the general rule for compound names, the entry
word in this case being the woman's maiden name.

Molina y Vedia de Bastianini, Delfina.

[Father's name: Octavio T. Molina.
Mother's name: Manuela, Vedia de Molina.
Maiden name: Delfina Molina y Vedia.
Husband's name: Rene Bastianini]

Refer from

Bastianini, Delfina Molina y Vedia de.
Vedia de Bastianini, Delfina Molina y.

(2) Portuguese names. The usage in Portuguese and Brazilian
names is less consistent than in Spanish, but in general names are
formed in the same way. At present, however, the tendency is toward
use of the last surname, the husband's, rather than the full compound
form. Enter under the last surname, with reference from any other
surnames which form part of the name.

Vasconcellos, Carolina (Michaelis) de, 1851-1925.
[Father's name: Gustavo Michaelis.
Husband's name: Joaquim de Vasconcellos']

Refer from
Michaelis de Vasconcellos, Carolina.

(3) Dutch names. The Dutch custom is to use a hyphenated com-
pound in which the husband's name is followed by the wife's maiden
name. Treat as any compound name.

Ammers-Kiiller, Jo van, 1884-

Refer from

Ammers, Johanna (Kiiller) van.
Kiiller, Jo van Ammers-

10 Cf. C. F. Gosnell, Spanish personal names; principles governing their formation
and use. (New York, Wilson, 1938).

*6F(4) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(4) Italian names. In Italian names the compound form is fre-
quently found, the wife's name sometimes preceding and sometimes
following the husband's name. In general enter under the maiden
name or the married name according to the rules for the names of
married women, using the compound form only when it is the author's
consistent usage, or when it is impossible to distinguish between
maiden name and married name.

Fusinato, Erminia (Fua) 1834-1876.

Refer from
Fua-Fusinato, Erminia.

Negri, Ada, 1870-1945.

Refer from
Negri-Garlanda, Ada.
Garlanda, Ada (Negri)

Pierantoni-Mancini, Grazia, 1843-1915.

Refer from

Pierantpni, Grazia (Mancini)
Mancini, Grazia Pierantoni-

(5) German, Swiss, Scandinavian, and Russian married women who
use a compound form of name on the title pages of their books are
entered according to the general rules for married women unless the
compound form is known to be the preferred usage.

47. Saints.

A. Enter saints of the early and medieval church like other writers
of the same period under the forename, using the Latin form, fol-
lowed by the designation SAINT in English*

Since the same name is frequently borne by several saints, descrip-
tive or definitive epithets or appellatives are necessary for the pur-
pose of differentiation. The designation SAINT follows epithets or
appellatives qualifying the name of the saint and titles of nobility
(cf. D) but precedes titles of office.

Benedictus, Saint, Abbot of Monte Cassino.

Theodoras Studita, Saint, 7597-826.

Joannes Eleemosynarius, Saint, Patriarch of Alexandria, <i 616?

Refer from English or other forms of name, using when possible
a general reference, e.g.,

Benedict

For saints and popes bearing this name see
Benedictus.

Exception from the Latin form is made for (1) Biblical saints who
are entered under the English form of name (cf. 54), and (2) national
saints or saints of predominantly local interest who are entered under
the vernacular form of name.

James, Saint, apostle.

Augustine, Saint, Abp. of Canterbury, d, 604.

PERSONAL AUTHORS 47B

Genevieve, of Paris, Saint, 5th cent.

Patrick, Saint, 3737-463?

Ansgar, Saint, Abp. of Hamburg and Bremen, 801-865.

Ciaran, Saint, Abbot of CZonmacnois.

Because saints are officially listed under the forename in Latin,
reference should always be made from that form when any other
form of entry is adopted.

Augustinus, Saint, Abp. of Canterbury

see

Augustine, Saint, Abp. of Canterbury, d. 604.
Genovef a, of Paris, Saint

see
Genevieve, of Paris, Saint, 5th cent.

B, Enter modern saints preferably under the forename in the
vernacular. Refer from Latin form of name and from surname or
secular name and any variant names by which the saint is known.

Filippo Neri, Saint, 1515-1595.

Refer from

Philippus Nerhas, Saint.
Neri, Filippo, Saint.
Luigi Gonzaga, Saint, 1568-1591.

Refer from
Aloysius, Saint.
Gonzaga, Luigi, Saint.
Konrad von Parzham, Saint, 1818-1894.

Refer from

Conradus a Parzham, Saint.
Birndorfer, Johannes Evangelist.
Therese, Saint, 1873-1897.

Refer from

Teresia a Jesu Infanta, Saint.
Therese de TEnfant Jesus, Saint.
Martin, Marie Frangoise Therese.

Exception is made in favor of entry under surname for saints
canonized long after death and known in history and literature by
their surnames. Refer from name with forename as entry word in
both Latin and vernacular forms.

Fisher, John, Saint, Bp. of Rochester, 14697-1535.

Refer from
John Fisher, Saint.
Joannes Fisher, Saint.
Loyola, Ignacio de, Saint, 1491-1556.

Refer from

Ignatius Loyola, Saint
Ignacio de Loyola, Saint.
Hofbauer, Klemens Maria, Saint, 1751-1820.

Kefcr from

Clemens Maria Hofbauer, Saint.
Klemens Maria Hofbauer, Saint.

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

C. Enter popes, kings, etc., who have achieved sainthood under
the rules for popes, kings, etc.

Pius V, Saint, Pope, 1504-1572.

Gregorius I, the Great, Saint, Pope, 540 (ca.)-604.

Olav II, Saint, King of Norway, 995-1030.

D. Enter noblemen who have achieved sainthood under the rule
for noblemen. Make references as prescribed for names of noble-
men and, in addition, from the forename in both Latin and vernacu-
lar forms.

Chantal, Jeanne Frangoise (Fremiot) de Rabutin, baronne de,

Saint, 1572-1641.
Rejer from

Joanna Francisca Fremiot de Chantal, Saint.

Jeanne Frangoise de Chantal, Saint.

Jane Frances de Chantal, Saint.

Chantal, Saint.

Fremiot, Jeanne Frangoise, baronne de Chantal.

Fremyot, Jeanne Frangoise, baronne de Chantal.

Rabutin-Chantal, Jeanne Frangoise (Fremiot) baronne de.
More, Sir Thomas, Saint, 1478*1535.
.Refer from

Thomas More, Saint.

Thomas Morus, Saint.

48. Popes.

Enter a pope under his Latin pontifical name, followed by the title
POPE. Popes having the same name are distinguished by a numeral
Refer from the vernacular form and from his family name.

Pius XI, Pope, 1857-1939.

Refer from

Pio (Make a general reference. Cf. 47A.)
Ratti, Achille.

An Sttitipope is entered under his Latin pontifical name with the
numeral by which he is usually known, followed by the title ANXXPOPE.

Clemens Vtt, autipope, 1342-1394.

Refer from
Robert de Gen&ve.

Works emanating from a pope in his capacity as head of the church
are entered under CATHOLIC CHURCH. (See USA.) Correlate the two
types of entry by references,

Pius EK, Pope, 1792-1878.

See also
Catholic Church. Pope, 1846-1878 (Pius IX)

49, Patriarchs.

Enter a patriarch under the name by which ho is known in his own
country, usually a name assumed in religion, sometimes in Latin and

PERSONAL AUTHORS 52

sometimes in the vernacular. Include in the heading the title PATRIARCH
and the name of the patriarchate. Refer from secular name if known. 11

Cyrillus, Saint, Patriarch of Alexandria, 376 (ca.)-444.
Dositheos, Patriarch of Jerusalem, 1641-1707.
Tikhon, Patriarch, of Russia, 1865-1925.

Refer from
Belavin, Vasilii.

50. Cardinals. 12

Enter a cardinal according to the rule of entry appropriate to his
station at the time of his elevation. Earlier ecclesiastical titles, except
those of ecclesiastical princes, give way to the title CARDINAL, but
titles of nobility are retained in the heading.

Gibbons, James, Cardinal, 1834-1921.

Richelieu, Armand Jean du Plessis, due de, Cardinal, 1585-1642.

Albrecht von Brandenburg, Cardinal, Abp. and elector of Mainz,

1490-1545.
Andreas, margrave of Burgau, Cardinal, 1558-1600.

51. Ecclesiastical princes.

Enter under forename in the vernacular an archbishop or bishop
who, in addition to his see, rules a territory as a temporal prince. In-
clude in the heading, in English, the title PRINCE-ARCHBISHOP, ABP.
AND ELECTOR, or PRINCE-BISHOP, as the case may be, and the name
of the see. (Cf. 52, 55.)

Neithard, Prince-Bishop of Bamberg, 15457-1598.

This rule applies to German and Austrian prince-bishops before
secularization of 1803, those after 1803 being entered according to the
rule for bishops and archbishops. (52)

52. Bishops and archbishops.

Enter bishops and archbishops under the surname with the designa-
tion BP. or ABP. Retain titles of nobility in the heading.

Shahan, Thomas Joseph, Bp., 1857-1932.

Soderblom, Nathan, Abp., 1866-1931.

Waitz, Siegmund, Prince-Archbishop of Salzburg, 1864-

The titles vicar apostolic, prefect apostolic, administrator apostolic,
and vicar-general are not included in the heading, even though these
officials exercise episcopal jurisdiction. If such officers are consecrated
titular bishops, then the title BP. or ABP. is used.

Exceptions to entry under surname are made in cases where the
rules require another form of entry, e.g., an early or medieval bishop
under forename, a nobleman under title.

11 When it can be ascertained the Library of Congress gives the secular name in a
note in the lower right-hand corner of the catalog card in the following form
Secular name: Vasilii Belavin.

11 The term cardinal includes cardinal archbishop, cardinal bishop, cardinal priest,
cardinal deacon*

52A A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Further variations and specifications.

A. Include the name of the see in the heading:

(1) For bishops and archbishops of the Church of England in
Great Britain and Ireland, and of the pre-Reformation
Catholic Church in Great Britain (but not for Catholic
bishops after the reconstitution of the hierarchy in 1850,
nor for the vicars apostolic with the title of bishop in charge
after the extinction of the old hierarchy).

(2) For the ecclesiastical princes of the Holy Roman Empire.
(Cf. 51.)

(3) For bishops and archbishops of the Orthodox Eastern
Church who bear the title Metropolitan. (Cf. E. below.)

(4) For any bishop when desirable for the purpose of identifi-
cation or distinction, especially early Christian and medieval
bishops.

Fleetwood, William, Bp. of Ely, 1656-1723.

Edmund Rich, Saint, Abp. of Canterbury, d. 1240.

Colenso, John William, Bp. of Natal, 1814-1883.

Gregoire, Henri, Constitutional Bp. of Blois, 1750-1831.

Gregorius, Saint, Bp. of Tours, 538-594.

Gregorius, Abp. of Corinth, ft. ca. 1200.

Hilarianus, Quintus Julius, Bp. in proconsular Africa, 4th cent.

Paulus, Nestorian Bp. of Nisibis, d. 571.

Do not include the name of the see in the heading for suffragan,
auxiliary, coadjutor, titular, and assistant bishops, and chorepiscopi.

B. When there have been several bishops of the same name in one
see, especially in the early period, include the number in the heading
if they have been so distinguished.

Ruricius I, Bp. of Limoges, d. ca. 507.

C. In the case of translation from one see to another, include the
latest see only in the heading. 18

Andrewes, Lancelot, Bp. of Winchester, 1555-1626.

(not successively Bp. of Chiche$ter, Ely, and Winchester)
Lang, Cosmo Gordon Lang, baron, Abp. of Canterbury, 1864-

(not successively Bp. of Stepney and Abp. of York and Canterbury}

Refer from see, or successive sees, held by a bishop.

Markham, William, Abp. of York, 1719-1807.

Refer from

Chester, William Markham, Bp. of.
York, William Markham, Abp, of.

"Exception may be made in favor of the earlier see if a bishop has died shortly
after his translation without becoming known or having published as bishop of the
j^ter see. However, the later see is invariably to be used if (I) a uf!ragan bishop
has been made a diocesan bishop, (2) a bishop has been made an archbishop, (3) an
archbishop of York has been translated to the see of Canterbury,

PERSONAL AUTHORS 52F

When a bishop of the Church of England uses as signature his
forename followed by the abbreviated Latin name of the diocese (e.g.,
Cantuar, Dunelm, Winston) refer also from this form.

g, Cosmo Gordon Lang, baron, Abp. of Canterbury, 1864-
Refer from
Cantuar, Cosmo Gordon.

If a Catholic bishop is translated to a titular archdiocese do not
change the title unless he has ruled an archdiocese or published as
an archbishop.

Canevin, Regis, Bp., 1852-1927.

of Pittsburgh; resigned 1921; titular archbishop of Pelusium

Basin, Thomas, Abp., 1412-1491.

[Bishop of Lisieux, 1447-1474; resigned and was made archbishop of
Caesarea; continued to publish]

D. In case of deposition, especially if accompanied by change of
denomination and no elevation to the episcopate in the new denomi-
nation, the title of bishop is omitted.

Ives, Levi Silliman, 1797-1867.

[Consecrated Protestant Episcopal bishop of North Carolina, 1831;
resigned the see, Dec. 22, 1852; became a Catholic Dec. 25, 1852;
deposed Oct. 14, 1853; active as layman in the Catholic Church
because as a married man he could not enter the priesthood]

E. Enter a bishop or an archbishop of the Orthodox Eastern Church
who bears the title "Metropolitan" under the name by which he is
known in religion followed by the title METROPOLITAN and the name
of the see. Refer from secular name if known. 14

Platen, Metropolitan of Moscow, 1737-1812.

Kef er from

Levshin, Petr Georgievich.
Dimitrii, Saint, Metropolitan of Rostov, 1651-1709.

Refer from
Tuptalo, Daniil Sawich.

F. Enter the official acts and records of a bishop under the diocese,
subheading BISHOP, YEARS OF INCUMBENCY and, in parentheses, the
NAME OF THE BISHOP. Correlate the two types of entry by means of
references. 15

14 Cf. footnote 11, rule 49.

15 To make these references intelligible, an explanatory card should be filed at the
head of the entry for each diocese with the subheading BISHOP.

Winchester, Eng. (Diocese) Bishop.

Only official aces or records are entered under this heading, subdivided when.
necessary by date of incumbency and name of incumbent. Works of bishops
as personal authors are entered under their family name (in the case of noble-
men under their title) . For a list of the bishops of Winchester consult Crock-
ford's clerical directory.

Footnote continued on next page.

53 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Winchester, Eug. (Diocese) Bishop, 1367-1404 (William of
Wykeham)

with references to and from
Wykeham, William of, Bp. of Winchester, 1323? -1404.

Pastoral letters and charges, not being considered official, are entered
under the bishop as personal author.

53. Religious orders, Changed names of persons in.

Enter writers who have adopted a religious name upon entering
orders, modifying or relinquishing the original secular name, under
the modified secular or religious name as further specified under A, B
and exception C. Add, in English, the designation FATHER for
priests, BROTHER for those not priests; MOTHER for heads of religious
houses or those called Mother by the order, and SISTER for those not
designated Mother. 16 (Cf. 47-49.)

A. Enter under surname writers known to the lay public under
the surname combined with the name in religion. Refer from the
name in religion and from full secular name. 17

Bransiet, Philippe, Broker, 1792-1874.

Refer from
Philippe, Brother.
Bransiet, Matthieu.

Miley, Mary Hilda, Sister, 1381-
Refer from

Footnote continued from preceding page.

An explanatory card should also be filed under the name of the see city followed
by the words BISHOP OF.

Winchester, llishop of.

Official acts are entered under the heading Winchester, Ena. (Diocese) . Other
works are under the family name of the bishop (In the case of nobtomcn,
under his title) , For a list of the bishops of Winchester consult Crockford'.s
clerical directory.

The reference to the authoritative list of bishops is altered according to the denomi-
nation of which the diocese is a unit.
Lists of bishops:

Catholic bishops: Gams. Series epfcreoponmi, 1873.
Catholic bishops in Great Britain: Catholic directory.
Catholic bishops in the U. S,: Official Catholic directory.
Anglican bishops: Croc/c/ord'a clerical director!/.
Protestant Episcopal bishops: Living church annual.

10 The name of the order should be included in the heading only whan necessary
to distinguish between two or more persons having the? same religious name. This
duplication of names occurs frequently when entry is under forename and in refer-
ences from forename to full name entry.
Mary ttarlmra, Si&ter, 18GG-

lL th T Con x fi re gntion of the Daughters of Charity of St. Vmc*nt <!< Paul
in ot. Louis)

see

Kegran, Mary ttarlmra, Sister, 1866-
Mary Barbara, Sister, 1886-

(Of the Congregation of the Sisters of St. Joseph in Michigan)

sec
McCarthy, Mary Itarftnra, Sister, 1886-

fc 7 f Co ^ress gives the name in religion (or the secular name as the
case may be) in a note in the lower right-hand corner of the catalog card in the

touowing form;

nr^SIK^lfi^ ?'' Jacc * ue *i r * d c Sttlnte Euphonic, $l$ter.

or Secular name: Lawrence Anthony Hess,

100

PERSONAL AUTHORS 53B

Mary Hilda, Sister.

Hilda, Sister.

Miley, Gertrude Ann.

B. Enter under religious name writers who have published all or
most of their works under that name. Refer from secular name if
ascertainable. 18

Cuthbert, Father, 1866-1939.

Refer from

Hess, Lawrence Anthony.
Clotilde Angela, Sister, 1895-

Refer from
McBride, Regina Margaret.

When the name Mary is abbreviated to M. by the author, indicating
that the name following the initial is the distinctive part of the name,
it is omitted in both purely religious names and in combinations of
secular family name and religious given name except in cases where
the distinctive part of the religious name is a masculine name adopted
by a nun.

Eleanore, Sister, 1890-

Refer from

Mary Eleanore, Sister.
Brosnahan, Katharine Mary.
Hayden, Bridget, Mother, 1814-1890.

Refer from

Hayden, Mary Bridget, Mother.
Mary Bridget, Mother.
Bridget, Mother.
Hayden, Margaret,
but

Mary Bartholomew, Sister.

Refer from
Bartholomew, Sister.
Frederick, Elizabeth Eva.

The word SAINT is spelled out when it is the entry word of a
religious name, either as main entry or reference.

Saint Catharine, Sister, 1878-
LeClair, St. Ida, Sister, 1891-

Refer from
Saint Ida, Sister.
but

Mary of St. Peter, Mother, 1838-1924.

Refer from
Gamier, Marie Adele,

The prepositional phrase indicating place of birth is italicized when
it is made a part of the religious name.

18 See footnote 17, p. 100.

101

53C _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Francis da Offeio, Father.

Egidio da Caraglio, Father.

Jose dc Siguenza, Father, 1544 (ca.) -1606.

C, Enter tinder the secular name 10 writers who have published
works under the original name and are not known, or not so well
known, under their religious names. Refer from name in religion. 20

Pascal, Jacqueline, 1575-1661.

Refer from

Jacqueline de Sainte Euphemie, Sister.
Lathrop, Kose (Hawthorne) 1851-1926.

Refer from

Mary Alphonsa, Mother.
Lathrop, Mary Alphonsa, Mother.

54. Bible characters.

Give names of Bible characters in English in the form in which they
appear in the Authorized version, followed by any necessary dis-
tinguishing epithet. Refer from variant forms as used in other versions,
as for example the Douay version.

James, Saint, apostle.
Elijah^ the prophet.
Refer from

Elias, the prophet.
Gideon, judge of Israel.
Refer from

Gedeon, judge of Israel.
Absalom, son of David.
Judith ( Jewish heroine)
Rahab (Biblical character)

55. Sovereigns and rulers.

Enter sovereigns and ruling princes under their forenames in the
vernacular, 2 * followed by title in English. Refer from the English form
of name if it differs from the vernacular.

James I, King of Great Britain, 1566-1625.

[Kings prior to James I have title: King of England!
Franz Joseph I, Emperor of Austria, 1830-1916.
Fnednch I, Barbarossa, Emperor of Germany 1121-1190.
Wilhelm II, German Emperor, 1859-1941

[form of title after 1870]
Henri IV, King of France, 1553-1610.
Napoleon III, Emperor of the French, 1808-1873
Umberto I, King of Italy, 1844-1900.

102

PERSONAL AUTHORS 55B

Paul I, Emperor of Russia, 1754-1801.

Hirohito, Emperor of Japan, 1901-

Wilhelmina, Queen of the Netherlands, 1880-

Margaretha, of Parma, Regent of the Netherlands, 1522-1586.

Albert I, Prince of Monaco, 1848-1922.

Fr S Egollf prince ~ Bi $hP of Hildesheim and Paderlorn, 1737-

Enter the consorts of sovereigns under forename in the form used
in the country of the sovereign, with the titles in English and the
name of the sovereign in English form.

Albert, consort of Victoria, Queen of Great Britain, 1819-1861.

Marie Antoinette, consort of Louis XVI, King of France, 1755-
1793.

Mariia Feodorovna, consort of Alexander III, Emperor of Russia,
1847-1928.

Maria de la Paz, consort of Louis Ferdinand, Prince of Bavaria,
1862-

Isabel de Valois, consort of Philip II, King of Spain, 1545-1568.

Refer from
Elisabeth de France.
Elizabeth of Valois.

A. Enter Roman emperors of the West according to the rule for
classical Latin authors (60) , i.e., under the name by which they are
most generally known in history. Follow the practice of standard
classical dictionaries.

Thus we have under praenomen:

Tiberius, Emperor of Rome, 42 B.C. -37 A.D,
Titus, Emperor of Rome, 40-81.

Under nomen:

Aurelius Antoninus, Marcus, Emperor of Rome, 121-180.
Under cognomen:

Aurelianus, Lucius Domitius, Emperor of Rome, d. 275.
Severus, Lucius Septimius, Emperor of Rome, 146-211.
Trajanus, Emperor of Rome, 53-117.

Under nickname:

Caligula, Emperor of Rome, 12-41.
Caracalla, Emperor of Rome, 186-217.

Refer from parts of name not used as entry word.

B. Enter Roman emperors of the East under forename in the Latin
form followed by name of family or dynasty, or (before family names
came into use) lay any epithet or descriptive appellative by which the
emperor is known. (Cf. 59.) Refer from family name.

Emperors having the same forename are distinguished by a numeral

103

55C A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

which immediately follows the forename and precedes the family
name or epithet as the case may be.

Constantinus EH, Emperor of the East, d. 641.
Leo IH, the Isaurian, Emperor of the East, ca. ,680-ca. 740.
Leo VI, the Wise, Emperor of the East, 865-911.
Joannes I Zimiskes, Emperor of the East, d. 976.

Refer from
Zimiskes, Joannes.

Joannes n Comnenus, Emperor of the East, 1088-1143.

Refer from
Comnenus, Joannes.

Joannes VI Cantacuzenus, Emperor of the East, d. 1383.

Refer from
Cantacuzenus, Joannes.

C. Enter Mohammedan sovereigns under their given names only,
transliterated from the original.

Harun al-Bashld, Caliph, 763 (ca.)-809.

'Abd al-Majid, -Sultan of the Turks, 1823-1861.

'Abbas I, the Great, Shah of Persia, 1571-1629.

Sulaiman I, the Magnificent, Sultan of the Turks, 1494-1566.

When necessary for identification, add the sovereign's patronymic
compounded with the word "ibn," i.e., "son of."

'AH ibn AM Talib, Caliph, 600 (ca.)-661.
'Uthman ibn Affan, Caliph.

Prefer the European form of name for Mohammedan sovereigns
who have become widely known in European literature under a form
of name differing from the native form.

Saladin, Sultan of Egypt and Syria, 1137-1193.

Refer from

Salah al-DIn Yusuf ibn Aiyub, Sultan of Egypt and Syria.
Selim I, Sultan of the Turks, ca. 1465-1520.

Refer from
Salim I, Sultan of the Turks.

D. Enter Chinese emperors, with the exception of those of the
Ming and Ch'ing dynasties, under the name of the dynasty followed
by the temple-name (commonly known as dynastic title) , which was
given posthumously. In all cases refer from reign-titles and personal
names of the emperors. The name of the dynasty is not to be separated
from the temple-name, or the reign-title, by a comma. The two words
which form, in each case, the temple-name and the reign-title are to
be hyphenated and the first only is to be capitalized.

T'ang Hsiian-tsung, Emperor of China, 685-762.

Refer from

T'ang K'ai-yiian. c name of dynasty and reign-title^

T ang T'ien-pao. tname of dynasty and reign-titlei

Li, Lung-chi. ^personal namej

104

PERSONAL AUTHORS 56

Hsiian-tsung.

Ming-huang. ^alternate temple-name?

K'ai-yiian.

Tien-pao.

Enter Ming and Ch'ing emperors, who are better known by their
reign-titles, under reign-titles only, not preceded by name of the
dynasty. Refer from their temple-names as well as from their per-
sonal names.

Hung-wu, Emperor of China, 1328-1398.

Refer from

Ming T'ai-tsu. cname of dynasty and tempte-namej

Ming Hung-wu. cname of dynasty and reign-titlej

Chu, Yuan-chang. {personal name^

T'ai-tsu. ctemple-namcj

K'ang-hsi, Emperor of China, 1654-1723.

Refer from

Ch'ing Sheng-tsu. cname of dynasty and temple-name^

Ch'ing K'ang-hsi. cname of dynasty and reign-title^

Hsiian-yeh. ^personal name]

Sheng-tsu.

E. Enter presidents or other chief executives officially known by
their surnames under the surname, and add the designation of their
office.

Jefferson, Thomas, Pres. U. S., 1743-1826.

Masaryk, Tomas Garrigue, Pres. Czechoslovak Republic, 1850-

.
Fonseca, Hermes Rodrigues da, Pres. Brazil, 1855-1923.

Edicts, proclamations, etc., emanating from a ruler in the exercise
of his official duties are considered government publications and are
entered under the country. (Cf. 73.) Correlate the two types of entry
by references.

Charles n, King of Great Britain, 1630-1685.

with references to and from
Gt Brit. Sovereigns, etc., 1660-1685 (Charles II)

Laws and edicts and ordinances having the force of laws are to
be entered under country with the subheading LAWS, STATUTES, ETC.
(Cf. 84.)

56. Princes of the blood.

In general, enter members of the immediate families of sovereigns
under forename (for members of Russian royal families, include
patronymic) and refer from title; but enter under title those who
are decidedly better known by that designation.

(Cf. 41A(1),43.)

Eulalia, Infanta of Spain, 1864-
Carlos, Prince of Asturias, 1545-1568.

Refer from
Asturias, Carlos, Principe de.

105

57 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Philippe, count of Flanders, 1837-1905.

Refer from

Flandre, Philippe, comte de.
George, duke of Kent, 1902-1942.

Refer from

Kent, George, duke of.
Kirill Vladimirovich, grand duke of Russia, 1876-1938.

Refer from

Cyril, grand duke of Russia.
Yasuhito, Prince Chichibu, 1902-

Refer from
Chichibu-no-miya.
but

Orleans, Philippe I, due d', 1640-1701.

with reference from
Philippe i, duke of Orleans.

Members of mediatized families are entered under the family
name (title).

Wied-Neuwied, Maximilian Alexander Philipp, Prinz von. 1782-
1867.

57. Noblemen.

Enter a nobleman under his latest title unless he is decidedly
better known by an earlier title or by the family name. 22 In either
case refer from the name not adopted as entry word.

A. The form of entry for English nobility is shown in the follow-
ing examples:

Duke: Wellington, Arthur Wellesley, 1st duke of, 1769-1852.

Refer from

Wellesley, Arthur, 1st duke of Wellington.
Marquis: Queensberry, John Sholto Douglas, 8th marquis of,
1844-1900.

Refer from

Douglas, John Sholto, 8th marquis of Queensberry.
Earl: Chesterfield, Philip Dormer Stanhope, 4th earl of, 1694-
1793.

Refer from

Stanhope, Philip Dormer, 4th earl of Chesterfield.
Viscount: Grey of Fallodon, Edward Grey, 1st viscount, 1862-
1933.

Refer from

Grey, Edward, 1st viscount Grey of Fallodon.
Baron: Lytton, Edward George Earle Lytton Bulwer-Lytton,
baron, 1803-1873.

Refer from

Bulwer-Lytton, Edward George Earle Lytton, baron Litton.
Baronet: Scott, Sir Walter, bar*., 1771-1832.

"Exceptions in favor of entry under better-known femily name;
Bacen, Francis, viscount St. Albans. 1561-1626.
Walpole, Horace, 4th earl of Orford, 1717-1797.
Souftn Coutinho, Bodrlffo de, conde de Unbares, 1745-1812.

106

PERSONAL AUTHORS _ S7Af

Knight: Landseer, Sir Edwin Henry, 1802-1873

Dame: Campbell, Dame Janet Mary.

Lord:

[Courtesy title of younger son of a duke or marquis!
Gordon, Lord George, 1751-1783. '""gwwj

Lady:

Qjr rte$tf r tl 2 e Sf the dau 9hter of a duke, marquis or earl]

Stanhope, Lady Hester Lucy, 1776-1839.

Honorable:

[Courtesy title of younger sons of an earl and sons and daughters

3 ts?r. SLST the me h<m rMe is * * *> ss

Keppel, Hon. Arnold Joost William, 1884-
Russell, Hon. Harriet.
Right honorable:

[T ^^ le Wf n beZ ? lfS ?* % ght to al1 ? eers ** never * by them
rf^EL* 1 ^ o g ? 1 dal d ^- is the prerogative
of members of the Privy Council and is borne by those of them

binet ministers - h to "

** Ecl - tic * Catalog

(1) The titles of address Lord and Lady are commonly applied to
an members of the English peerage except dukes and duchesses In
the heading the appropriate title is substituted, e.g., Lord Macaulav
becomes: J

Macaulay, Thomas Babington Macaulay, baron, 1800-1859.

(2) Enter judges of the Court of Sessions of Scotland who bear
the title Lord, followed by a family or territorial name, under the
title with the designation LOKD following instead of preceding the fore-
name as in the case of the courtesy title Lord. Refer from family name
when it differs from the title.

If a judge bears a nobility title as well as a law title, prefer entry
under the nobility title, especially if it is hereditary, unless he is gen-
erally known by the law title.

Kames, Henry Home, Lord, 1696-1782.

Refer from

Home, Henry, Lord Kames.
Guthrie, Charles John Guthrie, Lord, 1849-1920.
Grant, Sir Francis, bart, 1658-1726.

Refer from
Cullen, Francis Grant, Lord.

(3) The wife of a peer takes the title corresponding to that of her
husband, i.e., duchess, marchioness, countess, viscountess, baroness.

Devonshire, Georgiana (Spencer) Cavendish, duchess of. 1757-
1806.

(4) The wife of a baronet or knight has the title Lady. Whether
this title precedes or follows her forename in the heading depends
upon whether she is entitled to it in virtue of her father's rank or
whether she acquired it through marriage.

107

57A(5) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Montagu, Lady Mary (Pierrepont) Wortley, 1689-1762.

[Daughter of a duke]
Duff-Gordon, Lucie (Austin) Lady, 1821-1869.

[Title "by marriage]

(5) The daughter of a viscount or baron married to a baronet or
knight keeps her own title and adds the title Lady.

Acland, Hon. Anna Emily, Lady.
If her husband has no title, she retains the title Hon.

Douglas-Hamilton, Hon. Agnes Rosamund (Bateman-Hanbury)

(6) The wife of a younger son of a duke or marquis without title
in her own right becomes, e.g,,

Campbell, Elizabeth (McNeil) Lady John Campbell.

(7) The wife of the younger son of an earl, or of the son of a
viscount or baron without title in her own right becomes Hon. Mrs., e.g.,

Montague, Margaret (Wilson) Hon. Mrs. Charles Montague.

(8) A maid of honor retains her title after her service has ceased
or after marriage unless merged in a higher title.

Grant, Hon. Margaret (Dawnay)

Do not use the numeral in the entry for a baronet, nor usually for
a baron, unless it has some special importance.

B. Titled persons of other countries are treated in the same way
as far as possible. In many instances, as in England below the peer-
age, the title is simply an epithet indicating varying degrees of rank.
In such cases entry is of course under the family name. (Cf. 41A.)

Cavour, Camillo Benso, conte di, 1810-1861.

Alba, Fernando Alvarez de Toledo, duque de, 1508-1582.

Egloffstein, Hermann, Freiherr von und zu, 1861-

Mises, Ludwig, Edler von, 1881-

Tolstol, Lev Nikolaevich, graf, 1828-1910.

Akerhielm, Anna Vilhelmina Elisabeth (Quiding) iriherinna,

1869-

Hatvany, Lajos, bdr6, 1880-
Csoma, Sandor, korosi, 1784-1842, 88
Tokugawa, Yoshitoshi, baron, 1884-
Tokugawa, leyasu, shogun, 1542-1616.

^In the lower ranks of Hungarian nobility a title consisting of an adjectival term
derived from place of origin, family estate, or, sometimes a fictitious geographical
location, often precedes the family name, the combination having the appearance of
a compound name and being so treated in some reference books. In such cases enter
under the family name with reference from title followed by family name Cf
Instruktionen jur die alphabetischen Kataloge der preuszischen Bibliothefcen (2d
ed.; Berlin, Behrend, 1915 cManuldruck 1934:) 1JH9.

Csomn, S&ndor, Jc5r6*si, 1784-1842.

liefer from

Korosi Csoma, Sandor.
Wagy. PA1, feZs3-biifci, 1777-1857.

Refer from
FelsS-biiki Nagy, Pl.

108

PERSONAL AUTHORS 59

C. Use a papal title as entry word only if the title coincides with
the family name, e.g., Loubat, Joseph Florimond, due de. However,
add the title in the heading if helpful to distinguish the individual,
e.g., Morone, Girolamo, due di Bovino.

Ancient and Medieval Writers

58. Ancient Greek writers.

Enter ancient Greek authors under the Latin form of their names
and refer from the English and Greek forms. In selecting the proper
entry word follow the practice of the classical dictionaries. 24

Homerus. Aristides, Aelius.

Refer from Refer from

Homer. Aelius Aristides.

Aeschylus. Cassius Dio Cocceianus.

Refer from Refer from

Aischylos. Dio Cocceianus.

Eschylus. Dion Cassius Cocceianus.

59. Byzantine writers.

Enter Byzantine authors under personal name or byname, depend-
ing upon which has become prevalent in literary and historical usage.
Absolute uniformity in treatment is not practicable. For doubtful
entries follow Krumbacher, 25 using the Latin f oim for names prior to
1450. Later names, especially where entry is under family name with
forenames added, are best given in the Greek transliterated form.
Refer from part of name not chosen as entry word and from variant
forms of name.

Acropolita, Georgius. Georgius Syncellus, jfZ. 800.

Refer from Refer from

Georgius Acropolita. Syncellus, Georgius.

Comnena, Anna, b. 1083. Georgius Trapezuntius, d. 1484.

Refer from Refer from

Anna Comnena. George, of Trebizond.

Komnena, Anna. Trebizond, George of.

Trapezuntius, Georgius.

For Roman emperors of the East see 55B.

M For a guide to the form of entry for ancient Greek authors, see U. S. Library of
Congress, Classification Division, Classification. Class P. P-PA (Washington, Govt.
Print Off., 1928), PA 3818 PA 4500: Greek literature. Individual authors to 700 A.D.;
also List of authorities, ibid., p. 426-427*

25 Karl Krumbacher, "Register der Personen und Sachen," in his Geschicfite der
byzantinischen Litteratur (2d ed.) "Handbuch der klassischen Altertumswissen-
schaft," 9. Bd., 1. Abt. (Miinchen, Beck, 1897) , p. 1153-1193.

109

60 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

60. Classical Latin writers. 26

Enter Latin authors under the original Latin form of the name.
Refer from variant Latin spellings and from the English form if it
differs from the original.

Enter under the name by which the author is best known and most
frequently cited in standard classical dictionaries. 27

Under nomen:

Lucretius Carus, Titus.
Terentius Afer, Publius.

Under cognomen:

Cicero, Marcus Tullius.

Varro, Marcus Terentius.

Scipio Africanus major, Publius Cornelius.

Scipio Aemilianus Africanus minor, Publius Cornelius.

Under agnomen:

Columella, Lucius Junius Moderatus.

Under praenomen:

Tiberius, Emperor of Rome, 42 B.C.-37 A.D.

When it is doubtful which of two names has been preferred as
entry word by the best authorities, enter under the first and refer
from the second.

Martianus Capella.

Refer from
Capella, Martianus.
Vergilius Maro, Publius,

Refer from

Virgilius Maro, Publius.
Virgil.

For Eoman emperors of the West see 55A.

61* Medieval writers.

Enter medieval authors under the given name, favoring the Latin
form in case of doubt for names prior to 1400. 28 Include in the head-

* Every freeborn Roman citizen had three names, praenomen, nomen, and cognomen
To these was sometimes added an agnomen, occasionally more than one The second
name (nomen) distinguished one gens from another; the third name (cognomen)
distinguished one family from another; the first name (praenomen) distinguished
members of the same family from each other; the additional name (agnomen) was
given ordinarily in allusion to some achievement but might have various significa-
tions, e.g., adoption from one gens into another, some moral or physical character-
istic, etc,, and the individual may be known in literature and history by any one of
these names or by all of them.

27 For a guide to the best form of heading for Latin authors, see II S. Library of

P?f e n% ^ Ca ^ n ^o isi ^' SS^? 1 * 1011 - Class P - P - PA - (Washington, Govt.
Print. Off 1928), PA 6202-PA 6971: Latin literature to ca. 700 A.D. Individual
authors; also List of authorities, ibid., p. 426-427.

E.g., where both Joannes and Johannes are found in reference works, prefer
Joannes; similarly prefer Guilelmus to Gulielmus, Guliermus, etc.

110

PERSONAL AUTHORS 61

ing any epithet or byname denoting place of origin, domicile, occupa-
tion, or distiaguishing characteristic by which the individual is known.
Refer from byname, variant forms of personal name, and any other
names by which the author is known in literature and history.

Epithets or bynames when given as part of the name should be in
the same language as the forename. A descriptive word or phrase
added for the sake of identification is given preferably in English.
(Cf. 43.)

Giovanni da Ravenna, 1343-1408.
Refer from

Ravenna, Giovanni da, 1343-1408,

Johannes de Ravenna, 1343-1408.

John of Ravenna, 1343-1408.

Giovanni di Conversino.

Conversino, Giovanni di.
Guilelmus Arvernus, Bp. of Paris, d. 1249.
Refer from

Arvernus, Guilelmus.

Alvernus, Guilelmus.

Auvergne, Guillaume d 5 .

Gulielmus Arvernus.

Guillaume d'Auvergne.

Guillaume de Paris.
Joannes Braidensis, fl. 1419.
Refer from

Braidensis, Joannes.

Joannes de Brera.

Brera, Joannes de.

Joannes de Garlandia, fl. 1204-1229.

Refer from

Garlandia, Joannes de.
Garland, John.
John of Garland.
Joannes Grammaticus.

Johannes von Holleschau, 1366 (ca.)-1436.

Refer from

Holleschau, Johannes von.
John of Rexham, ft. 1180.

Refer from
Hexham, John of.
Joannes, prior of Hexham.
Joannes Hagustaldensis.
Hagustaldensis, Joannes.
Faulus Diaconus, 720 (ca.) -797.

Refer from
Paulus Casinensis.
Paulus Levita.
Warnefrid, Paul, son of.
Paulus Warnefridus.
Warnefridus, Paulus, diaconus.
Paul the deacou,
Paulo Diacono.
Johannes, notary, fl. 1334.

Ill

62 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Burchardus, provost of Ursperg, cL 1250.
Refer from

Burchardus Urspergensis.
Jan, of Nepomuk, Saint, 14th cent.
Refer from

Nepomuk, Jan of, Saint.

Nepomucky, Jan, Saint.

Jan Nepomucky.

Pomuk, John, Saint.

John of Nepomuk, Saint.

John oj Pomuk, Saint.
Johannes, of Winterthur, ft. 1348.
Refer from

Winterthur, Johannes von.

Vitoduranus, Johannes.

Duranus, Johannes Vito.

Johannes Vitoduranus.

Exception is made in favor of entry under the byname if it is better
known than the personal name, or has come to have the character of
a modern surname.

Abailard, Pierre, 1079-1142.

Refer from
Petrus Abaelardus.
Abelard, Pierre.
Abaelardus, Petrus.
Wolkenstein, Oswald von, 1367-1445.

Refer from
Oswald von Wolkenstein.

62. Medieval, Renaissance and Reformation writers with classicized
names*

Enter under the adopted form of name authors of the Middle Ages
and the Renaissance and Reformation periods who have translated
their names into one of the classic languages, or who, with or without
reference to the original, have adopted a name Greek or Latin in form.

Agricola, Rudolf, 1443-1485.

Refer from
Huisman, Roelof .
Huysmann, Roelof.
Melanchthon, Philipp, 1497-15GO.

Refer from
Schwarzerd, Philipp.
Schwartzerd, Philipp.

Naogeorgius, Thomas, 1511-1563.

Refer from

Kirchmaier c also Kirchmair, Kirchmeyer, Thomas.
Kirchbauer, Thomas.
Neubauer, Thomas.

(Ecolampadius, Joannes, 1482-1531.

Refer from

Hausschein f also Heusgen, Husschin, Hussgenj Johann.
OEkolampadius, Joannes.

112

PERSONAL AUTHORS 64

Xylander, Wilhelm, 1532-1576.

Refer from
Holtzmann, WiUielm.

A. But enter under the original name when it has become so firmly
established, through the author's own usage or otherwise, that he is
known by that rather than by the adopted name.

Birck, Sixt, 1500-1554.

Refer from
Betulius, Xystus.
Bircken, Sixtus von.
Reuchlin, Johann, 1455-1522.

Refer from
Capnion, Johannes,
Kapnion, Johannes.

In either case refer from the form of name not chosen as entry word.

B. Medieval family names translated into Latin 5n the genitive
form retain the genitive form when it indicates father's surname or
occupation from which the surname is derived. 29

Fabri, Felix, 14417-1502.

[Father's name, or occupation, Schmid]
Institoris, Henricus, d. 1508.

[Father's name, or occupation, Kramer]
Molitoris, Johannes, fl. 1480.

[Father's name, or occupation, Muller]

63. Post-Reformation and modern writers with classicized names.

Enter post-Reformation and modern writers whose names are found
both in a Latin form and in the vernacular under the Latin form when-
ever this is decidedly better known. Refer from the vernacular.

Grotius, Hugo, 1583-1645.

Refer from
Groot, Hugo de.
but

Bitschl, Friedrich Wilhelm, 1806-1876.

Refer from
Ritschelius, Fridericus.

Oriental Names

64. Arabic names.

Enter Arabic, Persian, and Turkish writers, up to about the year
1900, living in Mohammedan countries and writing only, or predomi-
nantly, in their native tongues, under the given name compounded with
the patronymic (the latter preceded by the word "ibn," i.e., "son of;
in rare cases "akhu," Le., "brother of") as well as with the surname

29 Cf. Basler Chroniken, I (Leipzig, 1872), p. 241, note 2.

113

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

and nickname, usually derived from place of birth or residence
(nisbah) , occupation, physical peculiarities, etc.

Muhammad ibn Yusuf, Abu 'Urnar, al-Kindi, 897-961.
Refer from

Abu *Umar Muhammad ibn Yusuf, al-Kindi.

al-Kindi, Abu 'Umar Muhammad ibn Yusuf.
Muhammad ibn Walid, al-Turtushi, called Ibn al-Rundakah, ca

1059-ca. 1126. '

Refer from

al-Tiirtushi, Muhammad ibn Walid, called Ibn al-Rundakah.

Abu Bakr Muhammad ibn Walid, al-Turtushi.

Abu Bakr al-Turtushi.

Abubequer de Tortosa.

Ibn al-Rundakah, Muhammad ibn Walid, al-Turtushi.

Ibn Abl Randaqa.

Abenadirandaca.

A. Distinguish with care cases where "ibn" and "abu" indicate
patronymics and honorifics, from other cases where these words are
merely integral parts of given names and nicknames.

Abu Bakr ibn al-Tufail, Abu Ja'far, al-Ishbili, d. 1185.

[In this cose "abu" in Abu Bakr is an integral part of a given name]
Abu al-Fida', 1273-1345.

[In this case "abu 9 ' is an integral part of a nickname]
Ibn al-Athlr, 1160-1234.

[7n this case "ibn" is an integral part of a surname]

B. Exception is made in favor of entry under another part of the
name when an author of great prominence has become generally
known under his honorific name, surname, nickname, etc.

al-Ghazzali, 1058-1111.
Refer from

Muhammad ibn Muhammad, al-Ghazzali.

Algazel.

Algazzali.

al-Gazzali.
Abu al-'Ala'.
Refer from

Alimad ibn 'Abd Allah, Abu al-'Ala', al-Ma'arn.

al-Ma'arri, Abu al-'Ala' Ahmad ibn 'Abd Allah.

C. Enter writers of the Middle Ages, whose works have been trans-
lated into Latin and were widely read in Western Europe, under the
Latin form of their name.

Avicenna, 9807-1037.

Refer from

al-Husain ibn 'Abd Allah, Abu 'AH, called Ibn Sina
Abu *AK al-Husain ibn 'Abd Allah, called Ibn Sina
Ibn Sma, Abu 'All al-Husain ibn 'Abd Allah.
Averroes, 1126-1198.

Refer from
Muhammad ibn Ahmad, Abu al-WaKd, called Ibn Rushd,

114

PERSONAL AUTHORS 64G

Abu al-Walid Muhammad ibn Ahmad, called Ibn Rushd.
Ibn Rushd, Abu al-Walld Muhammad ibn Ahmad, called.

D. Enter modern (after 1900) 30 Mohammedan writers under such
shortened forms of name as they habitually use, surname, followed by
forename, providing, of course, that the second element of the name
is really a family name and not merely an additional name.

Nasr, Yiisuf .
KMri, ShukrL

E. Enter modern Turkish writers under the family name, 31 when
known, and refer from the other names.

Baltacioglu, Ismail Hakki.

. Refer from

Ismail Hakki Baltacioglu.

Hakki Baltacioglu, Ismail.

Prior to the adoption of family names, Turkish names ordinarily
consisted either of a personal name or a personal name in combina-
tion with a distinguishing name (epithet, nickname, name denoting
locality of author's birth or residence, etc.) . When it is impossible to
learn the family name, enter under the distinguishing name whenever
one is used, otherwise under personal name. Refer from the personal
name if it is not the entry.

Kamil, Mehmet.

Refer from
Mehmet Kamil.

F. Enter Arabic names of modern writers who write both in their
native tongue and in a European language, under the European form
or name if it differs considerably, for filing purposes, from the ori-
ental form.

Gibran, Kahlil, 1883-1931.

Refer from
Jibran, Kahlil.

G. The Arabic article "al" 32 (used also in Persian, Turkish, and
other names) is not capitalized, even when it stands at the beginning
of an entry. The article "al" should always be written out in full,
notwithstanding that in actual pronunciation the "a" is elided under

80 "In modern Syria and Egypt, among both Christians and Moslems, a family name
now exists. This may originally have been the given name of a prominent ancestor,
or it arose out of the trade or profession of an ancestor, e.g., Haddad (= Smith), hence
nisbahs often become family names in which case the article is frequently dropped."
A. A. Brux, "The treatment of Arabic proper names/' American journal of Semitic
languages and literatures, v. 47 (1930), no. 1, pt. 2, p. 199 note.

Since 1921, family names have been required in Iran.

31 A Turkish ordinance of Dec. 14, 1934, decreed that the head of every family,
between the dates of Jan. 2, 1935, and July 2, 1936, was to select a name and register
it as a surname of the family. Cf. Resmi gazete, par. 2891, Dec. 27, 1934, p. 4589-4591.

82 In some transliterations written "el" or "ul."

115

64H A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

the influence of a preceding vowel, and the "1" is assimilated with
certain following consonants. In filing, disregard the article when
it occurs initially.

Abu al-'Ala' not Abu'l-'Ala'.

Abu al-Fida' not Abu'1-Fida'.

Muhammad ibn Zakariya, Abii Bakr, al-Rdzi, not ar-Rdzi.

al-Ghazzali not Al-Ghazzali.

EL Give Arabic given names of Biblical origin in their native form,
e.g., Yiisuf, not Joseph; Musa, not Moses; Ibrahim, not Abraham. The
same rule applies to Arabic names borrowed from the Greek, Latin,
etc., e.g., Jirjls, not Georgius; Butrus, not Petrus.

65. Hebrew names.

A. Enter Hebrew and Yiddish writers, up to about the year 1800,
under the given name compounded with the patronymic, the latter
preceded by the word "ben," i.e., "son of." This may be followed by
any other designation referring to place of birth, residence, rank, etc.

Abraham ben Joseph, ha-Levi, of Cracow.
Judah ben Jehiel, catted Messer Leon, fl. 1470.
Refer from

Leon, Messer.

Messer Leon.

Jehuda ben Jechiel, called Messer Leon.

Exceptions are to be made where writers are best known under
their surname.

Abravanel, Isaac, 1437-1508.

Refer from

Isaac ben Judah Abravanel.
Zacuto, Abraham ben Samuel, b. ca. 1450.

Refer from

Zacuth, Abraham ben Samuel.
Abraham ben Samuel Zacuto.

(1) If a writer is known by an initialism, i.e., a combination of the
initials of his personal names and appellatives, refer from this ini-
tialism. It is to be written in capitals with the auxiliary letters in
lower case. 33

Isaac ben Sheshet, 1326-1408.

Refer from

Barf at, Isaac ben Sheshet.
Perfet, Isaac ben Sheshet.
RIBaSH.

If the initialism is as well known as the name, it may be added to
the heading with the word CALLED.

83 This is the practice of the Jewish encyclopedia, not always followed by other
works of reference.

116

PERSONAL AUTHORS 65B

Solomon ben Isaac, called RaSHI, 1040-1105.

Refer from
RaSHI.

(2) The Hebrew article should always be written "ha-" or "he-,"
and should never be capitalized. It is to be disregarded in filing when
it occurs initially.

Judah, ha-Levi, fl. 12th cent.

Refer from
ha-Levi, Judah.

(3) Hebrew authors writing both in Hebrew and Arabic or Persian
should be entered under the Hebrew form of name, if known.

Japheth ben Eli, the Karaite.

Refer from

Yafith ibn AH, the Karaite.
Abu Ali Jephet.
Jephet ibn Ali.

Moses ben Maimon, 1135-1204.

Refer from
Maimonides.

Musa ibn Maimun, Abu Imran.
RaMBaM.

(4) In the case of Arabic surnames and nicknames, the rules given
for Mohammedan names should be observed, and the Arabic article
"al-" should be so written and not capitalized.

al-Harizi, Judah ben Solomon, d. 1235.

Refer from

Alharizi, Judah ben Solomon.
Judah ben Solomon al-Harizi,
Juda Alcharisi ben Saloino.
Charisi, Jehuda ben Salomo.
Jehuda ben Salomon ben Charizi.
Judah ben Solomon Charizi.

(5) Exceptions, however, may be made where a surname, though
originally Arabic, has been spelled generally in the Hebrew manner.

Alshech, Moses.

Refer from
al-Shaikh, Moses.
Moses Alshech.

(6) For Hebrew writers before 1800, given names of Biblical origin
are to be spelled in the form in which they are given in the Authorized
version. Other Hebrew names are to be faithfully transliterated from
the original, e.g., Yom-Tob, Hayyim.

B. Enter Hebrew writers after 1800 under the surname, If the
given name is of Biblical origin, but the bearer consistently uses a
Hebrew or Yiddish form, his usage is to be preferred to the form
in the Authorized version.

117

65BQL) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Shunami, Shlomo not Solomon.
Nadir, Isaac Moishe not Moses.

(1) Enter writers who use a Jewish given name for their Hebrew
or Yiddish works, and a non-Jewish name for their writings in other
languages, under the given name by which they are best known,
preferring the Jewish form in case of doubt. Refer from the name
not used.

Berliner, Abraham, 1833-1915.

Refer from

Berliner, Adolf.

Rogoff, Hillel, 1882-

Refer from
RogofP, Harry.

Jellinek, Adolf, 1821-1893.

Refer from
Jellinek, Aaron.

(2) For Jews who have settled in Palestine and have adopted
Hebrew names there, use the adopted form, and refer from the orig-
inal name.

Jbn-Sahav, Ari, 1899-

Refer from
Goldstein, Leo.

But enter an author under his original name if most of his works
have appeared under that name and he is so known in literature
and history.

66. Japanese names.

Enter Japanese writers under the family name followed by the
given name as in the case of western writers. 34

Miyoshi, Kiyotsura, 847-918.
Noguchi, Hideyo, 1876-1928.

Exception is made in favor of entry under pseudonym, nickname,
or other assumed name when such name has become more firmly
established in literature and history than the real name.

Jippensha Ikku, 17757-1831.

[Here the "literary name" a phrase, is the one by which this artist
and writer is best known]
Refer from

"The application of the rule to modern Japanese names is comparatively simple
since, by a law promulgated in 1870, each person is required to have a surname and
a forename. Before that time, however, family names were borne only by court
nobles, the military class, and specially privileged members of the lower classes.
Others were restricted to personal names, or personal names 'combined with place or
trade names. Names were frequently changed and pseudonyms were freely used by
writers, actors, artists, etc. These pseudonyms were often passed on to a favorite
pupil and a new pseudonym adopted. Noguchi Yonejiro in his book, Katsushika
Hokusai, lists 53 pseudonyms used by the artist best known to the western world as
Hokusai. .These earlier names must in many cases, be established each on its own
merits, with the aid of the best authorities available.

118

PERSONAL AUTHORS 67

Shigeta, Teiichi.

[his legal name]
Chikamatsu, Yoshichi.

[the name he assumed as a playwright]
Hokusai, 1760-1849.

.Refer from
Katsushika, litsu.

[his legal name]
Katsushika, Hokusai.
Katsukawa, Shunro.
Hishikawa, Sori.

[These are the better-known forms of name by which Hokusai was
known. .Reference may be made from other uames if desired]

67. Chinese names.

Enter a Chinese writer under the family name, separated from the
given names by a comma. The given names are hyphenated and the
first only is capitalized.

Chinese surnames date from approximately 3000 B.C. As among
other peoples with whom surnames were a later development, they
were derived from place of origin, or domicile, occupation, hereditary
title, etc.

Every Chinese rightfully has three names, a family name and two
given names. Of these given names, the first, as a rule, indicates the
generation and is common to all members of a family belonging to the
same generation. The second is the personal name. Each individual
may have also one or more courtesy names selected by himself or
given to him by another. He may, in addition, have one or more
pseudonyms and in some cases a posthumous appellative. 85

Wang, An-shih, 1021-1086.
Li, Shao-keng, 1897-

The courtesy name is not used officially and does not appear in the
heading except occasionally in the case of distinguished personages
who have come to be generally known by that name rather than by
their real name, in which case it takes the place of the given names,
and reference is made from any other names, real or assumed, by which
the person is known. For entry of Chinese emperors see 55D.

Sun, Yat-sen, 1866-1925.

Refer from
Sun, Wen.
Sun, Chung-shan.
Sun, I-hsien.

[Yat-seu (or, I-hsien) the name by which he is best known, as-
sumed by him while in college; Wen, a name, also assumed later
in life, which he used for official purposes; Chung-shan, the
Chinese equivalent of Nayakami, a name he assumed while
living in disguise in Japan, and which became his posthumous
appellative. His given names, variously cited as Tai Chu, Tai
Cheong } Tai Tseung, were not used by him after his boyhood]

35 Cf. Kiang Kang-hu, On Chinese studies (Shanghai, Commercial Press, 1934);
Encyclopaedia sinica (Shanghai, Kelly & Walsh, 1917); British Museum. Dept. of
Oriental Printed Books, Catalogue of Chinese printed books (London, Longmans,
1877). As authority for Chinese surnames, cf. H. A. Giles, "A list of Chinese sur-
names," in his A Chinese -English dictionary (2d ed.; Shanghai, Kelly & Walsh, 1912),
v. 1, tables, p. 1-8.

119

67A A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Kiang, Kang-hu, 1883-

Refer from
Kiang, Shao-ch'iian.
Chiang, K c ang-hu.

[Kang-hu, courtesy name selected by himself and used on the
title-pages of his later works; Shao, generation name; Ch'iian,
personal name]

The names should, as far as possible, be given in the standard roman-
ization, including indication of aspiration ('), of the Wade system
(used by Giles in his Chinese-English dictionary) with reference
from any variant forms (including non-Chinese names) .

Chang, Chung-lin.

Refer from -
Tchang, Tchung-lin.

Lin, Ch'i-imng, 1889-

Refer from
Lynn, Jermyn Chi-hung.

A. On the title pages of western publications, Chinese names some-
times occur in the normal Chinese order, i.e., family name followed
by given, names, and sometimes in the western order. If there is any
doubt as to which part of the name is the family name, refer from
the part not used as entry word.

Ma, Heng, 1880-

The fifteen different classes of measures as given in the Lu li
chih of the Sui dynasty, by Ma Heng . . .
Refer from

Heng, Ma.
Feng, Han-chi, 1902-

The Chinese kinship system . . . c byj Han Yi Feng . . .
Refer from

Feng, Han-yi.

Han Yi Feng.

B. Chinese names for which particular forms have become firmly
established in western literature are to be entered under these forms
with reference from the original.

Confucius.

Refer from
Kong-Kew.
Kung Fu-tze.
K'ung, Ch'iu.

68* Annamese names. 30

Enter Annamese writers under their names, in full, without in-
version, in the normal Annamese order. Connect the three names by
hyphens and lower case the middle word, or name. Refer from the

"For an explanation of Annamese names, the following works may be consulted:
Tran-van-Trai, La famille patrictrcale annamite (Paris, 1942), p. r276i-281* Varietfo
tonkinoises (Hanoi, 1903), p. 122-123.

120

PERSONAL AUTHORS 69A

third name. Enter under the first name and refer from the second
when the name consists of only two words.

Usually Annamese names consist of three characters, or words,
with the family, or clan, name given first. The second name is an
intercalary word indicating sex, place in family (i.e., third son, second
daughter); rank (i.e., duke (cong), baron (ba)), etc. The third
word is the given name.

Among the most common family names are Nguyen, Tran, Le, Ly,
Pham, Phan, Lam, and Luong. Of the intercalary words the two
denoting sex are the most commonly used (i.e., t;cw for the males and
thi for the females) . Of the given names those most frequently used
are Vang, Ngoc, Nga, Cue, and Huong.

Tran-van-Trai.

Eefer from
Trai, Tran-van-
Nguyen-xuan-Nguyen.

Rejer from

Nguyen, Nguyen-xuan-
Do-Than.

Refer from
Than, Do-

69. Burmese and Karen names.

A. Enter Burmese writers under their names in full, without inver-
sion, in the normal Burmese order, followed by the term of address.

Burmese do not have family names. Their names consist of one,
two, or in some rare cases, three words, preceded by a term of address
or a title. The term of address is inseparable from the name and
must be retained. For Burmese men the terms of address are Maung
(abbr. Mg. or M.), Ko or 17 the latter being used to designate men
of prominence, high social position, professional standing, or age. For
the women the terms of address are Ma or Daw the latter correspond-
ing in meaning to U. In some cases the term of address may be a
word which is identical with one of the words constituting the name.
Reference should always be made from parts of name not used as
the entry word.

On Kin, U.

Refer from
Kin, U On.
Kin, On.
U On Kin.
Ba U, U.

Refer from
U, U Ba.
UBaU.
U Shan Maung, Maung.

Refer from

Maung, Maung U Shan.
Maung U Shan Maung.

121

69B _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Mya Sein, Daw.

Refer from
Sein, Daw Mya.
Daw Mya Sein.

B. Enter under the latest form of name, with reference from the
other names, a Burmese who has changed his name, either completely,
or by adding parts to a former name. This change of name, permissible
in Burma, seldom occurs after a writer has become well known. The
new name is not a pseudonym, it becomes the real name of the writer.

Pe Maung, Maung. {name used to about

Tin, Maung. iname used between 1911 and 1921i

Pe Maung Tin, U. t name used since about 1921]

C. Enter under the name, or names, in full, without inversion, in
the normal Burmese order, followed by the title, those Burmese in the
professional groups or those holding high government positions, who
have titles added to their names. In some cases the title is substituted
for the term of address; in others both are retained. Refer from the
parts not used as entry word. The most common of these titles in-
clude: say a (a man skilled in any art or science) , sayadaw (a Buddhist
monk of rank) , bhikkhu (a Buddhist mendicant) and thakin (a mem-
ber of the Thakin political party) .

Silacara, bhikkhu.

Refer from
Bhikkhu Silacara.
Sakkapala, sayadaw U.

Refer from

U Sakkapala, sayadaw.
Sayadaw U Sakkapala.
Po E, saya U.

Refer from
U Po E, saya.
Saya U Po E.
E, Saya U Po.
E, Po.

D. Enter Karen names in the same manner as Burmese, since they
follow the same general pattern as Burmese names, and refer from
parts not used as entry word. Karen names differ, however, from
Burmese in that there is only one term of address for the men (i.e.,
Saw) and one for the women (i.e., Naw). Care should be exercised
not to confuse Saw, the Karen term of address (corresponding to
Burmese 17) with the Saw used as part of a Burmese name.

Pwa Sein, Naw.
Refer from
Sein, Naw Pwa.
Naw Pwa Sein.
Sein, Pwa.

Chit Maung, Saw. { Karen name,
Refer from

122

PERSONAL AUTHORS 70B

Mating, Saw Chit.
Saw Chit Maung.
Maung, Chit.
Saw, U. [Burmese name;,

Refer from
USaw.

Enter under the names, in full, without inversion, in the normal
Karen order, with references from parts not used as entry word, those
Karens who have incorporated western names as part of their names.

Moses Dwe, Saw.

San Crombie Po, Sir.

Joseph Maung Gyi, Sir.

Katie Kaing, Naw.

Among the Karens the most common title is thra (corresponding
to the Burmese saya, i.e., a man skilled in any art or science) .

San Baw, thra.
70. Indie names.

A. Enter Indie writers prior to the middle of the nineteenth cen-
tury tinder the personal name (usually the first) and refer from the
family name or surname (usually the third). When there are only
two names refer from the second. 37

Ramamohana Raya, Raja, 17747-1833.

Refer from
Raya, Ramamohana.
Ram Mohun Roy.
Roy, Ram Mohun.
Rammohun Roy.
Roy, Rammohun.

Isvara Kaula, 1833-1893.

Refer from
Isvarakaula.
Kaula, Isvara.
I$vara-kaula.

B. Where family names have been adopted according to western
usage, enter under the family name, preferring the transliterated
form adopted by the author when he has consistently used a form
differing from the generally accepted transliteration. 88 Refer from
variant forms and from parts of name not chosen as entry word.

Indie names present many difficulties to the cataloger, due in part
to different usage in the various linguistic areas of India, in part to
the widely varying transliterated forms in which the name may ap-
pear, and also to the great freedom exercised by the individual in

w This is the general practice of the British Museum in its various catalogs of Indie
literature.

88 This system of transliteration appears in the Journal of the Bombay Branch of
the Royal Asiatic Society. Since April, 1944, the Library of Congress has used this
transliteration with the exception of the anusvara, and anunasika, both of which are
transliterated by m, and the use of ri for the RAS's r.

123

70B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

his treatment of his own name. Hence whatever form of the name is
selected as heading, the importance of adequate references cannot be
overemphasized.

Bose, Chunilal, rai bahadur, 1861-
Refer from

Chunilal Bose.

Chunilal Vasu.

Vasu, Chunilal.

Basu, Chuni Lai.

Chuni Lai Bose.
Mookerji, Radha Kumud, 1884-
Refer from

Radha Kumud Mookerji.

Radhakumuda Mukhopadhyaya.

Mukhopadhyaya, Radhakumuda.

Mukerjee, Radha Kumud.

Mukharji, Radha Kumud.
Mukerjee, Kadhakamal, 1889-

tbrother of the preceding^
Refer from

Radha Kamal Mukerjee.

Radhakamala Mukhopadhyaya.

Mukhopadhyaya, Radhakamala.

Mookerji, Radha Kamal.

The following rule (1212) from S. R, Ranganathan, Classified cata-
logue code (Madras, Madras Library Association, 1934) , together with
some of the discussion which accompanies it, is quoted here as an
aid to the understanding and treatment of Indie names:

In the case of modern Hindu names, the last substantive word in
the name is to be written first and all the earlier words and initials are
to be added thereafter; except that, in the case of South Indian names
if the last substantive word merely indicates caste or community and
the penultimate word is given in full on the title page; the two last
substantive words are both to be written first in their natural order.

The substantive words in a modern Hindu name may represent one
or more of the following:

(1) the personal name of the person;

(2) the personal name of the father of the person;

(3) the name of a place, usually of birth or of ancestral residence:
and

(4) the patronymic name denoting the caste or the profession, or
any religious, academic, military or other distinction or place
of residence or birth, of an ancestor.

These words do not occur in the same order in all cases.
About the middle of the nineteenth century a tendency appeared
among the Hindus of North India and West India to assimilate their
names to the English forms of Christian name and surname, by adopt-
ing the patronymic name as the surname and making the other words
in the name answer to Christian names.

In Western India, the patronymic name is usually preceded by two
names. The first name is the personal name and the second name is
the personal name of the father e.g. in Mohandas Karamchand
Gandhi, Mohandas is the personal name of Mahatma Gandhi, Karam-
chand is his father's personal name and Gandhi is his patronymic name.
Till about the middle of the nineteenth century, it was not the prac-
tice to give prominence to the third name. The second name also was

124

PERSONAL AUTHORS 70B

not much used, except for purposes of distinguishing two or more
persons having the same personal name. But now the fashion is to give
prominence to the third name and to relegate the first two names to
the status of initials.

In Bengal, the caste-name is usually preceded by a personal name
originally treated as a single word. This single word is now, in most
cases, split up into two words to be used as if they are two distinct
Christian names, e.g. Ramamohan Roy has come to be written as Ram
Mohan Roy; Rameshacandra Dutt, as Romesh Cunder Dutt: Citta-
ranjan Das, as C. R. Das. It has also to be stated that certain caste-
names occur as double words, e.g. Rai Mahassi, Roy Choudhuri.

' J j p outlx Jndia . . . except in a few very recent, cases, the
word denoting caste or having some patronymic significance is sub-
ordinated to the personal name, though it is either written after it in
full as a separate word or compounded with the personal name so as
to form a single word, but it is never contracted to initials. Some also
omit it altogether. In the case in which it is omitted or assimilated
with the personal name, the last word in the name is the personal
name; otherwise, the penultimate word is the personal name. The word
representing the personal name is usually preceded by one or two
words. What the words represent would depend upon the part of South
India to which the person belongs.

For titular or descriptive words in Indian names see S. R. Ran-
ganathan, "A list of the more common South Indian words indicating
caste or community," op. cit, p. 68-70; and K. A. Linderfelt, "List of
Oriental titles and occupations with their significance," in his Eclectic
card catalog rules (Boston, Cutter, 1890) , p. 76-97.

Roy Chowdhury, Brajendra Kishore.

ccaste namej
Refer from

Chowdhury, Brajendra Kishore Roy.
Brajendra Kishore Roy Chowdhury.
Vrajendra-kiora Raya-chaudhurL
Gopalaswami Ayyangar, Sir Narasimha, diwan bahadur, 1882-

tpatronymic and caste names^
Refer from

Ayyangar, Sir Narasimha Gopalaswami.
Narasimha Gopalaswami Ayyangar, Sir, diwan bdhadur.
Aiyangar, Sir Narasimha Gopalaswami.
lyengar, Sir Narasimha Gopalaswami.
Gopalaswami lyengar, Sir Narasimha.
Gopalswamy lyengar, Sir Narasimha.

Aggarwal, Om Prakash, rai sahib, 1905-

L name derived from community]
Refer from

Om-praka?a Agarvala.
Om Parkash, Lala.
Prakash Aggarwal, Om.
Agarwala, Om Prakash.

Shastri, Gaurinath Bhattacharyya.

cacodemic title used as surname^
Refer from

Bhattacharyya, Gaurinath, sastri.
Gaurinath Bhattacharyya Shastri.
Bhattacharjee, Gouri Nath.
Bhattacharji, Gauri Nath.
Gauri Nath Bhattacharjee, sastri.

125

III. Corporate Bodies as
Authors 1

71. General rule and specification.

Governments and their agencies, societies, institutions, firms, con-
ferences, etc., are to be regarded as the authors of publications for
which they, as corporate bodies, are responsible. Such material as
official publications of governments; proceedings and reports of so-
cieties; official catalogs of libraries and museums; reports of institu-
tions, firms, conferences, and other bodies is entered under the heading
for the corporate body, even though the name of the individual pre-
paring it is given.

Monographic works by individual officials, officers, members and
employees of corporate bodies, when these works are not clearly ad-
ministrative or routine in character, are preferably to be entered
under personal author, even though issued by the corporate body
(Cf. 73C, 75C-D, 84C-D, 89C, E, H, 90A-B, 118A.) -

Periodicals (as defined in the GLOSSARY) are entered according to
the general rule (5C) even though issued by governments, societies
or institutions.

Government Publications 2

72. General rule.

Enter under countries or nations, states, cities, towns, and other
government districts, official publications issued by them or by their
authority.

France.

. . . Mandates. Communication from the French Government.

Great Britain.

Burma, statement of policy by His Majesty's Government.

For form of entry see IV. GEOGRAPHIC HEADINGS, especially 154.
A. Enter publications emanating from the various agencies of
government under the names of the ^^ciesjlegislative bodies, courts,

(4th ed,

., 1904) , p. 39-41.

ff B 19) ildS> AUthOT mtry iW 9 ot)ernment Plications (Washington,
126

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 72A(1)

executive departments, bureaus, etc.) as subheadings (under country,
or other jurisdiction) in the latest form in the vernacular. 3 Refer from
variant forms.

Breslau. Statistisches Amt.

China. Inspectorate General of Customs.

Refer from

China. Customs, Inspectorate General of.
Finland. Lantdagen, 1809-1906. Ridderskapet och adeln.

Refer from

Finland. Ritaristo ja aateli.
Finland. Ridderskapet och adeln.
Mexico. Departamento del Trabajo.

Refer from

Mexico. Trabajo, Departamento del.
New York (County) Board of Supervisors.

Refer from

New York (County) Supervisors, Board of.
New York (State) Dcpt. of Excise.

Refer from
New York (State) Excise, Dept. of.

(1) Use for a subheading the name of the office rather than the
title of the officer except where the title of the officer is the only
name of the office.

U. S. Office of Education not U. S. Commissioner of Education.
but

Canada. Fuel Controller.

Illinois. State Entomologist.

Pennsylvania. Secretary of the Commonwealth.

Make whenever necessary a reference from the name of the head of
a department to the name of the office.

Exception. Certain classes of institutions and other bodies created,
maintained, controlled or owned by governments, but not direct
agencies of government are, however, to be treated according to the
rules governing these bodies as authors, e.g., colleges, universities,
schools, libraries, museums, galleries, observatories, agricultural ex-
periment stations, hospitals, asylums, prisons, theaters, chambers of
commerce, botanical and zoological gardens, banks, business corpora-
tions, churches, societies, etc. 4 (Cf . 91-149.)

3 For governments having more than one official language, prefer English if it is one
of the official languages, e.g., Canada. The departments, bureaus, etc., of Finland may
preferably be entered under the Swedish form of name, with reference from the
Finnish form. Those of Switzerland are entered under the German form with refer-
ence from the French and Italian forms. For governments not using officially a
Roman, Greek, or Slavic alphabet, prefer an English form of name.

*The Library of Congress does not extend this exception to institutions of the
United States government. The headings for these are established according to the
regular rules for government agencies, e.g.,

XJ. S. Army War College, Washington, D. C.
not Washington* D. C. Army War College.

"U. S. Navy Yard, Boston
not Boston. Navy Yard.

127

72B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

B. Enter official gazettes directly under government without sub-
division. Make added entry under title. Occasional exception may be
made for entry under title when the publication has had separate
existence as a newspaper or periodical (cf. 5C.), or has only semi-
official standing as a gazette. In accordance with the practice in cata-
loging periodicals, make cross references for changes of title.

France.

Journal official de la Republique frangaise.

Mexico.

. . . Gaceta diaria de Mexico . . .

73. Sovereigns, presidents, governors, etc.

A. Enter collections of messages to legislative bodies, proclama-
tions, executive orders, and similar documents of sovereigns, presi-
dents, governors, etc., covering more than one administration, under
the name of the country or other jurisdiction, followed by the name
of the office. Make added entry for editors.

U. S. President.

. . . Inaugural addresses of the presidents of the United States
. . . edited by John Vance Cheney.

I. Cheney, John Vance, 1848-1922, ed.

U. S. President.

Presidential messages and state papers; being the epoch-
marking national documents of all the presidents from George
Washington to Woodrow Wilson . . . edited by Julius W
Muller ...

i. Muller, Julius Washington, 1867- ed.

Gt. Brit. Sovereigns, etc.

. . . British royal proclamations relating to America, 1603-1783.
Edited by Clarence S. Brigham, A. M.

i. Brigham, Clarence Saunders, 1877- ed.

New York (State) Governor.
The executive budget . . .

New York (City) Mayor.
Message of the mayor to the Common Council . . .

B. For single messages to legislative bodies, proclamations, execu-
tive orders, etc., include in the heading the inclusive years of the ad-
ministration or reign and, in parentheses, the name of the incumbent.
Refer from the name of the incumbent.

Gt. Brit. Sovereigns, etc., 2702-1714 (Anne)

A proclamation of Queen Anne for settling and ascertaining
the current rates of foreign coins in America . . .

Refer from Anne, Queen of Great Britain, 1665-1714.

128

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 73C

Gt. Brit. Sovereigns, etc., 1558-1603 (Elizabeth)
Queene Elizabeth's speech to her last Parliament
Refer from Elizabeth, Queen of England, 1533-1603.

France. Sovereigns, etc., 1643-1715 (Louis XIV)

Declaration du Roy, sur le tarif des droils pour les ports de
lettres ...

Refer from Louis xiv, King of France, 1638-1715.

U. S. President, 1913-1920 (Wilson)

Executive order of President Wilson establishing defensive sea
areas and regulations for carrying same into effect.

Refer from Wilson, Woodrow, Pres. U. S., 1856-1924.

U. S. President, 1933-1945 (Franklin D. Roosevelt)

. . . Federal Communications Commission. Message of the
President of the United States recommending that Congress
create a new agency to be known as the Federal Communica-
tions Commission . , .

Refer from Roosevelt, Franklin Delano, Pres. U. S., 1882-
1945.

Uruguay. Presidente, 1897-1903 (Cuestas)

Manifesto de S. E. el senor presidente provisional de la Re-
publica O. del Uruguay don Juan L. Cuestas dirigida al pais, a
nacionales y extrangeros.

Refer from Cuestas, Juan Lindolfo, Pres. Uruguay, 1837-
1905.

New York (State) Governor, 1933-1942 (Lehman)

. . . Special message of the Governor to the Legislature. Rec-
ommendations for the improvement of criminal law enforcement.
Refer from Lehman, Herbert Henry, 1878-

Boston. Mayor, 1834-1835 (Lyman)

Communication to the City Council, on the subject of intro-
ducing water into the city. Printed by order of the Common
Council.

Refer from Lyman, Theodore, 1792-1849.

C. Enter other single addresses and collected editions of the papers
of a single sovereign, president, governor, etc., under the individual
as author.

Roosevelt, Theodore, Pres. U. 5., 1858-1919.

Address of President Roosevelt to the Deep Waterways Con-
vention, Memphis, Tennessee, October 4, 1907.

Refer from U. S. President, 1901-1909 (Roosevelt)

Wilson, Woodrow, Pres. U. S., 1856-1924.

Address of President Wilson delivered at Mount Vernon, July
4, 1918.

Refer from U. S. President, 1913-1923 (Wilson,)

George V, King of Great Britain, 1865-1936.

The King to his people; being the speeches and messages of
His Majesty King George the Fifth delivered between July 1911
and May 1935.

I. Gt. Brit. Sovereigns, etc., 1910-1936 (George v)

129

73D A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Irigoyen, Hipolito, Pres. Argentine Republic, 1852-1933.

Discursos, escritos y polemicas del Dr. Hipolito Yrigoyen,
1878-1922 ...

Refer from Argentine Republic. Presidente, 1916-1922
(Irigoyeri)

Hoover, Herbert Clark, Pres. U. S., 1874-

The state papers and other public writings of Herbert Hoover,
collected and edited by William Starr Myers . . .

I. U. S. President, 1929-1933 (Hoover) n. Myers, William Starr, 1877-

D. Enter the publications of officials or official bodies having gov-
erning power over a colony, protectorate, territory, etc., with or with-
out a degree of autonomy, under the name of the territory over which
they have jurisdiction, rather than under the name of the country
to whose sovereignty they are subject. Use the title of the official
or the name of the office as subheading.

Morocco (Spanish zone) Aha Comisaria de Espana.

District of Columbia. Commissioners.

Canada. Governor-general.

Maranhao, Brazil (State) Interventoria Federal.

Enter similarly the publications of officials or bodies governing
occupied territory.

Cuba. Military Governor.

Jersey. Mttitarischer Befehlshaber.

Netherlands (Territory under German occupation, 1940-1945)

EeicksJcommissar fur die Besetzten Niederldndischen Gebiete.
France (Territory under German occupation, 1940-1944) Chef

der Militdrverwaltung in Frankreich.
Germany (Territory under Allied occupation, 1945- U. S.

Zone) Military Governor.

74. Legislative bodies.

Enter the proceedings of sessions, debates, reports, etc. (but not
"acts" or laws) , of legislative bodies under the name of the govern-
ment with the name of the body as subheading, subdivided as needed
by date of session and/or branch, committee, or other subordinate
entity. In the case of the United States Congress, when dates are
given, give also the number of the congress and the session.

Gt. Brit. Parliament.

Gt Brit Parliament. Joint Select Committee on Nationality of

Married Women. y }

Gt. Brit. Parliament, 1766.
Gt Brit. Parliament, 1766. House of Commons.
Gt. Brit. Parliament, 1766. House of Lords.
Gt Brit. Parliament. House of Commons. Select Committee on

r inance.

New York (State) Legislature.
New York (State) Legislature. Joint Committee on Banking and

investment Trusts.
New York (State) Legislature. 1908. Senate.

130

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 75B

New York (State) Legislature. Senate. Committee on Finance.
U. b. Congress.

S" I" C9 ress - / oint Committee cm Internal Bevenue Taxation.

U. S. 2d Cong., 1st sess., 1791-1792.

U. S. 52d Cong., 2d sess., 1892-1893. House

U. S. Congress. House.

U. S. Congress. House. Committee on Labor.

U. S. Congress. Senate. Library.

75. Executive departments, etc.

Enter executive departments, ministries and secretariats as sub-
headings under the country or other jurisdiction.

U. S. Dept. of the Interior.

Refer from
U. S. Interior, Dept. of the. 5

Argentine Republic. Ministerio de Guerra.

Refer from
Argentine Republic. Guerra, Ministerio de.

A. Bureaus or offices subordinate to a department. Enter bureaus
or offices subordinate to an executive department, ministry or secre-
tariat directly under the name of the jurisdiction, not as a subheading
under the department, ministry or secretariat.

U. S. Bureau of Insular Affairs.

Refer from

II S. Insular Affairs, Bureau of.
U. S. War Dept. Bureau of Insular Affairs.

Italy. Direzione generale dei telegrafi.

Refer from

Italy. Telegrafi, Direzione generale dei.
Italy. Ministero dei lavori pubblici. Direzione generale dei

telegrafi.

When, however, the bureau or office does not have a distinctive
name so that one of the same name might exist in another department,
enter under the department with a reference from the bureau.

U. S. War Dept. Bureau of Public Relations.

U. S. Treasury Dept. Bureau of Accounts.

U. S. Interstate Commerce Commission. Bureau of Accounts.

B. Divisions and other units. Divisions, regional offices and other
units of departments, bureaus, commissions, etc., subordinate to these
departments, bureaus, commissions, etc., are usually entered, if re-
quired, as subheadings to the departments, bureaus, commissions, etc.

U. S. Dept. of Agriculture. Division of Botany.

U. S. Bureau of Animal Husbandry. Dairy Division.

V. S. National Resources Planning Board. Region 8.

5 Many libraries use such subheadings in the inverted form (e.g., U. S. Interior,
Dept. of the) or obtain the same arrangement by underlining the key word.

131

75C A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

C. Reports, papers, etc., by an official.

(1) Enter under the department or other government agency ad-
ministrative reports which are prepared by an official as a part of his
routine duty. No added entry need be made under the name of an
official for a report strictly administrative in character.

Massachusetts. Secretary of the Commonwealth.

Instructions relative to the registry and return of births, mar-
riages and deaths in Massachusetts. By Francis DeWitt, secretary
of the Commonwealth.

Oregon. Insurance Dept.

Fire prevention bulletin, 1915. By Harvey Wells, state insur-
ance commissioner.

Oregon. Secretary of State.

. . . Constitutional provisions and statutes related to incor-
porated cities and towns . . . Compiled by Hal E. Ross, secretary
of state.

(2) Enter under personal author 6 scientific papers, addresses, and
other publications, not administrative or routine in character, but
which are issued officially by the department to which the author is
attached. Make added entry under the department.

Lamont, Robert Patterson, 1867-

. . . Unemployment and business stability. An address by
Secretary of Commerce Robert P. Lamont before the Chamber
of Commerce of the United States.

At head of title: U. S. Department of Commerce.

I. U. S. Dept. of Commerce, n. Title.

Hoover, Herbert Clark, Pres. U. S., 1874-

. . . The future of our foreign trade, by Herbert Hoover,
Secretary of Commerce. An address given at a dinner in New
York City.

At head of title: Department of Commerce. Bureau of Foreign and
Domestic Commerce. Washington.
I, IT. S. Bureau of Foreign and Domestic Commerce, n. Title.

Veiller, Lawrence Turnure,

Tenement house legislation in New York, 1852-1900. Prepared
for the Tenement House Commission of 1900. By Lawrence
Veiller, secretary . . .

r. New York (State) Tenement House Commission.

D. Reports not by an official. Enter under the writer reports made
to a department or other government agency by a person who is not
an official, with added entry under the department or agency.

Hubert, Ernest Everett, 1887-

. . . Sap stains of wood and their prevention, by Ernest E.
Hubert, professor of forestry, School of Forestry, University of

6 The Library of Congress usually enters under personal author papers which ap-
pear in a series which has been entered under an official heading.

132

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 76B

Idaho. Tenth report of a series on the marketing and use of
lumber ...

At head of title: United States Department of Commerce. Wood
utilization.

i. U. S. Dept. of Commerce. 11. Title.

E. Collection or series of reports. Enter a collection or series of
reports to a department, by different persons, under the department.
If the importance or manner of publication of the single reports war-
rants it, make an added entry or analytical entry for each under the
author's name, even if he is an official.

U. S. Geological Survey.

. . . Reconnaissances in the Cape Nome and Norton Bay re-
gions, Alaska, in 1900, by Alfred H. Brooks, George B. Richard-
son, Arthur J. Collier and Walter C. Mendenhall Washington,
Govt. Print. Off., 1901.

i. Brooks, Alfred Hulse, 1871-1924. n. Collier, Arthur James, 1866-
m. Mendenhall, Walter Curran, 1871- iv. Richardson, George Burr
1872-

76. Armies, navies, etc.

A. Enter reports of operations, orders, circulars, proclamations,
dispatches, etc., emanating from armies, navies, marine corps, etc.,
under the country, with the name of the body as subheading in the
vernacular.

U. S. Army.

U. S. Navy.

U. S. Marine Corps.

France. Armee.

Germany. Heer.

Mexico.

B. Enter military units of armies or navies (such as commands,
armies, corps, divisions, regiments, artillery and infantry) as subdi-
visions of the army, navy, etc., in the vernacular. Refer from any
popular name,

U. S. Army. Antiaircraft Command.

Gt. Brit. Navy. Sea Cadet Corps.

U. S. Navy. 7th Amphibious Force.

Gt. Brit. Army. Royal Gloucestershire Hussars.

Germany. Heer. Panzer-Division Nr. 11.

France. Armee. Artillerie.

However, enter subdivisions of armies, navies, etc., which have
names beginning with the- name, or an adjective derived from the
name, of the army, navy, etc., directly under the country. Refer from
the indirect form.

U. S. Naval Air Transport Service.

Refer from

U. S. Navy. Naval Air Transport Service.
Canada. Army Medical Corps.

Refer from
Canada. Army. Army Medical Corps.

133

76B(1) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(1) In headings for the Army of the United States, and of Great
Britain and her dominions designate Armies by number spelled out,
corps by roman numerals, and divisions by arabic numerals.

U. S. Army. First Army.

U. S. Army. IV Corps.

Gt. Brit. Army. 7th Division.

(2) In the headings for the Army of the United States, and of
Great Britain and her dominions, enter regiments designated only by
number within the various services (cavalry, infantry, etc.) under
number, followed by the name of the service. The word regiment
is not included in the heading. For other units (battalions, brigades,
etc.) include the distinguishing word.

U. S. Army. 27th Cavalry.

U. S. Army. 101st Cavalry Group.

(3) In the present organization of the U. S. Army the regiments are
numbered consecutively within each arm of the service. Besides the
regular army regiments there were regiments of Negro troops and
sharpshooters during the Civil War and volunteer regiments during
the Spanish-American War. As the numbering of such regiments
may duplicate that of the regular army a distinguishing word is added
in the heading.

U. S. Army. 1st Cavalry. r regular armyj

U. S. Army. 1st Cavalry (Colored) [Civil Warj

U. S. Army. 1st Cavalry (Volunteer) tSpanish-American Wat)

U. S. Army. 2d Infantry.

U. S, Army. 2d Infantry (Colored)

U. S. Army. 2d Infantry (Sharpshooters)

C. Military units which are not a part of the U. S. Army but
were a part of the army conscripted by the states through the Civil
War period are entered under the name of the state followed by the
name of the unit. This heading is subdivided in the same manner as
the present U. S. Army, except that dates of muster and discharge
are added when possible. The greater number of such units are dis-
tinguished by ordinal numbers only. Those having distinctive names
are treated in the same way as those known by ordinal numbers. Refer
from popular names.

Delaware Infantry. 1st Regt, 1776-1783.
Tennessee Cavalry. 2d Regt., 1862-1865.
New York Infantry. 8th Regt., 1861-1863.
Refer from

New York Infantry. Blenker's Rifles.

Blenker's Rifles.

Illinois Infantry. United States Zouave Cadets, 1859-1860.

Refer from
United States Zouave Cadets of Chicago.

134

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

80A

77. State Guards and National Guard (U. S.).

A. Enter the State Guard of each state or territory of the United
States under the name of the state or territory to which it belongs.

Wisconsin. State Guard.
Puerto Rico. State Guard.

B. Enter the National Guard of the United States, a military force
maintained jointly by the several states and by the U. S. government,
under the name of the state or territory in which it is organized.

Louisiana. National Guard.
Puerto Rico. National Guard.

During the two world wars the guard was drafted into the regular
Army of the U. S., and was known by regular army designation.
Previously, when the army was supplemented by a volunteer army
conscripted by the states, many of the National Guard units became
a part of the state organization and were known by the name of the
state. (Cf. 76C.)

78. Embassies, legations, consulates, etc.

Enter publications emanating from embassies, consulates, etc., under
the nation represented followed by the name of the representing body.
Include in the heading for embassies and legations the names of the
countries to which they are assigned; for consulates, the names of the
cities in which they are located.

Australia. High Commissioner in London.
France. Consulat. Buenos Aires.
Germany. Gesandtschajt. Switzerland.
Gt. Brit. Consulate. Cairo.
Gt. Brit Embassy. U. S.
Gt. Brit. Legation. China.
U. S. Consulate. Amsterdam.
U. S. Legation. Sweden.

79. Delegation, delegates, delegate.

Enter a delegation, delegates or delegate officially representing a
country at a conference or congress, under the name of the conference
or congress with a subheading for the delegation. The subheading
will consist of the phrase "Delegation from [Country]" unless the name
of the conference or congress^is not in English; the corresponding
phrase in the language of the heading will then be used.

International American Conference. 1st, Washington, D. C. 3

1889-1890. Delegation from Haiti.
International Economic Conference, Geneva,, 1927. Delegation

from the United States.

80. Archives.

A. Enter national, state, provincial, municipal, diocesan, parish and
other local archives under the name of the country, state, city, diocese,
etc., with the name of the archive as subheading. Add the name of
the place where located, when necessary for clearness or distinction.

135

SOB A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

France. Archives nationales.
Portugal. Arquivo Nacionnl.
Netherlands (Kingdom, 1815- ) Rijks Archief in Drenthe,

Assen.

Aube, France (Dept.) Archives.
Augsburg, Stadtarchiv.
U. S. National Archives.

B. Enter archives of particular government departments as follows:

(1) Under the name of the country followed by the name of the
archive, when the archive has a name of its own,

France. Archives de la guerre.

Refer from
France. Ministers de la guerre. Archives.

(2) Under the name of the ministry, department or bureau with
the addition of the subheading ARCHIVES, when the archive does not
have an independent name.

France. Ministers des travaux publics. Archives.

C. Enter institutional, society, and family archives under institu-
tion, society, or family, with a subheading consisting either of the
name of the archive or the word ARCHIVES.

Harvard University. Archives.

81. Government commissions and committees.

A. Enter reports and recommendations of official commissions and
committees, whether permanent or temporary, under the name of the
country or other jurisdiction, with the name of the commission or com-
mittee as a subheading, directly under country or under the appoint-
ing department, legislative body, etc. (Cf. 74.) Refer from the name
of the commission or committee.

U. S. Commission to Study the Proposed Highway to Alaska.
U. S. Interstate Commerce Commission.
U. S. Committee on Economic Security.
Gt. Brit. Royal Commission on Local Taxation.
France. Commission des affaires coloniales.
France, Comite d r organisation du travail des metaux.
U. S. Children's Bureau. National Commission on Children in
Wartime.

B. Enter an official commission to an exposition or exhibition tinder
the name of the country sending it with the name of the commission
as subheading. If the commission is mentioned only in general terms
without an official name, use a subheading in the vernacular consist-
ing of (1) the term signifying the commission, (2) the name of the
exposition, (3) the place if it does not appear in the name, (4) the
date of the exposition.

Austria. Central-Commission, Weltausstellung in Chicago, 1893.
France, Commission, Exposition international de Chicago, 1893.

136

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 84

Germany. Reichskommission, Weltausstellung in Chicago, 1893.
New Jersey. Commission, Jamestown Exposition, 1907.
Bolivia. Comision National, Exposition International Panama-
Pacifico, San Francisco, 1915.

For international commissions see 139A and C.

82. Special local government districts.

Enter special local government districts for harbor control and de-
velopment, power development and distribution, sanitation, irrigation,
education, etc., under their own names rather than under the govern-
ments creating them.

Minneapolis-Saint Paul Sanitary District.
East Bay Municipal Utility District.
Houston Independent School District.
Mancomunidad Hidrografica del Guadalquivir.

In cases where districts are more generally known by the name of
the authority or board in charge of them than by their own official
designation, prefer entry under the governing body.

California Toll Bridge Authority.

Dundee Harbour Trust not Harbour District of Dundee.

Junta de las Obras del Puerto de Santander.

Port of New York Authority not Port of New York District.

Tennessee Valley Authority.

83. Laws, Ancient and medieval.

Ancient and medieval laws (codes, compilations, special collections,
extracts, etc.) are entered under the names or titles by which they
are traditionally known as headings. These may be the name of the
promulgator:

Hammurabi, King of Babylonia.
Manu.

or the name of the people governed by the laws:

Hittites. Latos, statutes, etc.
Visigoths. Laws, statutes, etc.

or the title (name) of the code:

Breviarum Alarici.

Corpus juris civilis.

Leges XII tabularum.

Lex Romana Burgundionum.

Sachsenspiegel.

Salic law.

Sodermannalagen.

84. Laws, Modern.

Enter laws, decrees, and other acts having the force of law under
the country, state, or other jurisdiction with the form subheading

LAWS, STATUTES, ETC.

Common forms of publication are:

137

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

General collections, compiled statutes, all laws in force at a

certain time.
General codes.
Civil codes.

Code of civil procedure.

Code of civil practice,
Penal codes.

Code of criminal procedure.

Code of criminal practice.
Judicial codes.
Political codes.

(Chiefly American)
Commercial codes.

(For countries other than the United States)
Official editions of a special act or acts on a particular subject

(e.g., banks, income tax, etc.) whether annotated or un-

annotated.
Nonofficial editions or compilations of acts not annotated or

with annotations subordinate to the text of the law.
Official drafts (or legislative bills) for individual laws and codes.

A. Subdivision by reign, administration, etc. For the larger, long-
continued jurisdictions it may be desirable to segregate individual
acts (other than codes) , or collections of acts enacted during a given
reign or executive administration or during a given legislative period,
by adding to the subheading LAWS, STATUTES, ETC. the inclusive dates
of the reign, administration, or legislative period, and in parentheses
the name of the incumbent executive or the designation of the legis-
lative period.

France. Laws, statutes, etc., 1924-1931 (Doumergue)
Gt Brit. Laws, statutes, etc., 1837-1901 (Victoria)
Spain. Laws, statutes, etc., 1814-1833 (Ferdinand VII)

Make general references from legislative bodies to the subheading

LAWS, STATUTES, ETC.

B. Laws of territories, dependencies, etc. Enter the laws of states
and territories, including dependencies, with or without a degree of
autonomy, under the name of the jurisdiction or territory to which
they apply, rather than under the name of the country or countries
to whose sovereignty or suzerainty they have been successively subject
and whose lawmaking or executive powers have promulgated the laws.
Make added entry for the latter.

French Guiana. Laws, statutes, etc.

Ordonnance du Roi, portant application du Code ^instruction
criminelle a la Guiane frangaise.

i. France. Laws, statutes, etc.

C. Annotated laws. Enter annotated editions or compilations of
acts under the annotator, publisher, or title, only when the text of the
acts is obviously subordinate to the annotations, following the same
principle as for entering other commentaries. (Cf. 29.)

138

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 84F

Carr, Arthur Strettell Comyns, 1882- ed
Recent mining legislation, including the Coal mines act, 1930

(annotated) by A. S. Comyns Carr ... and Wilfrid Fordham .
1. Fordham, Wilfrid Gurney, joint ed. n. Gt. Brit. Laws, statutes, etc.

Canada. Laws, statutes, etc.

* ^ 6 I ?! olvent act of 1875: ^h the rules of practice and
tariffs of fees . . . Annotated by Ivan Wotherspoon . . . with an
index and list of cases, by C. H. Stephens

i. Wotherspoon, Ivan Tolkein, ed. n. Stephens, Charles Henry.

D. Digests of laws. When the original text of the laws digested or
annotated is quoted only in part, or in a fragmentary manner, or when
the contribution of the digester or annotater forms the main feature
of the book, enter under the digester with added entry under the
name of the country.

Herty, Thomas.

A digest of the laws of the United States of America. Being a
complete system, (alphabetically arranged) of all the public acts
of Congress now in force from the commencement of the fed-
eral government to the end of the third session of the Fifth
Congress, which terminated in March 1799, inclusive. By Thomas
Herty ...

i. U. S. Laws, statutes, etc.

In doubtful cases prefer entry under country with added entry
under digester or annotater.

U. S. Laws, statutes, etc.

Digest of the general laws of the U. S. ... by James Dunlop.
i. Dunlop, James, 1795-1856, ed.

E. Ordinances. Enter local ordinances and bylaws, and likewise
compilations of local laws relating to a single city or other local govern-
ment, under the name of the city or other local government with
form subheading ORDINANCES, ETC.

Cleveland. Ordinances, etc.

F. Laws of city states. Enter collections of the "statuti," "ordini,"
"leggi," "consuetudine," etc., of the Italian medieval city states, comuni,
etc., and similar collections of the "Stadtrechte" of the city states of
Germany, Switzerland, the Baltic states, etc., under the name of
the city with the subheading LAWS, STATUTES, ETC.

Bergamo. Laws, statutes, etc.

Statuta magnificat civitatis Bergomi cum correctionibus, refor-
mationibus, & aliis decretis ... in veteri non impressis, cum indice
alphabetico . . . pluribus . . . erroribus expurgata, & faciliori
lectioni accomodata per Bernardinum Riccium . . .

i. Riccius, Bernardinus, ed.

Hamburg. Laws, statutes, etc.

Gesetz betreffend die Amortisation der Staatsschuld. Auf
Bef ehl e.H. Senats der Freien und Hansestadt Hamburg publicirt
den 29. Mai 1865.

139

85 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

85. Constitutions.

Enter constitutions, and official drafts of proposed constitutions,
under the name of the country or state with the form subheading
CONSTITUTION. Refer from country with subheading in the vernacular.

U. S. Constitution.
Ohio. Constitution.
South Africa. Constitution.

Refer -from

Gt. Brit. Laws, statutes, etc.
South Africa Act, 1909.
Switzerland. Constitution.

Refer from
Switzerland. Bundesverfassung.

86. Constitutional conventions.

A. Enter constitutional conventions of the states and territories
of the United States under the name of the state or territory with
subheading CONSTITUTIONAL CONVENTION, followed by the date.

New Hampshire. Constitutional Convention, 1902.

B. Enter constitutional conventions of foreign countries under the
name of the country with the name of the body in the vernacular as
subheading, followed by the date.

Germany. Nationalversammlung, 1919-1920.
Portugal. Assembleia National Constituinte de 1911.

87. Charters.

Enter charters for colonial, provincial or local governments, and
for other corporate bodies under the name of the government or body
to whom the charter is granted. Make added entry or reference under
the name of the sovereign power granting the charter, except under
states or countries for municipal charters.

New Orleans. Charters.

Charter of the city of New Orleans. Act 159 of the General
Assembly of the state of Louisiana, session of 1912, as expressly
amended by acts of the Louisiana Legislature to and including
the session of 1926. Commission form of government.

Cincinnati, Hamilton and Dayton Railroad Company.

Charter and by-laws of the Cincinnati, Hamilton and Dayton
Rail Road Company,
i. Ohio. Laws, statutes, etc.

88. Treaties.

A. Enter single treaties, conventions, executive agreements, and
other exchanges of notes having the effect of treaties, under the party
named first on the title page, with the form subheading TREATIES, ETC.
followed by inclusive dates of reign or administration and the name
of the executive incumbent in the year of signing. For certain govern-
ments, such as those of the British dominions, the subheading is fol-

140

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 88C

lowed only by the year of signature. Make added entry tinder the
other party or parties to the treaty. Added entries are also to be
made, when necessary, for the countries with the subheadings DEPT.
OF STATE; FOREIGN OFFICE; MINISTERS DES AFFAIRS ETRANGERES; etc.,
and for editors, compilers, translators, etc. When the treaty is com-
monly called by the place where it was signed, make a subject entry
under the name of the place followed by the phrase TREATY OF and
the year. Make references from any other appellations.
See also 118C (Concordats) .

Canada. Treaties, etc., 1932.

. . . Trade agreement between Canada and New Zealand.
Signed at Ottawa and Wellington April 23, 1932. In force May
24, 1932.

i. New Zealand. Treaties, etc., 1932. n. Title.

Gt. Brit Treaties, etc., 1760-1820 (George III)

The definitive treaty of peace and friendship between His
Britannick Majesty, the most Christian King, and the King of
Spain. Concluded at Paris the 10th day of February, 1763. To
which the King of Portugal acceded on the same day. Published
by authority.

1. Paris, Treaty of, 1763. i. France. Treaties, etc., 1715-1774 (Louis xv)
n. Spain. Treaties, etc., 1759-1788 (Charles in) m. Portugal. Treaties,
etc., 1750-1777 (Joseph i)

U. S. Treaties, etc., 1801-1809 (Jefferson)

Treaty and conventions, entered into and ratified by the United
States of America and the French Republic relative to the cession
of Louisiana.

1. Paris, Treaty of, 1803. 2. Louisiana Purchase, i. France. Treaties,
etc., 1799-1804 (Consulate)

B, Enter multilateral treaties or conventions signed at international
conferences under the name of the conference.

International American Conference. 4th, Buenos Aires, 1910.

. . . Convention between the United States and other powers
on literary and artistic copyright. Signed at Buenos Aires,
August 11, 1910.

International Conference for the Unification of Laws on Bills of
Exchange, Promissory Notes and Cheques. 1st, Geneva, 1930.
International convention on the stamp laws in connection with

bills of exchange and promissory notes. Geneva, June 7, 1930.

<The convention has not been ratified by His Majesty> . . .

C. Enter collections of treaties of several countries under the com-
piler.

Rockhill, William Woodville, 1854-1914, ed.

Treaties and conventions with or concerning China and Korea,
1894-1904, together with various state papers and documents
affecting foreign interests. Edited by William Woodville Rock-
hill ...

i. China. Treaties, etc. n. Korea. Treaties, etc. m. U. S. Treaties, etc.

141

88D A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

D. Enter collections of the treaties of a particular country with more
than one other country under the name of the country which is a party
to all the treaties even when it is not the one mentioned first on the
title page.

Portugal. Treaties, etc.

. . ^ Compilagao ate 31 de outubro de 1929 dos tratados e con-
vengoes comerciais em vigor entre Portugal e os outros paises.
Autorizada por despacho ministerial de 8 de setembro de 1929.

U. S. Treaties, etc.

Treaties of amity and commerce, and of alliance eventual and
defensive, between His Most Christian Majesty and the thirteen
United States of America; the definitive treaty between Great-
Britain and the thirteen United States of America; and the treaty
of amity, commerce, and navigation, between His Britannic
Majesty and the United States of America . . .

i. France. Treaties, etc., 1774-1792 (Louis xvi) n. Gt. Brit. Treaties,
etc., 1760-1820 (George m)

89. Courts.

A. Enter courts under their names (statutory titles) as subhead-
ings under the countries, states, etc., from which they derive their
authority.

Chicago. Municipal Court.

France. Conseil d'titat

France. Parlement (Paris)

France. Parlement (Toulouse)

Gt. Brit. High Court of Justice.

Gt. Brit. High Court of Justice. King's Bench Division.

New York (State) Court of Oyer and Terminer (Albany Co.)

Pennsylvania. Orphans' Court (Allegheny Co.)

Prussia. Oberlandesgericht, Breslau.

Spain. Tribunal Supremo.

U. S. Circuit Court (2d Circuit)

U. S. District Court. Illinois (Northern District)

U. S, Supreme Court.

B. Enter joint courts of two or more governments under the name
of the court followed by the name of the place if there is a permanent
seat. 7 Refer from the name of the place.

Corte de Justicia Centro-americana, Cartago 9 Costa Rica.
Hanseatisches Oberlandesgericht, Hamburg.

C. Enter a single opinion, decision, or charge under the name of
the court, with added entries under the name of the judge, parties
to the suit, or other headings as the case may require. (Cf. footnote 8
rule 90B.) Collections of the opinions and other papers of a single
judge are preferably to be entered under his name as personal author.

7 Exception has been made by the Library of Congress for the Permanent Court of
Arbitration and the Permanent Court of International Justice, both, located at the
Hague and entered under the place.

142

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHOBS 89G

U. S. Circuit Court (1st Circuit)

The opinion of Judge Story in the case of William Allen vs.
Joseph McKeen, treasurer of Bowdoin CoUege, delivered in the
Circuit Court of the United States, at the May term at Port-
land looo.

U. S. Circuit Court (8th Circuit)

. .. Decision of John F Philips, judge, in Temple lot case.
The Reorganized Church of Jesus Christ of Latter Day Saints
versus the Church of Christ, et al.

^ Phn ! p T s ' Joh ^ Fin is, 1834-1919. n. Reorganized Church of Jesus
Christ of Latter Day Saints, in. Independence, Mo. Church of Christ
iv. Title: Temple lot case.

D. Enter reports of decisions of a single court under the name of
the court, with added entry under the name of the reporter, editor, or
collector, as the case may be.

New York (State) Court of Appeals.

Transcript appeals . . . The file of opinions in cases argued
before the Court of Appeals of the State of New York, during
the January term, 1867- c June term, 186&, From official copies
certified by Joel Tiffany, state reporter.

I. Tiffany, Joel, 1811-1893, reporter, n. Title.

Gt, Brit Court for the Consideration of Crown Cases Reserved.

Crown cases reserved for consideration, and decided by the
twelve judges of England, from the year 1799 to the year 1824.
By William Oldnall Russell and Edward Ryan . . . With refer-
ences to the English common law reports.

I. Russell, Sir William Oldnall, 1785-1833, reporter, n. Ryan, Sir
Edward, 1793-1875, reporter, m. Title.

E. Enter a collection of decisions on a single subject under the
editor or compiler. If limited to a single court, make added entry
under the court,

Powell, Thomas Reed, 1880-

Supreme Court decisions on federal power over commerce,
1910-1914, by Thomas Reed Powell . . .

i. U. S. Supreme Court.

F. Enter reports of two courts published together with collective
title under the first named court with added entry for the second.

New York (State) Supreme Court.

Reports of cases argued and determined in the Supreme Court
and in the Court for the Correction of Errors of the State of
New York E 1845-1848 3 By Hiram Denio . . .

i. New York (State) Court for the Trial of Impeachments and Cor-
rection of Errors, n. Denio, Hiram, 1799-1871, ed.

G. Enter reports of three or more courts published together with
collective title under the name of country, state, etc., with the
subheading COURTS. Make added entry for each court. If, however,

143

89H A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

the reports are mainly those of one court and usually so cited, enter
under that court with added entry for the others.

Pennsylvania. Courts.

Reports of cases adjudged in the courts of Common Pleas,
Quarter Sessions, Oyer and Terminer, and Orphans' Court of the
First Judicial District of Pennsylvania ,1808-1841;,; with notes and
references by John W. Ashmead and with citations from opinions
of the Supreme Court, Superior Court and other courts of
Pennsylvania. Collected by Charles A. Hawkins . . .

i. Ashmead, John Wayne, reporter, n. Hawkins, Charles Augustus,
1859- nr. Pennsylvania. Court of Common Pleas (Philadelphia

Co.) iv. Pennsylvania, Court of Quarter Sessions of the Peace (Phila-
delphia Co.) v. Pennsylvania. Court of Oyer and Terminer (Philadel-
phia Co.) yr. Pennsylvania. Orphans' Court (Philadelphia Co.) vii.
Pennsylvania. Supreme Court, vin. Pennsylvania. Superior Court.

EL Enter digests of reports under the digester; if anonymous, under
the title. Make added entry under the name of the court or judge
whenever the digest is limited to the reports of a particular court, and
under the title of the collection or set of reports if it is frequently
referred to by title.

Morrison, Robert Stewart, 1843-1920.

Colorado digest; containing the decisions of the Supreme Court,
Court of Appeals, and federal courts of the state as reported in
volume 1-25 Colorado reports, 1-13 Court of Appeals reports,
the contemporaneous Pacific reporters, 1-100 Federal reporters'
101-178 U ; S. reports and local reports, with table of cases di-
gested, with their citations, and table of overruled cases, by
R. S. Morrison . . .

i. Colorado. Supreme Court. 11. Colorado. Court of Appeals, in. Title.

I. Enter court rules, plain text or annotated, under the name of
the court.

U. S. Circuit Court of Appeals (2d Circuit)

Rules of the United States Circuit Court of Appeals for the
Second Circuit, October 16, 1918.

J. Enter grand juries under their names (statutory titles) as sub-
headings under the county or parish.

Kings Co., N. Y. Grand Jury.
New York (County) Sheriff's Jury.
Orleans Parish, La. Grand Jury.

90. Trials.

A. Pleas and briefs. Enter a plea or brief printed separately
under the lawyer who makes it. Make added entries for joint authors,
parties to the suit, etc., as the case may require. (Cf. footnote 8
rule 90B.)

Whiting, William, 1813-1873.

Argument of William Whiting, esq., in the case of Ross Winans
v. Orsamus Eaton et al. for an alleged infringement of his patent

144

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

90C

for the eight-wheel railroad car. Before Hon. Samuel Nelson,
justice of the United States Circuit Court for the Northern
District of New York. Phonographically reported by Arthur
Cannon ...

i. Winans, Ross, 1798-1877. n. Eaton, Orsamus.

In law cases where briefs and other records are numerous, the
material may be made available under the parties to the case and
under subject, using for practical convenience a factitious collec-
tive entry.

Atchison, Topeka and Santa Fe Railway Company, et al., de-
fendants.

(Kansas and Public Utilities Commission for the State of Kansas,

complainants)

Action brought under the Act to regulate commerce, of 1887.

Before the Interstate Commerce Commission.

Briefs and other records in this case, 1912- not separately listed
or cataloged are to be found on shelf: L Call no. of the collection ,

i. Kansas, complainant, n. Kansas. Public Utilities Commission,
complainant, in. U. S. Interstate Commerce Commission.

Eastman Kodak Company of New Jersey, defendant-appellant.
(Goodwin Film and Camera Company, complainant-appellee)
Patent case.

Briefs and other records in this case, 1913- not separately listed
or cataloged are to be found on shelf: c Call no. of the collection]

i. Goodwin Film and Camera Company, Newark, N. J., complainant-
appellee.

B, Civil actions. Enter reports of civil actions tinder the party to
the suit who is named first on the title page. Make added entry
under the second party, under the court, and under the reporter if
his name appears on the title page. 8

Brooks, William, 1803-1863, complainant.

The case of William Brooks versus Ezekiel Byam and others,
in equity, in the Circuit Court of the United States, for the
First Circuit district of Massachusetts. Before the Honorable
Mr. Justice Story, the Honorable Judge Sprague, Sirnon Green-
leaf, esq., Charles Sumner, esq., counsel for complainant. Frank-
lin Dexter, esq., Eben'r Smith, Jr., esq., counsel for respondents.

i. Byam, Ezekiel, respondent, n. U. S. Circuit Court (1st Circuit)
in. Title.

C. Contested elections. Proceed according to the rule for civil ac-
tions, but enter under author reports of committees, speeches in Con-
gress, etc., upon contested elections, with added entries for the parties
in the case if the reports, etc., include evidence. Make subject entries
for the parties in the case when their names are not used as author
or added entries.

8 The number of added entries made for courts, judges, defendants other than the
first will depend largely on the fullness of the catalog and the character of the library.

145

A.L.A, CATALOGING RULES

Rainey, Henry Thomas, 1860-1934.

Contested-election case of Henry T. Rainey v. Guy L. Shaw,
from the Twentieth Congressional District of Illinois.

i. Shaw, Guy Loren, 1881- n. Title.

Mumford, William.

. . . Contested election case of Henry T, Rainey, vs. Guy L.
Shaw. From the Twentieth Congressional District of Illinois.
Statement, brief and argument for contestee. William Mumford,
attorney for contestee.

i. Rainey, Henry Thomas, 1860-1934. n. Shaw, Guy Loren, 1881-
m. Title.

D. Crown, state, and criminal trials. Enter reports of crown, state
and criminal proceedings under the name of the defendant. When
there are several defendants, enter under the one named first on the
title page with added entries for the others. If none are named on
the title page, enter under the one best known in connection with the
case, or, lacking such, under title. Make added entry for the court
and for the reporter and editor.

O'Connell, Daniel, 1775-1847, defendant.

... A report of the proceedings on an indictment for a con-
spiracy, in the case of the Queen v. Daniel O'Connell, John
O'Connell, Thomas Steele, Charles Gavan Dufry ... in Michael-
mas term, 1843, and Hilary term, 1844. By John Simpson Arm-
strong, and Edward Shirley Trevor.

i. O'Connell, John, 1810-1858, defendant, n. Steele, Thomas, 1788-
1848, defendant . . . vm. Ray, Thomas Matthew, defendant, ix. Arm-
strong, John Simpson, reporter, x. Trevor, Edward Shirley, reporter
xi. Ireland. Court of King's Bench.

Burr, Aaron, 1756-1836, defendant.

Trial of Aaron Burr for treason; printed from the report
taken in shorthand by David Robertson . . .

Trial in the Circuit Court of the United States for the District of
Virginia, Richmond, May 22-Sept. 1, 1807.

I. Robertson, David, reporter, n. U. S. Circuit Court (4th Circuit)
Alley, Leavitt, b, 1816, defendant.

Report of the trial of Leavitt Alley, indicted for the murder
of Abijah Ellis, in the Supreme Judicial Court of Massachusetts
Reported by Franklin Fiske Heard.

i. Heard, Franklin Fiske, 1825-1889, reporter, n. Massachusetts.
Supreme Judicial Court.

E. Impeachment trials. Enter reports of impeachment trials under
the defendant, with subject entry for the office, and added entries for
the legislative body sitting as the court of impeachment, and for the
other parties, reporters, etc., whose connection with the case is such
as to warrant entry under their names. Refer from the subject IM-
PEACHMENTS [LOCAL SUBDIVISION] to the name of the defendant.

Burdett, John S defendant.

Proceedings of the Senate sitting for the trial of the impeach-
ment of John S. Burdett, treasurer of the state of West Virginia.
With evidence.

146

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

90H

E. D. York, reporter of the evidence.

i 7^ eSt yfctfnfe: p^rer's Office, i. West Virginia. Legislature,
1875. Senate, n. York, E. D., reporter.

Impeachments West Virginia see also Burdett, John S., defendant.

F. Courts-martial and courts of inquiry. Enter reports of courts-
martial and courts of inquiry under the defendant, with added entry
for the court, followed by name of defendant and date of trial, and
for the reporter, providing his name is given.

Hull, William, 1753-1825, defendant.

Report of the trial of Brig. General William Hull; commanding
the North-Western Army of the United States. By a court
martial held at Albany on Monday, 3d January, 1814, and suc-
ceeding days. Taken by Lieut. Col. Forbes , . .

i. U. S. Army. Courts-martial. Hull. 1814. u. Forbes, James Grant
reporter. '

Everson, Alfred, defendant.

Proceedings of a naval general court-martial, in the case of
Acting Master Alfred Everson, United States Navy, charged with
assault with intent to kill James O'Neill, a fireman of the British
steamer Nicholas i, and with maltreatment and cruelty.

i. U. S. Navy. Courts-martial. Everson. 1864.

Yancey, Robert, defendant.

Court martial held at Louisa courthouse, on the 10th of Decem-
ber, 1806, by order of Major General James Williams, for the trial
of Lieutenant Colonel Robert Yancey, of the Fortieth Regiment
of Virginia Militia.

i. Virginia. Militia. Courts-martial. Yancey. 1806.

Hall, Theron Edmund, 1821-1880, defendant.

Proceedings of a court of inquiry, convened at Aquia Land-
ing, Va., March 13th, 1863, to examine into certain charges pre-
ferred against Captain T. E. Hall, assistant quartermaster.

i. U. S. Army. Courts of Inquiry. Hall. 1863.

G. Admiralty proceedings* Enter admiralty proceedings relating to
vessels under the name of the vessel. Make added entry for the
court and for the reporter if his name is mentioned.

Meteor (Steamship)

Report of the case of the steamship Meteor, libelled for alleged
violation of the Neutrality act ... Edited by F. V. Balch . . .

CONTENTS. i. Proceedings in the District Court of the United States
for the Southern District of New York.- n. Proceedings in the Circuit
Court of the United States for the Southern District of New York in
the Second Circuit, and in the Supreme Court of the United States.

i. Balch, Francis Vergnies, 1839-1898, ed. n, U. S. District Court
New York (Southern District) m. U. S. Circuit Court (2d Circuit)
iv. U. S. Supreme Court.

H. Collected reports of trials. Enter collected reports of trials
under the name of the compiler; if published anonymously, enter
under title.

147

91 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Howell, Thomas Bayley, 1768-1815, ed.

A complete collection of state trials and proceedings for high
treason, and other crimes and misdemeanors from the earliest
period to the year 1783 . . . compiled by T. B. Howell . . .

Coleccion de las causas mas celebres, los me j ores modelos de
alegatos, acusaciones fiscales, interrogatorios y defensas, en lo
civil y criminal, del foro frances, ingles, espanol y mexicano.
1854.

Societies and Institutions'

Definitions and specifications. A society is an organization of per-
sons associated together for the promotion of common purposes or
objects, such as research, business, recreation, etc.

Included in the rules for societies are academies (learned societies) ,
associations, and societies of all kinds, scientific, technical, educational,
benevolent, moral, etc., even when strictly local or named from a
country, state, province, or city; also clubs, gilds, orders of knight-
hood, secret societies, Greek letter fraternities, Young Men's and
Young Women's Christian Associations, affiliated societies, political
parties, religious sects, etc., as distinguished from institutions (estab-
lishments) .

Institutions (establishments) are entities whose functions require
a plant with buildings, apparatus, etc., as distinguished from bodies,
organized groups of persons such as societies, associations, etc., whose
duties may be performed equally well in one place or another. The
necessity of having a permanent material equipment tends to identify
the institution with a locality.

Included in the rules for institutions are colleges, universities,
schools, libraries, museums, galleries, radio stations, observatories,
laboratories, churches, monasteries, convents, hospitals, asylums,
prisons, theaters, buildings, etc.

The designations academy, athenaeum, college, institute, lyceum,
museum, etc., and similar terms in other languages are used inter-
changeably for cultural associations and educational institutions; these
are to be entered as societies or as institutions according to the nature
of their organization.

01. General rule (Societies).

Enter a society under the first word (not an article, cf . 93A) of its
latest corporate name, with reference from any other name by which
it is known and from the place where its headquarters are estab-
lished. (Cf. B, p. 150.)

T/ eH n? 168 fo * corP 1 * enjbry as applied to Societies and Institutions are based on
U b. library of Congress, Catalog Division, Guide to the cataloguing of the serial

compiied by Harriet w - piers n (2d ed - :

148

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 91A(2)

Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

Refer from

Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences.
College of Physicians of Philadelphia.

Refer from

Philadelphia. College of Physicians.
Colegio de Abogados de Lima.

Refer from
Lima. Colegio de Abogados.

A. Change of name.

(1) When a society has changed its name, enter under the latest
form, with references from earlier forms. 10

Accademia di scienze, lettere e belle arti di Palermo.

Refer from

Accademia palermitana.
Accademia di scienze e lettere, Palermo.
Academie d'agriculture de France, Paris.

Refer from

Societe royale d'agriculture de la generalite de Paris.
Societe royale d'agriculture de Paris.
Societe d'agriculture du departement de la Seine.
Societe royale et centrale d'agriculture, Paris.
Societe nationale et centrale d'agriculture, Paris.
Societe imperiale et centrale d'agriculture, Paris.
Societe centrale d'agriculture de France, Paris.
Societe nationale d'agriculture de France, Paris.

(2) When two or more societies which have had an independent
existence unite to form a new society, enter each under its own name
up to the time of union, with see also references to and from the
new body.

Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne.

In 1855 the Philosophical Society of Victoria (founded 1854) and the
Victorian Institute for the Advancement of Science (founded 1854)
united to form the Philosophical Institute of Victoria; in 1859 the name
of the latter was changed to Royal Society of Victoria.

In 1887 the society absorbed the Microscopical Society of Victoria.

Entries to be made under

Philosophical Society of Victoria.

with see also reference to
Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne.
Victorian Institute for the Advancement of Science, Melbourne.

with see also reference to
Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne.
Royal Society of Victoria, Melbourne

with see also references to
Philosophical Society of Victoria.

10 The heading established for a corporate body is used for all the publications,
whether or not another form appears in some of the titles; necessary references are
made. In case of subsequent changes of name, all entries and references are revised
to conform to the new name.

149

91B __ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Victorian Institute for the Advancement of Science, Mel-
bourne.

Refer from
Philosophical Institute of Victoria.

B. Use of place in heading.

(1) If the name of the place does not appear in the corporate name,
add it in the established form (cf. 153) when the activities of the
society are local or when the location is an aid to identification for so-
cieties of nondistinctive or similar names. Refer from the place.

Civic Symphony Orchestra Society, Fort Wayne, Ind.

Refer from

Fort Wayne, Ind. Civic Symphony Orchestra Society.
Club Catolico, Montevideo.

Refer from

Montevideo. Club Catolico.
Asociacion Amigos del Museo, Buenos Aires.

Refer from

Buenos Aires. Asociacion Amigos del Museo.
Societe d'histoire du droit, Paris.

Refer from

Paris. Societe d'histoire du droit.
Society of Comparative Legislation, London.

Refer from

London. Society of Comparative Legislation.
Sociedad de Psiquiatria, Montevideo.

Refer from
Montevideo. Sociedad de Psiquiatria.

(2) The city is not added, ordinarily, to the names of societies
whose headquarters have changed, or whose membership is nation-
wide and whose branches may be located in different places. In
general, for national societies of the United States prefer the omission
of the city; for foreign societies, the addition of the city may serve
also to distinguish the country to which the society belongs. Refer-
ence may be made for established headquarters, even though not used
in the heading.

American Library Association.

American Library Association. Division of Cataloging and Clas-
sification.

American Philosophical Association.
Wissenschaftliche Gesellschaft fiir Luftf ahrt.
Archaologisches Institut des Deutschen Reichs.
Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland.
but

American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia.

Institution of Civil Engineers, London.

Asociacion Nacional de Ingenieros Agronomos, Madrid.

Asociacion Sudamericana de Paz Universal, Buenos Aires

Sociedad Nacional de Mineria, Lima.

Sociedad Nacional de Mineria, Santiago de Chile.

150

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

(3) When necessary for identification, in cases where headquarters
of a society are not given, the name of the country, state, province,
etc., is added.

Asociacion Nacional de Abogados (Mexico)

National Council for Maternity and Child Welfare (Gt Brit )

Labor Party (Australia)

State Association of Superintendents of the Poor (Michigan)

State Association of Miners (Kansas)

Agricultural Society of New Castle County (Delaware)

Children's Aid Society (Ontario)

Friends of the University Library (University of Toledo)

If the name of state or other geographical division is inserted in
the body of the heading, it is ordinarily abbreviated.

Montgomery County (Md.) Agricultural Society.
Sangamon County (HI.) Bar Association.

C. Identical name and place. When two or more societies in the
same place have the same name distinguish them by dates in the
heading.

Scientific Society of San Antonio, (Founded 1892)
Scientific Society of San Antonio. (Founded 1904)
Cincinnati Medical Society. (Founded 1819)
Cincinnati Medical Society. (Founded 1831)
Cincinnati Medical Society. (Founded 1851)

The general rule applies to all bodies included in the specification for
societies unless the subsequent rules (94-130) provide exceptions, varia-
tions or special rulings.

For additional rulings on the form of headings see 93.

92. General rule (Institutions).

Enter an institution (using the latest name) under the name of the
place in which it is located.

Boston. Public Library.
Manila. Ateneo.

Refer from
Ateneo de Manila.
Philadelphia. Children's Hospital.

Refer from

Children's Hospital of Philadelphia,
Gratz. Anna-Kinderspital.

Refer from

Anna-Kinderspital, Grate.
Paris. Musee national du Louvre.

Refer from

Musee national du Louvre, Paris.
Louvre, Musee national du, Paris.
France. Musee national du Louvre, Paris.

151

92A A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Hamburg. Institut fiir Allgemeine Botanik.

Refer from

Institut fur Allgemeine Botanik, Hamburg.
Newark, N. J. Radio station WOR.

Refer from

WOR (Radio station) Newark, N. J.
Asuncion. "Radio Prieto" (ZP9)

Refer from

"Radio Prieto" (ZP9) Asuncion.
ZP9 "Radio Prieto," Asuncion.
Louvain. Universite catholique.

Refer from

Universite catholique, Louvain.
Greenwich, Eng. Royal Observatory.

Refer from

Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
Gt. Brit. Royal Observatory, Greenwich.
Kalocsa, Hungary. Haynald Observatorium.

Refer from
Haynald Observatorium, Kalocsa, Hungary.

Exceptions.

A. Names beginning with a proper noun or proper adjective. 11

Enter an institution of the United States or of the British Empire
whose name begins with a proper noun or a proper adjective under
the first word of its name and refer from the place where it is located.
Add the name of the place to the heading if it does not occur in
the name of the institution, unless the institution is so well known
as to make the addition of the place unnecessary. For countries other
than the United States and the British Empire follow the general rule
of entry under place. (For state institutions see 104.)

Corcoran Gallery of Art, Washington, D. C.

Refer from

Washington, D. C. Corcoran Gallery of Art.
Carnegie Institution of Washington.

Refer from

Washington, D. C. Carnegie Institution of Washington.
Smithsonian Institution.

Refer from

Washington, D. C. Smithsonian Institution.
British Museum.

Refer from

London. British Museum.
Dartmouth College.

Refer from

Hanover, N. H. Dartmouth College.

"This exception has not been applied to tax-supported schools (see 107) nor to
Carnegie, Passmore-Edwards, and similar public libraries which because of their
number as well as the nature of their grants and endowments, tend to become better
known, at least outside of their immediate neighborhood, by the name of the city in
which they are located than by their own name. Where only the building is a private
donation, the library feeing otherwise endowed and supported by public taxation the
presumption is particularly strong in favor of entry under the place.

152

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 92B

Passavant Memorial Hospital, Chicago.

Refer from
Chicago. Passavant Memorial Hospital,

To avoid doubt or complications in the order of filing, it has been
found expedient to write the names of institutions beginning with the
name of a place (city) in the form of entry under place, with sub-
division.

San Francisco. Museum of Art.

not San Francisco Museum of Art.

Exception may be made, however, in names long established and
well known.

Boston Athenaeum.

Initials of personal names occurring at the beginning of the name
of an institution are omitted, but forenames when given in full are
included. (Cf. 93C.)

Smiley Public Library, Redlands, Calif.

Refer from

A. K. Smiley Public Library, Redlands, Calif.
Redlands, Calif. A. K. Smiley Public Library.
Redlands, Calif. Smiley Public Library.
Enoch Pratt Free Library, Baltimore.

Refer from

Pratt Free Library, Baltimore.
Baltimore. Enoch Pratt Free Library.
Brigham Young University, Prove, Utah.

Refer from

Provo, Utah. Brigham Young University.
Peter Bent Brigham Hospital, Boston.

Refer from
Boston. Peter Bent Brigham Hospital.

Colleges and other institutions named after Luther may be re-
garded as a group and entered under the conventional rather than the
official form of name LUTHER COLLEGE, followed by name of place, with
references from the official form.

Luther College, New Ulm, Minn.

Refer from

Dr, Martin Luther College.
Martin Luther College.
New Ulm, Minn. Dr. Martin Luther College.

B. Minor variations in names. French municipal libraries are vari-
ously and irregularly called Bibliotheque; Bibliotheque communale;
Bibliotheque de la ville; Bibliotheque municipale; Bibliotheque pub-
lique. These are preferably to be entered under the designation
BIBLIOTHEQUE MUNICIPALE in agreement with the practice adopted by
the Annuaire des bibliotheques et des archives, e.g.,

153

93 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Reims. Bibliotheque municipale.

Follow the general rule, however, for libraries having a distinctive
individual name, e.g.,

Aix. Bibliotheque Mejanes.

or for important libraries that have issued publications tending to
make another form distinctive for the library in question, e.g.,

Lyon. Bibliotheque de la ville.

93. Entry word (Societies or institutions).

A, Retain the initial article in heading only when necessary for
clearness, and disregard it in filing.

The Players, Detroit.

Refer from
Detroit The Players.
The Club, London.

Refer from
London. The Club.
The Typophiles, New York.

Refer from
New York. The Typophiles.

Les Fran$ais de Grande-Bretagne, London.

Refer from
London. Les Frangais de Grande-Bretagne.

B, Omit from the name of a society or institution the adjective or
abbreviation of an adjective denoting royal privilege, 13 except (I)
when it forms the distinguishing part of the name and (2) in English
names. In foreign names the adjective denoting a national body is
not to be abbreviated. 13 Adjectives denoting pontifical privilege are
not omitted.

32 Academies especially reflect in such adjectives the changes in the political history
of the countries to which they belong. Thus the academy of Berlin has had the fol-
lowing successive changes of name:

Societflt der Wisenchaften.

Ktinlgliche Societttt der WUsenschaften.

Clrarffiratllch Brandenburglache Socle tat der Wienftchaiteii.

Preusslflche tmd Churfflratllch Brandenburglache Socletflt der WlMen-
schaften.

Academla Regla Scientlarum BeroUnentU.

Kdnlgllehe Akademle der Wlsnenschaften.

Acadmle royale dea cience et belle-lettre.

KftnierIlcJt~prenaiche Akademle der Wi.aen.chaften u Berlin*

PmiB8lclie Akademie der \Visenchaften.

In view of the many changes, a shorter form is to be preferred, with references
from other forms.

Akademie der Wlssenachaften, Berlin.

13 National institutions which include in their names the name of the country and
therefore tend to become better known by the name of the country than by that of
the place where they are located, may be entered under the name of the country The
name of the city or town is to be added in the heading, In doubtful cases enter under
the city or town. This exception is to be confined to the higher institutions of learn-
ing, such as universities, libraries, etc. Secondary schools are better under the name
of the city.

Footnote continued on next page.

154

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

93B

Accademia di scienze, lettere ed arti degli agiati in Rovereto.

(not I. R. Accademia . . .)
Refer from

Imperiale Regia Accademia di scienze, lettere ed arti degli
agiati in Rovereto.

Regia Accademia di scienze, lettere ed arti degli agiati in

Rovereto.

Rovereto. Accademia di scienze, lettere ed arti degli agiati.
Danske videnskabernes selskab, Copenhagen
(not K. Danske . . .)

Refer from

Kongelige Danske videnskabernes selskab, Copenhagen.
Copenhagen. K. Danske videnskabernes selskab.
Florence. Galleria degli Uffizi.

Refer from

Reale Galleria degli Uffizi, Florence.
Uffizi, Galleria degli, Florence,
but

Royal Society of Edinburgh.

Refer from

Edinburgh. Royal Society.
London. National Gallery.

Refer from

National Gallery, London.
Hague. Koninklijke Bibliotheek.

Refer from

Koninklijke Bibliotheek, The Hague.
Bibliotheque royale de la Haye.
Leyden. Rijksuniversiteit.

Refer from
Rijksuniversiteit, Leyden.

Pontificia Accademia romana di archeologia.

Refer from

Accademia romana di archeologia.
Rome. Pontificio Istituto orientals

Refer from

Pontificio Istituto orientale, Rome.
Istituto orientale, Rome.

Footnote continued from preceding page.
Chile. Unlversidad, Santiago.

Refer from

Santiago de Chile. Universidad de Chile,
Venezuela. Ukiivergldad Central, Caracas.

Refer from

Caracas. Universidad Central de Venezuela.
Peru. Blbliotecn Nacional, Lima.

Refer from

lama. Biblioteca Naclonal del Peru.

Victoria, Australia. Public Library, Museum* and National Gallery,
Melbourne.

Refer from

Melbourne. Public Library, Museums and National Gallery of Victoria.
New South Wales. Public Library, Sydney.

Refer from

Sydney. Public Library of New South Wales.
but

San Jose, Costa Rica. Llceo de Costa Rica.

Refer from

Liceo de Costa Rica, San Jose.
Costa Rica, Liceo de, San Jose.

155

93C A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

C. Names beginning with a title of honor, distinction, or address.

Titles of honor, distinction, or address occurring at the beginning of
the name of a society or institution are to be retained; if, however,
they occur in an abbreviated form, they may be omitted. Refer from
form not used.

Judge Baker Guidance Center, Boston.

Refer from

Baker Guidance Center, Boston.
Boston. Judge Baker Guidance Center.
Bishop White Prayer Book Society.
Sir Walter Raleigh Monument Association.

Refer from
Raleigh Monument Association.

Kaiser \Vilhelm-GeselIschaft zur Forderung der Wissenschaf-
ten, Berlin.

Refer from
Berlin. Kaiser Wilhelm-Gesellschaft zur Forderung der Wis-

senschaften.
Herzl Zion Club, New York.

Refer from

Dr. Herzl Zion Club, New York.
New York. Herzl Zion Club.
New York. Dr. Herzl Zion Club.
Birmingham, Eng. King Edward's School.

Refer from

Bang Edward's School, Birmingham, Eng.
Washington, D. C. Miss Madeira's School.

Refer from

Miss Madeira's School, Washington, D. C.
Madeira's School, Washington, D. C.

Leyden. Rijksuniversiteit. Jan van der Hoeven-Stichting voor
Theoretische Biologie van Dier en Mensch.

Refer from

Prof. Dr. Jan van der Hoeven-Stichting voor Theoretische
Biologie van Dier en Mensch, verbonden aan der Rijksuni-
versiteit te Leiden.

Jan van der Hoeven-Stichting voor Theoretische Biologie van
Dier en Mensch, verbonden aan der Rijksuniversiteit te
Leiden.
Hoeven-Stichting voor Theoretische Biologie van Dier en

Mensch, verbonden aan der Rijksuniversiteit te Leiden.
Leyden. Rijksuniversiteit. Prof. Dr. Jan van der Hoeven-
Stichting voor Biologie van Dier en Mensch.

D. Names beginning with a numeral Enter a society whose cor-
porate name begins with a numeral under that name, with the numeral
spelled out in the vernacular.

For 3 October- Vereeniging write:

Drie October-Vereeniging, Leyden.

Refer from

October-Vereeniging, Leyden.
Leyden. Drie October-Vereeniging.
Leyden. October-Vereeniging.

156

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 94

E. Names made up of initial letters or syllables of the actual name.

Enter a society using a name made up of initial letters or syllables
of its actual name or initials of the principal words so combined as
to make a short, convenient form, under that form if it represents the
usage of the society. Refer from full name.

Scapa Society, London.

Refer from
Society for Checking the Abuses of Public Advertising,

London.

Public Advertising, Society for Checking the Abuses of.
London. Scapa Society.
but

Federation of Allied Legions.

with references from

Federation interallied des anciens combattants.
FID AC [i.e. Federation interalliee des anciens combattants]
F.I.D.A.C. [i.e. Federation interalliee des anciens combattants]

F. Names containing initials. Enter a society whose corporate
name contains initials under the form of name used by the society, with
explanation of the initials in brackets when necessary for clearness.

Sallskapet D.B.W. c i.e. de badande vannerna] Visby, Sweden.

Refer from

D.B.W. sallskapet, Visby, Sweden.
D.B.V. sallskapet, Visby, Sweden.
Visby, Sweden. Sallskapet D.B.W.
K.F.R. Society, Washington, D. C.

Refer from
Washington, D. C. K,FJR. Society.

94. Corporate names practically unknown.

A society or institution 14 whose full corporate name is so little
used as to be practically unknown may be entered by a shorter better-
known form.

American Philosophical Society, Philadelphia.

Refer from

American Philosophical Society held at Philadelphia for Pro-
moting Useful Knowledge.
Cymmrodorion Society, London.

Refer from

Honourable Society of Cymmrodorion.
Deutsche Akademie, Munich.

Refer from
Akademie zur Wissenschaftlichen Erforschung und zur Pflege

des Deutschtums: Deutsche Akademie.
Glasgow North American Colonial Society.

Refer from

Society (in connection with the Established Church of Scot-
land) for Promoting the Religious Interests of Scottish
Settlers in British North America.

14 Among institutions, the universities of continental Europe, in particular, are
known by short forms.

157

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

National Research Council (Canada)

Refer from

Honorary Advisory Council for Scientific and Industrial Re-
search (Canada)

Harvard University,

[Corporate name: President and Fellows of Harvard College]
Bairi (City) Universita,

Refer from

Universita degli studi "Benito Mussolini," Bari.
Briinn. Universita.

Refer from

Masarykova Universita, Briinn.
Oslo. Universitet.

Refer from

Kongelige Frederiks universitet, Oslo.
Heidelberg. Universitat

Refer from

Grossherzogliche Ruprecht-Karls Universitat zu Heidelberg.
Riga. Universitate.

Refer from
Latvijas Universitate, Riga.

95. Incorporated societies.

Omit in the heading for an incorporated society the term indicating
incorporation, unless that term is the initial word of the name, or
forms a distinguishing part of it. (For firms, business corporations,
etc., cf. 144.)

The practice of incorporated societies differs in the matter of
using in their statutory names the term "incorporated" ("inc.") or
its equivalent in other languages. Many incorporated societies omit
in their names the term indicating incorporation; others which may
have existed for a long period before incorporation, add the designation
"incorporated" ("inc." etc.) upon the adoption of their charter.

American Ethnological Society, New York.

not American Ethnological Society, inc.
Society of Engineers, London.

not Society of Engineers (incorporated)
Automobiltechnische Gesellschaft.

not Automobiltechnische Gesellschaft E.V.
Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Kunst und Wissenschaft in Brom-

berg.

not Deutsche Gesellschaft fur Kunst und Wissenschaft in

Bromberg (eingetragener Verein)
but

Incorporated Gas Institute, London.

Incorporated Society of Authors, Playwrights and Composers,

London.

96. Political parties.

Enter official publications (platforms, proceedings, manifestoes, cam-
paign books, etc.) of political parties under the name of the party.

158

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 97

When necessary for identification, add the name of the country in
parentheses. (Cf. 91B (3) .)

Labor Party (Gt. Brit.)

Refer from
Labour Party (Gt. Brit.)

Nationalsozialistische Deutsche Arbeiter-Partei.

Refer from

National Socialist German Labor Party.

Nazi Party,

N.S.D.A.P.

Partido Autonomista Puerto-riqueno.
Partite socifelista italiano.
Refer from

Socialist Party (Italy)

Republican Party. National Committee, 1932-1936.
Democratic Party. National Convention, Chicago, 1884.
Democratic Party. Pennsylvania.

Republican Party. New York (State) 6th Congressional District.
Republican Party. Rhode Island. State Central Committee.

The publications of the Republican and Democratic congressional
committees are to be entered under the names of these committees, not
under the parties.

Republican Congressional Committee, 1901-1903.

97. International societies.

Enter a society extending through many lands, or' having authorized
names in many languages, under the English form if it is used officially
(i.e., if it appears on any of the society's publications) ; otherwise under
that official form of the name which occurs most frequently, with
reference from all other forms.

International Maritime Association.

Refer from

Association Internationale de la marine.
International Council for the Study of the Sea.

Refer from

Conseil permanent international pour 1'exploration de la mer.
Central- Ausschuss fiir die Internationale Meeresforschung.
Comite international des poids et mesures.

Refer from
International Commission of Weights and Measures.

Red Cross.

[for general works]

Red Cross. U. S. American National Red Cross.

Refer from

American National Red Cross.
Red Cross. Denmark. Foreningen Dansk Rflde kors.

Refer from

Foreningen Dansk R0de kors.
Dansk R0de kors.

159

98 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Red Cross. Gt. Brit, British, Red Cross Society. County of Lon-
don Branch.
Refer from
British Red Cross Society.

Rotary International.

[for the international association]

Rotary International. Country or regional subdivision, e.g.,
Rotary International. Brazil.

But local rotary clubs are entered according to the general rule (91)
under their own names.

Rotary Club, Washington, D. C.

98. Orders of knighthood, secret orders, etc.

Enter orders of knighthood, both those of medieval and modern
times, also secret orders and other similar organizations, under their
names; but enter the American Knights Templars and other regular
masonic bodies under the heading FREEMASONS.

. A. Medieval orders (including orders still in existence) are usually
entered under an English form of the name.

Teutonic Knights.

Refer from
Deutscher Orden.
Deutscher Ritter.
Orden der Ritter des Hospitals St. Marien des Deutschen

Hauses.
Templars.

Refer from

Knights Templars (Monastic and military order)
Order of the Golden Fleece.

Refer from
Golden Fleece, Order of the.

B. Modern orders are entered under their names in the vernacular
with references from significant words of the name or from other forms.

Legion d'honneur.

Refer from

Legion of Honor (National order of France)
Order of the Legion of Honor.
Elefantordenen.

Refer from

Order of the Elephant.
Elephant, Order of the.

C. Masonic bodies are entered under the form heading FREE-
MASONS, 15 followed by place according to the following examples:

15 Outline of masonic organization.
"Blue Lodge. 1 ' lst-3rd degrees.

Local: Lodges having name or number, usually both.
State: Grand lodges.

Footnote continued on next page.

160

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 98C(2)

(1) Masons of a state or place in general, unorganized:

Freemasons. Massachusetts.
Freemasons. Galena, III.

(2) "Blue Lodge" bodies:

Freemasons. France. Grand Orient.
Freemasons. New York (State) Grand Lodge.
Freemasons. New Hampshire. 5th Masonic District.
Freemasons. Roxbury, Mass. Washington Lodge.
Freemasons. Lancaster, Pa. Lodge No. 43.

Such special headings as the following may be made when required:

Freemasons. Maryland. Grand Stewards 3 Lodge.
Freemasons. U. 5. Conference of Grand Masters, Cedar Rapids,
Iowa, 1918.

Footnote continued from preceding page.
U. S.: No central body.

Conventions and meetings of grand masters have been held, but these have

no official status.

Other countries: Grand lodges under various names.

* In toe United st ates some states are divided, for administrative purposes,
into numbered masonic districts; in England, into provinces. In Maryland and
New York is found a kind of executive committee of the Grand Lodge called
the Grand Stewards' Lodge.

Royal Arch Masons. 4th-7th degrees.

Local: Chapters with name or number like "Blue Lodge."

State: Grand chapters.

U. S. : General Grand Chapter.

States are subdivided as in the "Blue Lodges."

Other countries (England, Scotland, Canada): Chapters and grand chapters.
Royal and Select Masters. "Cryptic Masons." 8th-10th degrees.

In some states these degrees are conferred by the chapter.
Local: Councils.
State: Grand Council.
U. S.: General Grand Council.

Other countries (England, Canada) : Councils and grand councils.
Knights Templars. llth-13th degrees.
Local: Commanderies.
State: Grand Commandery.
U.S.: Grand Encampment.

These four bodies, the "Blue Lodge" (Freemasons proper), Royal Arch Masons,
Cryptic Masons, and Knights Templars, make up what is sometimes called the "York
Rite" as distinguished from the Scottish Rite.

Ancient Accepted Scottish Rite. 4th-33d degrees.

Local:

Northern Jurisdiction

Lodge of Perfection. 4th-14th degrees.

Council of Princes of Jerusalem. 15th- 16th degrees.

Chapter of Rose Croix. 17th-18th degrees.

Consistory of Sublime Princes of the Royal Secret. 19th-32d degrees.
Southern Jurisdiction

Lodge of Perfection. 4th-14th degrees.

Chapter of Rose Cross. 15th-18th degrees.

Council of Kadosh. 19th-30th degrees.

Consistory of Sublime Princes of the Royal Secret. 31st-32d degrees.
In the United States and Great Britain the lst-3d degrees are conferred only

by the "Blue Lodge." The 33d degree, Sovereign grand inspector general,

is conferred by the Supreme Council.
State:

In some stales are found Councils of deliberation; in some, Grand consis-
tories; some have no state organization.
U. S.:

No national body; instead there are two Supreme councils for the Northern

and Southern jurisdictions.
There are also two "clandestine" Supreme councils for the U. S, A., whose

publications can only be distinguished by noting carefully the names of

the officers.

161

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(3) Royal Arch Masons. For Chapter masonry add ROYAL ARCH
MASONS after name of place.

For unorganized Royal Arch Masons in general, or those of a state
or place:

Freemasons. Royal Arch Masons.
Freemasons. Boston. Royal Arch Masons,

For national, state or local bodies:

Freemasons. U. S. Royal Arch Masons. General Grand Chapter.
Freemasons. Maine. Royal Arch Masons. Grand Chapter.
Freemasons. Bridgewater, Mass. Royal Arch Masons. Harmony

Chapter.
Freemasons. Binghamton, IV. Y. Royal Arch Masons. Chapter

No. 139.

The exact name of the Grand Chapter varies slightly in the differ-
ent states, e.g., Virginia calls it the Supreme Grand Royal Arch
Chapter; some states say Grand Royal Arch Chapter, others the Grand
Chapter of Royal Arch Masons. Make headings uniform as indicated
and bring out any variations in the title or a note. Make cross refer-
ences when necessary.

(4) Royal and Select Masters. Treat bodies of Cryptic Masons
(Councils of Royal and Select Masters) like Royal Arch Masons.

Freemasons. U. S. Royal and Select Masters. General Grand

Council.

Freemasons. Maine. Royal and Select Masters. Grand Council.
Freemasons. Portland, Me. Royal and Select blasters. Portland

Council No. 4.

(5) Knights Templars. Treat Knights Templars like Royal Arch
Masons.

Freemasons. U. S. Knights Templars. Grand Encampment.
Freemasons. Maine. Knights Templars. Grand Commandery.
Freemasons. Boston. Knights Templars. Boston Commandery.

(6) Scottish Rite. Treat Scottish Rite bodies like Royal Arch
Masons.

Freemasons. U. S. Scottish Rite. Supreme Council for the

Southern Jurisdiction.
Freemasons. U. S. Scottish Rite. Supreme Council for the

Northern Jurisdiction.
Freemasons. Massachusetts. Scottish Rite. Council of Delibera-

tion.

Freemasons. Boston. Scottish Rite. Massachusetts Consistory.
Freemasons. Boston. Scottish Rite. Giles F. Yates Council of

Princes of Jerusalem.
Freemasons. Boston. Scottish Rite. Mount Olivet Chapter of

Rose Crowe.
Freemasons. Boston. Scottish Rite. Boston Lafayette Lodge of

Perfection.
Freemasons. District of Columbia. Scottish Rite. Robert de

Bruce Council, Knights Kadosh.

162

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

98D

(7) Other masonic and related bodies."* Enter the Eastern Star
and Mystic Shrine under their own names, not under Freemasons.
Their organization is like that of "Blue Lodges" and may be treated
in the same way.

For Negro bodies add (Negro)

Freemasons. District of Columbia. Grand Lodge (Negro)
Other related bodies may be treated like Royal Arch Masons.

Freemasons. District of Columbia. Masonic Veteran Association.
Freemasons. U. S. Red Cross of Constantine.

Schismatic grand lodges and other "clandestine" bodies may be
entered like regular bodies. The distinction can generally be brought
out in the name,

Freemasons. New York (State) St. John's Grand Lodge.

D. American secret societies are preferably to be entered under
that part of the name by which they are commonly known.

The following selected examples are offered merely as a guide to
form of entry. Libraries with much material in this class will need
to work out a scheme of organization for the various societies similar
to that given above for Freemasons.

Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order of.

Refer from

Benevolent and Protective Order of Elks.
B.P.O.E.

Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order of. Grand Forum.

Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order of. Missouri Elks Asso-
ciation.

Refer from
Missouri Elks Association.

Elks, Benevolent and Protective Order of. Augusta Lodge
No. 205.

Odd Fellows, Independent Order of.

Refer from

Independent Order of Odd Fellows.
LO.O.F.

Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Sovereign Grand Lodge.

Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Maryland, Grand Encamp-
ment.

Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Illinois. Grand Lodge.
Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Chatham Village, N. Y.
Morning Star Lodge, No. 128.

10 The Eastern Star, Mystic Shrine and Red Cross of Constantine draw their mem-
bers from Masons and their families, but have no official connection with masonic
bodies. There are other "rites" or bodies, such as the Rite of Mizraim, some of which
are recognized and some not. Colored grand lodges exist in many states but are not
recognized by most white masonic bodies. In some states, also, "clandestine" or non-
recognized lodges and grand lodges exist.

163

A.L.A, CATALOGING RULES

Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Daughters of Rebekah.

Refer from

Daughters of Rebekah.
Rebekah, Daughters of.
Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Patriarchs Militant.

Refer from
Patriarchs Militant.

Odd Fellows, Independent Order of. Patriarchs Militant. Ladies
Auxiliary.

99. Federated societies.

Enter local branches of federated societies under the name of the
general organization when this forms part of the name of the local
society. On the other hand, local branches having individual names
which do not include the name of the general organization are to be
entered as independent bodies according to the regular rule for so-
cieties, with a reference from the name of the general organization.

Daughters of the American Revolution. Massachusetts. Col.

Timothy Bigelow Chapter, Worcester.
International Musical Society. North, American Section,
but

Associazione dei musicologi italiani.
[which functions as the Italian section]

Refer from
International Musical Society. Italian Section.

Akademiia nauk SSSR. Dal'nevostochnyi filial, Vladivostok.

Refer front

Dal'nevostochnyi filial Akademii nauk SSSR., Vladivostok.
Phi Beta Kappa. New York Delta, Columbia University.

Refer from
Columbia University. Phi Beta Kappa.

Phi Beta Kappa. New York Theta, Cornell University.

Refer from

Cornell University. Phi Beta Kappa.
Psi Upsilon. Chi Chapter, Cornell University.
Psi Upsilon. Gamma Chapter, Amherst College.

100. Affiliated societies.

Enter affiliated societies under their own names without reference
from the larger organization with which they are affiliated.

American Association of Law Libraries.

[which is affiliated with the American Library Association]
Archaeological Society of Washington, Washington, D C
[which is affiliated with the Archaeological Institute of America]

101. Societies related to, but not an integral part of, a larger organization
A. College or university societies. Enter societies of students, of

faculty or of both under the name of the institution. Refer from the
name of the society.

For Greek letter societies see 99.

164

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 101B(2)

Columbia University. Philolexian Society.

Refer from

Philolexian Society, Columbia University.
Oxford. University. Oxford Union Society.

Refer from

Oxford Union Society.
Michigan. University. Michigan Union.

Refer from
Michigan Union.

Yale University. Elizabethan Club.

Refer from
Elizabethan Club of Yale University.

Michigan. University. Medical School. Victor C. Vaughan
Society.

Refer from
Victor C. Vaughan Society, Medical School, University of

Michigan.

B. Alumni organizations.

(1) Enter general alumni associations, funds, etc., under the name
of the school, college, or university.

Yale University. Society of the Alumni.

Refer from

Society of the Alumni of Yale University.
Smith College. Alumnae Association.

Refer from

Alumnae Association of Smith College.
Paris, ficole commerciale. Association des anciens eleves.

Refer from

Association des anciens eleves de 1'ficole commerciale de Paris*
Illinois College, Jacksonville. Alumni Fund Association.

Refer from

Illinois College Alumni Fund Association.
Columbia University. School of Law. Alumni Association.

Exception. When the association of alumni comprises a profes-
sional group better known under its name, entry may be made under
the name of the association, with reference from the name of the
institution.

Association des ingenieurs sortis de Ifcole de Liege.

Referfrom

Liege. Ecole des arts et manufactures et des mines. Asso-
ciation des ingenieurs sortis de Pficole de Liege.
Association des ingenieurs-techniciens de Charleroi.

Refer from

Charleroi. Universite de travail. Association des ingenieurs-
techniciens de Charleroi.

(2) Enter local associations of alumni under their own names.

Harvard Club of New York City.
Harvard Club of Rhode Island.

165

102 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

102. Institutions forming an integral part of a larger organization*

Enter the various faculties, colleges, professional schools, labora-
tories, libraries, chapels, museums, observatories, hospitals, shops,
etc., which form an integral part of a university or other institution
under the larger institution with the name of the particular entity
as subheading,

Oxford. University. Balliol College.

Refer from
Balliol College.

Yale University. Sheffield Scientific School

Refer from

Sheffield Scientific School.

Bologna. Universita degli studi. Scuola di j armada.
Toulouse. Universite. Faculte de droit.
Vatican* Biblioteca vaticana. Gabinetto numismatico.

Harvard University. Peabody Museum of American Archae-
ology and Ethnology.

Refer from
Peabody Museum of American Archaeology and Ethnology.

Chicago. University. Hull Physiological Laboratory.

Refer from
Hull Physiological Laboratory.

Berlin. Universitat. Institut fur Meereskunde.
Refer from

Institut fur Meereskunde, Berlin.

Berlin. Institut fur Meereskunde.
Paris. Universite. Bibliotheque.

Williams College. Thompson Memorial Chapel
Refer from

Thompson Memorial Chapel, Williamstown, Mass.

Williamstown, Mass. Thompson Memorial Chapel.
Michigan. University. Observatory.

Wisconsin. University. Washburn Observatory.

Refer from

Washburn Observatory, Madison, Wis.
Madison, Wis. Washburn Observatory.

Exceptions.

A. Exception may be made in the case of an observatory which
is much more likely to be looked for under its own name than under
that of the place or of the institution of which it forms a part.

Lick Observatory.

Refer from

California. University. Lick Observatory.
Mt. Hamilton, Calif. Lick Observatory.
Allegheny Observatory.

Refer from

Allegheny, Pa. Western University of Pennsylvania Alle-
gheny Observatory.

166

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 104

Yerkes Observatory.

Refer from

Chicago. University. Yerkes Observatory.
Williams Bay, Wis. Yerkes Observatory.

B. Colleges or professional schools whose names begin with a
proper noun or proper adjective may be entered under their own
names, particularly if they are situated at a distance from the uni-
versity of which they form a part, have merely a nominal connection
with it, or for other reasons are unlikely to be looked for under its
name. Cases in point are some of the American schools which, orig-
inally independent, have later affiliated with or become departments
of a university.

St. Ignatius College, Chicago.

Refer from

St. Louis University. St. Ignatius College.
Barnard College, New York.

Refer from
Columbia University. Barnard College,

103. Institutions located in suburbs later absorbed in a metropolitan
area.

When an institution located in a place (town or city) and identified
with it has been entered under the name of that place, the entry
may remain in that form until the place itself has become absorbed
in a larger unit and is known only as a subdivision of a metropolitan
area, e.g.,

Charlottenburg. Stadtische Volksbiicherei.
eventually

Berlin. Stadtbiicherei, Charlottenburg.

Entries are made under the earlier heading for the period when
Charlottenburg was an independent corporation; under the later head-
ing, from the date when it became a part of the Berlin metropolitan
area. The two headings are connected by references.

When churches and other institutions located in a section of a city
which was formerly independent have become identified with the
larger metropolis, they are entered under the latter. (Cf . 124C.)

Philadelphia. Trinity Lutheran Church, Germantown.

104. State and provincial institutions (U. S. and Canada).

Enter state and provincial institutions of the United States and
Canada under the. name of the state or province. The name of the
state or province is to be followed by a period and the next word
capitalized.

Illinois. Asylum for Insane Criminals, Chester.

Refer from

Asylum for Insane Criminals, Chester, 111.
Chester, HI. Asylum for Insane Criminals.

167

105 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Massachusetts. State Library, Boston.

Refer from

State Library of Massachusetts, Boston.
Boston. State Library of Massachusetts.
Ohio. State University, Columbus.

Refer from

Columbus. Ohio State University.
Manitoba. Deaf and Dumb Institute, Winnipeg.

Refer from

Deaf and Dumb Institute, Winnipeg.
Winnipeg. Deaf and Dumb Institute.

Ontario. Institution for the Education of the Blind, Brantford.

Refer from

Institution for the Education of the Blind, Brantford, Out.
Brantford, Ont. Institution for the Education of the Blind.
Texas. Sam Houston State Teachers' College, Huntsville.

Refer from

Sam Houston State Teachers' College, Huntsville, Tex.
Huntsville, Tex. Sam Houston State Teachers' College.

When the name of the institution begins with the name of the
city in which it is located, transpose the name of the city to the end
of the entry.

California. State Hospital, Stockton.

Refer from

Stockton, Calif. State Hospital.
California. Stockton State Hospital.

There are certain institutions which, although not strictly official,
i.e., maintained and controlled by the state, are, on account of their
names, most frequently looked for under the name of the state.
These may best be entered according to the above rule.

Pennsylvania. University.

Refer from

University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia.
Philadelphia. University of Pennsylvania.

Exception may be made in favor of entry under its own name for
a state institution having a distinctive name which gives no indica-
tion of its relation to the state.

Miami University, Oxford, Ohio.

Refer from

Ohio. Miami University, Oxford.
Oxford, Ohio. Miami University.

105. American state historical and agricultural societies.

Enter American state historical and agricultural societies under
the name of the state whether or not it is the first word of the name
of the society. If the corporate name begins with the name of the
state, the corporate form is to be followed; if not, the name of the
state is to be followed by a period.

Ohio State Archaeological and Historical Society.

168

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 106C

South Carolina. State Agricultural Society*

Refer from

State Agricultural Society of South Carolina.
but

Historical and Philosophical Society of Ohio,

[not a stale society]

Refer from
Ohio, Historical and Philosophical Society of.

Enter American state societies which are also state boards under
the name of the society, with reference from the state.

West Virginia Humane Society.

Refer from

West Virginia. State Board (West Virginia Humane Society)
106. Agricultural experiment stations.

A. Enter agricultural experiment stations of the United States
under the name of the state or territory in which they are organized.
Include in the heading the name of the place where the station is
located. Refer from the university or college of which the station may
form a department, from the name of the station, if it is at all dis-
tinctive, and from the name of the place where it is located.

New York. Agricultural Experiment Station, Geneva.

Refer from

Geneva, N. Y. Agricultural Experiment Station.
New York. Agricultural Experiment Station, Ithaca.

Refer from

Cornell University. Agricultural Experiment Station.
Ithaca, N. Y. Agricultural Experiment Station,
Puerto Rico. Federal Experiment Station, Mayaguez.

Refer from

Mayaguez, P. R. (City) Agricultural Experiment Station.
Mayaguez, P. R. (City) Federal Experiment Station.
Missouri. Fruit Experiment Station, Mountain Grove.

Refer from

Mountain Grove, Mo. Fruit Experiment Station.
Missouri, State Poultry Experiment Station, Mountain Grove.

Refer from
Mountain Grove, Mo. State Poultry Experiment Station.

B. Enter Canadian agricultural experiment stations under CANADA.
Include the name of the place in the heading.

Canada. Experimental Station, Harrow, Ont

Refer from
Harrow, Ont. Experimental Station.

C. Enter foreign agricultural experiment stations according to the
general rule for institutions. (92)

Gembloux, Belgium. Station agronomique de llStat.

Refer from
Belgium. Ministers de I* agriculture. Station agronomique de

l'6tat, Gembloux.
Belgium. Station agronomique de Tfitat, Gembloux.

169

107 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Santiago de las Vegas, Cuba. Estacion Central Agronomics.

Refer from
Cuba. Secretaria de Agriculture Estacidn Central Agro-

ndmica.

Cuba. Estacion Central Agronomica, Santiago de las Vegas.
Bhadgaon, India. Khandesh Experimental Farm.

Refer from
Khandesh Experimental Farm, Bhadgaon.

107. Public schools.

Enter all elementary and secondary schools supported by taxation
under the name of the place and refer from the name of the school
if distinctive.

New York. Morris High School.

Refer from

Morris High School, New York.
Minneapolis. Lincoln School.

Refer from

Lincoln School, Minneapolis.
Brooklyn. Public School 48.
Paris. Lycee Janson-de-Sailly.

Refer from

Lycee Janson-de-Sailly, Paris.
Janson-de-Sailly, Lycee, Paris.
Leipzig. Thomasschule.

Refer from

Thomasschule, Leipzig.
Edinburgh. Sciennes School.

Refer from
Sciennes School, Edinburgh.

For the entry of institutions of higher learning see 104.
108. Private and endowed schools.

A. Enter American and British private and endowed schools under
the name when this begins with a proper noun or proper adjective,
otherwise under the place.

Balliol School, Utica, N. Y.

Refer from

Utica, N. Y. Balliol School.
Copeland School, Saratoga Springs, N. Y.

Refer from

Saratoga Springs, N. Y. Copeland School.
St. Peter's College, Westminster.

Refer from

Westminster. St. Peter's College.
Westminster School, London.
London. Westminster School.
but

Washington, D. C. National Cathedral School for Girls.

with references from

Cathedral School for Girls, Washington. D. C.
National Cathedral School for Girls, Washington D C

170

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

110

When a school is known only by the name of the proprietor, enter
under his name.

Chesborough (A. J.) school.

B. Enter foreign private schools under the place, with reference
from the name of the school or the proprietor.

Oslo. Nissens Skole.

Refer from
Nissens Skole, Oslo.
Milan. Istituto private Kobiati.

Refer from

Istituto private Robiati, Milan.
Robiati, Ambrogio (see also)

109. Indian schools (U. S.)

A. Enter Indian schools of the U. S. Indian Service and denomina-
tional and private schools which receive government support, under
the name of the place where located. Refer from the name of the
school. For information and lists of schools cf. reports of the Com-
missioner of Indian Affairs.

Carlisle, Pa. United States Indian School.
Pipestone, Minn. Indian Training School.
Phoenix, Ariz. United States Indian Vocational School.
Morris, Minn. Indian School.

B. Private Indian schools not a part of the U. S. Indian Service
and not receiving government support are to be entered according
to the rule for American private schools. (108)

110. Radio stations.

Enter radio stations, regardless of their ownership or sponsorship,
under the name of the place in which they are located, followed by
the name of the station. If the name is limited to call letters, the
designation RADIO STATION, or its foreign equivalent, precedes the
call letters. Refer from the name or call letters.

Cincinnati. Radio station TVKRC.

Refer from

WKRC (Radio station) Cincinnati.
Ames, Iowa. Radio station WOI.

Refer from

WOI (Radio station) Ames, Iowa.
Vatican (City) Stazione radio HVJ.

Refer from

HVJ (Stazione radio) Vatican (City)
Guatemala (City) Radio Nacional.

Refer from

Radiodifusoro Nacional de Guatemala.
Rabat, Morocco. Radio Maroc.

Refer from
Radio Maroc, Kabat, Morocco.

171

Ill A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

111. University and union league clubs.

Enter university and union league clubs under the place where
they are located, with reference from the name.

Washington, D. C. University Club.

Refer jrom
University Club, Washington, D. C.

Chicago. Union League Club.

Refer from
Union League Club of Chicago.

112. Volunteer fire companies and associations.

Enter volunteer fire companies and associations under the name of
the place with reference from the name of the company or association.

Philadelphia. Hibernia Fire Company.

Refer from
Hibernia Fire Company, Philadelphia.

Chambersburg, Pa. Friendship Fire Company.

Refer from
Friendship Fire Company, Chamber sburg, Pa.

Gloucester, Mass. Steam Fire Association.

Refer from
Steam Fire Association, Gloucester, Mass.

For treatment of the official fire departments of cities or towns
see 72.

113. Mercantile library associations.

Enter mercantile library associations, library companies, etc., under
the place, with reference from the name of the association.

Boston. Mercantile Library Association.

Refer from
Mercantile Library Association of Boston.

Philadelphia. Mercantile Library Company.

Refer from
Mercantile Library Company, Philadelphia.

114. Gilds.

Enter gilds under the name of the place, with the name of the
company as subheading.

London. Merchant Taylors' Company.

Refer from
Merchant Taylors' Company, London.

Dunfermline, Scot. Weavers' Incorporation.

Refer from

Weavers' Incorporation, Dunfermline.
Sheffield, England. Cutlers' Company.

Refer from
Cutlers' Company, Sheffield.

172

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 116A(2)

Religious Societies and Institutions

115. Churches not organized within national bounds.

For ancient churches, the Eastern churches (including the inde-
pendent units of the Orthodox Eastern communion) and all churches
not organized as corporate bodies within national bounds, adopt the
most commonly accepted English form of name as the official entry,
and use this form for all subject headings.

Moravian Church.
Armenian Church.
Orthodox Eastern Church.
Catholic Church. 17

116. Catholic and Eastern churches.
A. Local ecclesiastical units.

(1) Enter ecclesiastical provinces, archdioceses, and other regional
districts of Catholic and Eastern churches under the name of the see
city, or region for which they are named, adding, in parentheses, the
type of jurisdiction, followed by the designation of the office or board.

Baltimore (Ecclesiastical Province)

Danzig (Diocese) Bishop.

Harrisburg, Pa. (Diocese)

Philadelphia (Archdiocese) Diocesan Board.

If two or more jurisdictions have come to exist in the same city,
add a distinguishing adjective denoting rite.

Pittsburgh (Diocese, Catholic Byzantine)
Pittsburgh (Diocese, Catholic)

(2) Enter the historic patriarchates under the name of the patri-
archal city, adding in parentheses the type of jurisdiction, adding also a
distinguishing adjective denoting rite where necessary.

Alexandria, Egypt (Patriarchate)
Alexandria, Egypt (Patriarchate, Coptic)
Antioch (Patriarchate)

[Used for early material]
Antioch (Patriarchate, Syrian Jacobite)
Antioch (Patriarchate, Orthodox Melkite)
Antioch (Patriarchate, Maronite)
Antioch (Patriarchate, Catholic Syrian)
Antioch and all the East (Patriarchate, Catholic Melkite)

Disregard patriarchates that are purely titular.
Lisbon (Archdiocese)

"In English and American Protestant usage, Roman Catholic Church is the more
usual and in many cases the legal designation. The Library of Congress uses the
shorter form, Catholic Church, a designation preferred by Catholics themselves, and
this form, having been established on the printed cards, is consistently followed in
these rules.

173

116A(3) _ _____ _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(3) Enter modern patriarchates, the patriarch of which is the
ecclesiastical head of a national church (cf . 116B (2) ) under the
name of the church, followed by the title (in English) ,

Orthodox Eastern Church, Russian. Patriarch.
Orthodox Eastern Church, Rumanian. Patriarch.
Orthodox Eastern Church, Yugoslavian. Patriarch.
Refer from the patriarchal city.
Moscow (Patriarchate)

see
Orthodox Eastern Church, Russian. Patriarch.

B. Orthodox Eastern Church.

(1) Enter those autocephalous units of the Orthodox Eastern
Church which are continuations of ancient patriarchates or arch-
dioceses under the name of the patriarchate or archdiocese.

Alexandria, Egypt (Patriarchate, Orthodox)
Cyprus (Archdiocese) 1 *

(2) Enter those autocephalous units of the Orthodox Eastern
Church which are organized on a national basis under the name of
the church followed by the adjective form of the national name. 19

Orthodox Eastern Church, Russian.
Orthodox Eastern Church, Greek.

(3) Enter the Basilian monastery at Mt. Sinai, which has inde-
pendent status as a church of the Byzantine rite, under the heading
appropriate to it as a monastery.

Sinai. Saint Catharine (Basilian monastery)

C. Lesser Eastern churches. As the lesser Eastern churches are
organized as patriarchal jurisdictions, enter all official publications
emanating from the patriarchate under the name of the patriarchate. 20
Use the popular name of the church as the author heading only where
a form subheading is used.

Alexandria, Egypt (Patriarchate, Coptic)

[For an official document issued by the Coptic Patriarchate of
Alexandria]

Coptic Church. Liturgy and ritual
Coptic morning service for the Lord's day

D. Eastern churches in communion with Rome. Enter Eastern
churches in. communion with Rome under CATHOLIC CHURCH, adding
subheading designating rite and, in the case of the Byzantine Catholics,

18 Now demoted to a diocese.

^ 8 tyP i? f entry r, would be * rect entr y mder the national
C HURCH, BTJLGARIAN CHURCH (ORTHODOX), GREEK CHURCH (SYNOD

totRU lt^ a ^ Cted b ? ^ e "**(. because in all these cases the claim
to the title is based on succession from the historic patriarchates of the early church.

174

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS il6F

adding to the name of the rite the adjective denoting the country or
language group. *

Catholic Church. Armenian rite.
Ethiopia rite.
Syrian rite.
Byzantine rite.
Byzantine rite (Bulgarian)
Byzantine rite (Russian)

E. Ecclesiastical documents.

(1) Enter early documents, whether proceeding from general or
local officials, directly under the name of the person with added
entry, if necessary, under the name of the church body or local
ecclesiastical unit. This applies to all documents issued by the Church
fathers 21 which as a rule need no added entry under the name of the
church or local ecclesiastical unit.

Clemens Romanus.
Epistle of Saint Clement, Bishop of Rome . . .

Joannes I, Patriarch of Antioch, d. 648.

Joannis Episcopi Antiocheni ad Cyrillum Alexandrinum epis-
tola nmto Concilio Ephesino scripta.

I. Antioch (Patriarchate)

(2) Enter post-patristic official Catholic and Eastern ecclesiastical
documents under the name of the church, or the local ecclesiastical unit.

Catholic Church.

Mainz (Archdiocese)

Etchmiadzin (Armenian catholicate)

F. Liturgies. Enter liturgies of the Eastern and Latin rites, includ-
ing the early forms, under the name chosen for the church, adding
the form subheading LITURGY AND RITUAL. Use this subheading with-
out modification for collections of two or more books. For collections
containing texts translated into a nonliturgical language, add adjec-
tive denoting language. 22

Orthodox Eastern Church. Liturgy and ritual.
Orthodox Eastern Church. Liturgy and ritual English.
Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual.
Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. English.

21 Limit the use of the term Church fathers to the time of Gregory the Great for
Latin fathers and to the time of John of Damascus for Greek fathers and the fathers
of the lesser Eastern churches.

22 The liturgical language of the Catholic Church in the West (Patriarchate of
Rome) is Latin and for that reason the term Latin rite is used. There are six dis-
tinct rites in Latin, of which the Roman, Ambrosian, and Mozarabic are still in use;
whereas the African, Gallican, and the so-called Celtic rites are defunct. The Roman
rite is extant in four forms: (1) Early pre-Tridentine, (2) Standardized revision by
Pope Pius v authorized for general use, (3) Forms in use by various monastic orders
called Regular use, (4) Forms which have grown up about certain local churches
called Local use.

175

116F(1) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(1) Enter specific service books of the Orthodox Eastern Church,
either in Greek or in any other liturgical language, under the head-
ing ORTHODOX EASTERN CHURCH. LITURGY AND RITUAL, followed by
the name of the book preferably in Greek. For translations into
liturgical or nonliturgical languages add adjective denoting language.

Orthodox Eastern Church. Liturgy and ritual. Leitourgikon**
Orthodox Eastern Church. Liturgy and ritual. Menaion. English.

(2) For the lesser Eastern churches, use the form which seems
to be the best specific designation for the particular book, either the
vernacular, Latin, or an English translation.

Armenian Church. Liturgy and ritual. Dagharan.

(3) Enter Eastern liturgies edited for use in Eastern churches in
communion with Rome under the name established for the particular
rite with subheading LITURGY AND RITUAL. Make added entry under
the name of the corresponding non-Catholic group using this same
liturgy; refer from CATHOLIC CHURCH. LITURGY AND RITUAL. L NAME

OF RITE]

Catholic Church. Armenian rite. Liturgy and ritual. Mystery

manual of the sacred oblation.

Liturgia armena transportata in italiano sino dal 1816 cura
del p. Gabriele Avedichian.

I. Armenian Church. Liturgy and ritual. Mystery manual of the
sacred oblation.

with reference:
Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Armenian rite

see
Catholic Church. Armenian rite. Liturgy and ritual.

(4) Enter separate books of the Latin rite 24 (all rites in Latin or
Roman rite only) under the heading CATHOLIC CHURCH. LITURGY
AND RITUAL, f ollowed by the name of the book,

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Missal.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Memoriale rituum.

(5) Enter collections of Latin service books of the Roman rite used
in a specific locality under the usual heading, CATHOLIC CHURCH.
LITURGY AND RITUAL, adding the name of the place. Refer from the
place with subheading LITURGY AND RITUAL.

,, 23 T^ Euch ,f r S ti< i litu _ rgy of th t Variou 5 Eastern rites is frequently designated as
the liturgy." Prefer, however, the specific name of the liturgical book if it can be

T^^^ ed r JT^ ? 18 ^ foun< i fa Jeannett * M. Lynn, An alternative
cZottt/teation for Cathohc books (Chicago, American Library Association, 1937).

* Since the Council of Trent, the basic official liturgical books have been the
Missal, tiie Breviary, the Ritual, the Pontifical, the Ceremonial of bishops, the Martyr!
ology, the Memoriale rituum and the Caeremoniale Romanum (for papal ceremonies

176

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 116F(6)

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Salisbury.
The use of Sarum . . .

Refer from

Salisbury (Diocese) Liturgy and ritual.
Sarum us a. 2 -"

For individual service books make added entry with the place as
second subheading.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Missal.
Missale ad usum insignis ecclesiae Eboracencis
i. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. York.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Ordines.-*
Ordinale Exon . . .
I. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Exeter.

Exception. In entering modern directories for use in a specific
locality include both the name of the book and the name of the place
in the heading, and make added entry with the place as second sub-
heading. 27

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual Directory. Treves (Diocese)
Directorium Dioecesis Treverensis; seu, Ordo divini officii

recitandi missaeque celebrandae . . .

i. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Treves (Diocese)

(6) Enter collections of Latin liturgical books of the Roman rite
for a monastic order under the usual heading, CATHOLIC CHURCH.
LITURGY AND RITUAL, followed by the name of the order. Refer from
the name of the order with subheading LITURGY AND RITUAL.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Benedictine.

Refer from
Benedictines. Liturgy and ritual

For individual books, make added entry with the order as sec-
ond subheading.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual Breviary.

Breviarium Romanum ad usum Ordinis Carmelitarum Dis-
calcatorum . . .

i. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Carmelite.

Exception. In entering directories for the use of a monastic order,
include the name of the book and the name of the order in the heading.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual Directory. Benedictine.

with added entry:
i. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Benedictine.

20 These local variations of the Roman rite are frequently called rites, but are more
correctly designated by the term use.

26 The subheading ORDINES is used for older compilations of texts giving liturgical
directions (often including prayers and worship forms) variously called ordo, ordJLnes,
ordines romani, ordinarium, consuetudines, etc.

^The subheading DIRECTORY is used for the annual official book of directions for
priests, the Ordo divini officii recitandi.

177

116F(7) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

For local monastic service books, make one added entry with the
order as second subheading and another with place as second sub-
heading.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Missal.

The missal of S. Augustine's Abbey, Canterbury.

r. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Benedictine, n. Catholic
Church. Liturgy and ritual. Canterbury.

(7) Enter collections of Latin liturgical books in a rite other than
Roman under the usual heading, CATHOLIC CHURCH. LITURGY AND
RITUAL, followed by the name of the rite.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Ambrosian rite.

Refer -from
Ambrosian rite.
Milan, Liturgy of.
Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual Milan (see also)

For individual service books, make added entry with the rite as
second subheading.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Breviary.
Breviarium Ambrosianum . . .
i. Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. Ambrosian rite.

(8) Enter collections of Latin liturgical books translated into any
language under the usual heading, CATHOLIC CHURCH. LITURGY AND
RITUAL, followed by the name of the language.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. English.

For translations of individual service books, add the name of the
language to the heading and make added entry for the language.

Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual Breviary. English.

with added entry:
Catholic Church. Liturgy and ritual. English.

117. Canon law (Catholic and Eastern churches).

These rules cover the canon law of Catholic and Eastern churches.
The documents containing the canon law of such Protestant churches
as use this term are entered under the name of the denomination
concerned, using such subheadings as the circumstances require.

A. General principles.

(1) The decrees, canons, statutes, etc., of individual councils and
synods are entered under the heading appropriate to the council or
synod involved. (Cf. 119.)

(2) The decrees, etc., issued by individual executives (archbishops,
bishops, metropolitans, popes, etc.) are entered under the name of
the official in the early period and under the name of the office in
the later period. (Cf. 116E.)

(3) Single laws, constitutions, etc., governing a particular body

178

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 117D(3)

are entered under the name of the body with the name of the law,
constitution, etc., as subheading.

(4) Compilations of unknown source and having a specific name
are entered according to the rules for anonymous classics. (33)

(5) Compilations known under the name of the individual com-
piler are entered under his name, but if the compilation is made by
an executive in his official capacity, enter under the office.

(6) Compilations that have a particular name and are in force
in a particular body are entered under the name of the body with the
name of the compilation as subheading.

(7) Miscellaneous compilations of laws in force in any particular
body are entered as form headings under the name of the body. Such
form headings, however, are not to be used as added entries to assemble
texts that may be entered under other headings.

B. Early undivided church. Enter documents considered to be
sources of canon law as anonymous classics under their conventional
name, unless they are the compilations of individuals or the decrees
of early councils. For councils of the early church see 119A.

Apostolic cations.
Apostolic constitutions.
Didascalia apostolorum.

but

Hippolytus, Saint, ft. 217-235.
Traditio apostolica.

C. Eastern churches.

(1) Enter miscellaneous compilations of law of the Orthodox Eastern
Church, the Coptic and other separate Eastern churches under the
name of the church followed by the form heading CANONS, NOMO-

CANONS, DECREES, ETC.

Orthodox Eastern Church. Canons, nomocanons, decrees, etc.

(2) Enter single and collected laws, that can be given a more
definite treatment, in accordance with the general principles set forth
above (117A (1-6) .)

D. Catholic Church. Enter collections of canons, decretals, con-
stitutions, bullaria, etc., of the Catholic Church as follows:

(1) Collections other than those specified in the following para-
graphs, and not limited to the decretals, constitutions, etc., of a single
pontificate under

Catholic Church. Canons, decretals, etc.

(2) Editions of the Decretum of Gratian under
Gratianus, the Canonist, d, before 116D.

(3) Editions of the Decretales ("Compilatio nova/' "Extrava-
gantes") of Gregory ix under

Catholic Church. Pope, 1227-1241 (Cregorius IX)

179

117D(4) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(4) Editions of the Decretales ("Liber sextus") compiled by order
of Boniface vm under

Catholic Church. Pope, 1294-1303 (Bonifacius VIII)

(5) Editions of the Decretales ("Liber Septimus," "Clementinae")
of Clemens v, promulgated by John xxn, under

Catholic Church. Pope, 1305-1314 (Clemens V)

(6) Editions of the Decretales extravagantes ("Extravagantes")
of John xxn under

Catholic Church. Pope, 1316-1334 (Johannes XXII)

(7) Editions of combinations of (2) -(6), first published Rome,
1582, by authority of the "Correctores Romani," under

Catholic Church. Corpus juris canonici.

Refer from
Corpus juris canonici.

(8) Editions of the new official codification promulgated by Bene-
dictus xv, 1917, taking effect May 19, 1918, under

Catholic Church. Codex juris canonici

Refer from
Codex juris canonici.

Special parts, extracts, selections, etc., from the Codex, dealing
with particular subjects are entered under

Catholic Church. Codex juris canonici [inclusive numbers of
the canons and title of the book (Liber) or other subdivisions
(Pars, Sectio, Titulus, Caput, Articulus) as the case may be],

Catholic Church. Codex juris canonici. C. 726-1551: De rebus. '

Catholic Church. Codex juris canonici. C. 731-1153: De sacra-
mentis.

Catholic Church. Codex juris canonici. C. 1395-1405: De pro-
hibitione librorum.

(9) For editions of the constitutions, decretals, etc., of a single
pontificate see 118A.

(10) Editions of the partially spurious collection attributed to Isi-
dorus Mercator (9th century) with genuine decretals in the form of
the Collectio "Hispana" under

Decretales pseudo-Isidorianae.

For collections prior to Pseudo-Isidor, cf. Friedrich Maassen,
Geschichte der Quellen und der Literatur des canonischen Rechts
(Gratz, Leuschner & Lubensky, 1870).

118. Catholic Church (special rules).
A. Pope and Holy See.

(1) Enter under CATHOLIC CHURCH with subheading POPE (1)

180

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 118C(1)

ecclesiastical documents proceeding from the Holy See; 28 (2) docu-
ments proceeding from the pope alone, e.g., collections of bulls, en-
cyclicals, apostolic letters, etc,

Catholic Church. Pope.
Magnum bullarium Romanum . . .

(2) Enter collections of documents issued during a single pontificate
under CATHOLIC CHURCH. POPE followed by the dates of the pon-
tificate, and, in parentheses, the name of the pope.

Catholic Church. Pope, 1585-1590 (SixtusV)

Bullarii; sive, Collectionis constitutiomim annis quattuor sui
pontificatus editarum a S.D.N. Sixto Quinto . . .

(3) Enter single bulls, encyclicals, and other documents as in the
preceding rule, with the addition in the heading of the first Latin
word 29 or words of the text by which it is officially known, and the
date of issue in parentheses.

Catholic Church. Pope, 1846-1878 (Pius IX) Ineffabilis Deus
(8 Dec. 1854)

B. Congregations, etc. Enter under CATHOLIC CHURCH with sub-
heading for the congregation, tribunal, or office, documents issuing
from such sources. Use the Latin form of name as officially used in
the Acta apostolicae sedis, omitting the word sacra which is a pre-
fix of honor.

Catholic Church. Congregatio Sacrorum Rituum.
Catholic Church. Poenitentiaria Apostolica.

For particular documents officially cited by first words of text, the
first Latin word or words of the text may be included in the heading,
followed by the date of issue in parentheses.

Catholic Church. Congregatio Consistorialis. Maxima cura
(20 Aug. 1910)

C. Concordats.

(1) Enter collections of concordats, "modus vivendi," or other
agreements concluded between the Holy See and secular governing
bodies under the heading CATHOLIC CHURCH with subheading TREATIES,
ETC. Refer from CATHOLIC CHURCH. CONCORDATS. Make added entry
for compiler.

Catholic Church. Treaties, etc.

Raccolta di concordat! su materie ecclesiastiche tra la Santa
Sede e le autorita civili.

i. Mercati, Angelo, comp.

28 The term Holy See embraces the pope and the congregations, tribunals, and offices
of the Roman Curia.

30 Occasionally the pope uses a language other than Latin; use the original language
in the heading.

181

118C(2) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

(2) Enter single concordats or agreements under the heading
CATHOLIC CHURCH. TREATIES, ETC., adding the dates of the pontificate
and, in parentheses, the name of the pope. Make added entry for the
secular party or parties to the agreement under the name of the
country with subheading TREATIES, ETC. (Cf. 88.) Make added entry
or, preferably, see also reference under the heading CATHOLIC CHURCH.
POPE, followed by the dates of the pontificate and, in parentheses, the
name of the pope.

Catholic Church. Treaties, etc., 1922-1939 (Pius XI)
Die Lateran- Vertrage zwischen dem Heiligen Stuhl und Italien

vom 11. Februar 1929 . . .
i. Italy. Treaties, etc., 1900- (Victor Emmanuel m)

Catholic Church. Pope, 1922-1939 (Pius XI)

see also
Catholic Church. Treaties, etc., 1922-1939 (Pius XI)

(3) Enter early concordats arranged between bishops and secular
authorities under the heading for the ecclesiastical jurisdiction author-
izing the concordat, with added entry for the secular governmental
body which is party to the contract.

D. Indulgences.

(1) Enter indulgences granted by the pope under CATHOLIC CHURCH.
POPE, in accordance with rule 118A.

(2) Enter indulgences granted by authorities other than the pope
under the name of the jurisdiction in which they are applicable in
accordance with rule 116E (2) .

(3) Enter indulgences granted by cardinals applicable in their
"titular churches" in Rome under the name of the church with added
entry under the name of the cardinal.

Borne (City) San Nicola in Carcere (Church)

(4) Enter indulgences granted by cardinals applicable to ecclesi-
astical societies or institutions not within their jurisdiction under the
name of the cardinal.

Mundelein, George William, Cardinal, 1872-1939.

(5) Enter collections of indulgenced prayers (except those col-
lections which are issued by the Roman Poenitentiaria Apostolica)
under the compiler.

Seebock, Phffibert, 1839-1914, comp.

Vollstandiges Ablass-Gebetbuch ausschliesslich aus authen-
tischen, Ablassgebeten zusammengesteflt von P. Philibert See-
bock . . .

(6) Enter collections of indulgenced prayers issued by the Roman
Poenitentiaria Apostolica, under the heading CATHOLIC CHURCH.
POENITENTIARIA APOSTOLICA.

182

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 119C

Catholic Church. Poenitentiaria Apostolica.

. . .Collection of prayers and good works to which the Roman
pontiffs have attached indulgences in favor of all the faithful or
of a certain group of persons, 1899 to 1928; translated and edited
from the official versions by Rev. Richard E. Power . . . under
authority from the Sacred Apostolic Penitentiary

At head of title: Official Vatican manual of indulgenced gravers
I. Power, Richard E., tr. '

119. Councils and synods.

A. Enter documents proceeding from early councils of the undi-
vided church, from all general or ecumenical councils both of the
Latin and Eastern churches and from all early patriarchal, primatial
and national councils and local synods prior to the Council of Trent,
under the name by which the council or synod is known, inverting the
place name if necesary so that place name is the entry word. Add
to this the date of the meeting and place where held if place is not
included in the heading.

Nicaea, Council of, 325,
Trent, Council of, 1545-1563.
Vatican Council, 1872.
Elvira, Synod of, ca. 300.

B. Enter provincial councils and archdiocesan and diocesan synods
of Catholic ecclesiastical administrative areas under the heading used
for the area, adding subheading COUNCIL for ecclesiastical provinces
and SYNOD for archdioceses and dioceses.

Paderborn (Arch-diocese) Synod, 1688.
Mainz (Ecclesiastical province) Council, 1540.
Westminster (Ecclesiastical province) Council, 1852.

If the synod is not held in the see of the ordinary the name of the
place is added to the entry after the date and reference is made from
the place in which the synod was held.

Leavenworth, Kan. (Diocese) Synod. 3d, 1922, Kansas City,
Kan.

C* Enter plenary councils under the uniform heading CATHOLIC
CHURCH nsr [NAME OF COUNTRYJ with subheading PLENARY COUNCIL
followed by the place and date of meeting. Refer from the name of
the place.

Catholic Church iu the U. S, Plenary Council. 1st, Baltimore,

1852.
Refer from

Baltimore, Council of, 1852.

Baltimore, Plenary Council of, 1852.
Catholic Church in Spanish America. Plenary Council. 1st,

Rome, 1899.
Refer from

Rome, Council of, 1899.

Rome, Plenary Council of, 1899.

183

120 _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

120. Protestant denominations.

A. Denominations with corporate names. Enter modern denomina-
tional bodies organized within national bounds, including the autono-
mous units o the Church of England, under the latest corporate
name* in the vernacular of the country. 31

Church of England.

Nippon Seikokwai.

Nederlandsche Hervormde Kerk.

figlises reformees de France.

Svenska kyrkan.

Reformed Church in America.

Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A.

Protestant Episcopal Church in the U. S. A.

Church in Wales.

When two or more denominations have identical names, add, in
parentheses, some distinguishing word or phrase.

Church of God (Adventist)

Church of God (Apostolic)

Church of God (New Dunkers)

Church of God (Headquarters at Anderson, Ind.)

Friends, Society of (Hicksite)

Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A. (Old school)

Presbyterian Church in the U. S, A. (New school)

B. Denominations without corporate names (state or national
churches). Enter Protestant denominational bodies organized as state
or national churches but without a distinctive corporate name under
a conventional form of name in the vernacular of the country.

This applies to:

(1) Swiss cantonal churches (French and German cantons) .

figlise nationale de Geneve L de NeucMtel, etc. 3
Evangelisch-reformierte Kirche des Kantons Aargau c Berne,
etc. :

(2) German state churches prior to their reorganization into more
or less self-governing bodies in the nineteenth century.

Evangelische Landeskirche in Nassau-Saarbriicken.
Evangelisch-Iutherische Landeskirche in Reuss ( Jiingere Lime)
Evangelisch-reformierte Landeskirche in Lippe.

C. Denominational bodies congregational in polity.

(1) Enter general and regional organizations of denominational
bodies congregational in polity under their own names.

tlT ?f^ pt j? nai cas f . an inverted form of heading has been used in order

f ^ m?tlV M W ^ rd A m ^ e name ^ entr y word ' *. Friends, Society of;
ln North America, General Eldership of.

may r P^ffe* ** English form for Oriental and East European

; r if " A SC H Pal Ch T- Ch , ln Ja ?^ ^^ of Ni PP n Seikokwai, butthe
vernacular is the better practice for scholarly collections.

184

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 120D(2)

American Unitarian Association.

General Council of Congregational Christian Churches.

Congregational Union of England and Wales.

Northern Baptist Convention.

Southern Baptist Convention.

Central Eastern Swedish Baptist Conference.

(2) Enter state, provincial, and lesser Baptist, Congregational, and
Unitarian 32 local organizations as subheadings under the form head-
ings BAPTISTS, CONGREGATIONAL CHURCHES, UNITARIAN CHURCHES, sub-
divided by country or state. In each case refer from the name of the
local organization.

Baptists. Pennsylvania. Philadelphia Baptist Association.

Refer from
Philadelphia Baptist Association.

Baptists. Alabama. Colored Bethlehem Baptist Association.

Refer from

Colored Bethlehem Baptist Association.
Bethlehem Baptist Association (Negro)

Primitive Baptists. Texas. Salem Association of Primitive
Baptists.

Refer from

Salem Association of Primitive Baptists.

Congregational Churches in Connecticut. South Consociation
of Litchfield County.

Refer from
South Consociation of Litchfield County.

Congregational Churches in Oregon. Conference.

Refer from
Oregon Congregational Conference.

But enter local organizations of the Society of Friends as sub-
headings under the name of the society.

Friends, Society of. Philadelphia Yearly Meeting.

D. Legislative and administrative departments and organizations,

(1) Enter the legislative and administrative departments and
organizations of a denominational body under the name of the
denomination.

Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A. General Assembly.

Methodist Episcopal Church. General Conference.

Church of England. National Assembly.

Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A. Board of Foreign Missions.

Protestant Episcopal Church in the U, S. A. National Council.

(2) Enter societies functioning solely as a department of or through
the denominational body as subheading under the name of the denomi-
nation, or of the department to which they are subsidiary. (Cf. 128.)

32 The Library of Congress enters Unitarian local bodies directly under their own
names.

185

120E _ _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Evangelical Lutheran Syned of East Pennsylvania. Women's

Home and Foreign Missionary Society.
Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A. Synodical of South Caro-

lina.

\A women's organization]
Protestant Episcopal Church in the U. S, A. National Council.

Women's Auxiliary.

E. Local administrative units. Enter local administrative units into
which a denominational body divides itself, variously known as
provinces, dioceses, synods, presbyteries, classes, conferences, missions,
missionary districts, etc., under a heading consisting of the name of
the denomination followed by the name of the administrative unit in
the plural, followed by the locality. 33

Church of England in Canada. Dioceses. Huron.

Protestant Episcopal Church in the U. S. A. Dioceses. New

York.

Presbyterian Church in the U.S. A. Synods. New York.
Presbyterian Church in the U. S. A. Presbyteries. Pittsburgh.
Methodist Episcopal Church. Cou/ereTices. Baltimore.
Evangelical Lutheran Ministerium of Pennsylvania and Ad-

jacent States. Conferences. Reading
Evangelical Lutheran Synod of Iowa and Other States. Dis-

tricts. Northern District.

Reformed Church in the U. S. Classes. Eastern Ohio.
Methodist Episcopal Church. Missions and missionary confer-

ences. New Mexico Spanish Mission.

Exceptions.

(1) Enter dioceses of the Church of England in Great Britain (in
conformity with the usage for the Catholic Church) under the name
of the see city with the qualification DIOCESE, or PROVINCE, added
in parentheses.

London (Diocese)
York (Province)

(2) Enter overseas dioceses not organized into autonomous churches
under the heading CHURCH OF ENGLAND with subheading DIOCESES,
followed by the word OVERSEAS in parentheses and the name of
the locality.

Church of England. Dioceses (Overseas) Bermuda.

(3) The Lutheran synods that entered and now comprise the United
Lutheran Church in America are entered under their own names,
because of their long independent history and their earlier member-
ship in larger bodies.

Lutheran Synod of Pennsylvania and Adjacent
lUinois Synod of the United Lutheran Church in America.

Fn^Pr?^ exception for the dioceses of the Protestant

Episcopal Church in the U. S. A., using the following form:

Protestanr Episcopal Chwch in the U. S. A. New York (Diocese)

186

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 122

F. Local ecclesiastical councils. Enter councils called by local
Baptist, Congregational, Unitarian, etc., churches, or at the request
of a local church by a local association of churches, under the name
of the church or association issuing the call for the council.

Brooklyn. Plymouth Church. Advisory Council, 1876.

Proceedings of the Advisory Council of Congregational
churches and ministers called by the Plymouth Church of
Brooklyn, N. Y., and held in Brooklyn from the 15th to the
24th of February, 1876.

G. Creeds, hymnals, and service books.

(1) Enter creeds, hymnals, and service books issued by a local
church or for its use under the name of the church.

Boston. King's Chapel.

Liturgy collected for the use of King's ChapeL

(2) Enter creeds, hymnals, and service books issued by denomina-
tional bodies under the name of the body. Add the name of the creed
or hymnal in the heading only if essential for the arrangement of
large groups of material; the name of a service book, if added, follows
the subheading LITURGY AND RITUAL.

Presbyterian Church in the U. S, A.

The hymnal . . .

United Lutheran Church in America. Liturgy and ritual.

Common service book . . .

Church of England. Liturgy and ritual Coronation service.
Church of England. Book of common, prayer* 4 *

121. Creeds, hymnals, and service books (Jewish).

Enter Jewish creeds, hymnals, and service books under the head-
ing JEWS. LITURGY AND KITITAL.

No single Jewish organization represents all Jews, but the continuity
of liturgical rites and forms justifies an entry in this form.

Jews. Liturgy and ritual.

Prayer book; abridged for Jews in the armed forces of the
United States.

Jews* Liturgy and ritual. Hagadah. 1934.

The Haggadah. A new edition, with English translation, intro-
duction, and notes by Cecil Roth.

I. Jews. Liturgy and ritual. Hagadah. English. 1934. n. Roth, Cecil,
1899- ed. and tr.

122. Religious orders.

Enter religious orders under a conventional short form of name in
English, if the order extends over more than one country and is
known by an English name.

84 By exception the Book of common prayer is entered directly under the name of
the church without the subheading LITURGY AND RITUAL.

187

122A A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Jesuits not Society of Jesus.

Benedictines not Order of St. Benedict.

Poor Clares.

Sisters of the Holy Cross.

Ursulines.

Brigittines.

Mekhitarists.

Exceptions, variations, and further specifications.

A. Enter religious orders under their full name if a conventional
form of name has not come into English use.

Congregation of the Holy Cross.

Congregation of the Sacred Hearts of Jesus and Mary.

Society of the Divine Word.

This will apply especially to orders of women that have episcopal
approbation only.

B. Enter religious orders known historically only under the Latin
form under that name.

Humiliati.
Reformat!.

C. Enter religious orders operating in foreign countries and un-
known under an English name, under a vernacular form.

Hijas de Jesus.

Soeurs de Saint- Augustin.

Soeurs des prisons de la Congregation de Marie-Joseph.

Instituto de las Esclavas del Corazon de Jesus.

This will apply primarily to congregations and institutes operating
solely under the approval of the local bishop and not having received
pontifical approbation.

D. Enter "second" orders, i.e., orders of women taking solemn
vows and following the same rule as the corresponding male orders
save for necessary adaptations, and without a distinctive name, under
the adjectival form of the name of the order followed by the word

NUNS. 35

Benedictine Nuns.

Rejer from

Benedictines. Second Order,
but

Poor Clares.

with reference from
Franciscans. Second Order.

E. Enter "third" orders, i.e., organizations of lay people living in
the world but observing as far as possible the rules of an order,
whenever they have no name of their own, as subheadings under the
names of the "first" orders.

30 This unusual procedure is necessary because the English language no longer
permits the feminine endings, as for instance, "Benedictinesses."

188

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

Franciscans. Third Order.

It must be noted that many of these "third" orders by making
simple vows and leading a conventual life have become "religious."

f *** Per etual

F. Enter reform movements no longer under the jurisdiction of
the order proper and having their own rules, under their own names.
Refer from the parent order.

Capuchins.

with reference: Franciscans see also Capuchins
Ohvetans.

with reference: Benedictines see also Olivetans.

G. Enter orders similar in name and customarily distinguished
by addition of the name of the location of the mother house under
their names with addition of location of the mother house by means
of a preposition, or by a comma, or by enclosure in parentheses. 36

Sisters of Bon Secours of Paris.
Sisters of Notre Dame de Namur.
Sisters of St. Joseph of Carondelet.
Sisters of Charity of Cincinnati, Ohio.

H. Enter subdivisions into which an order is divided as subhead-
ings under the order but in the language of the territory where they
are principally operative.

Jesuits. Missouri Province.
Jesuits. Provincia de Andaluda.
Dominicans. Provincia de Buenos Aires.
Benedictines. Bursf elder Kongregation.
Benedictine Nuns. Congregation of Saint Scholastica.
Benedictines. Congregation de Cluny&

(1) Enter documents issued by a regional group which does not
have an official jurisdictional status under the name of the order with
subdivision for the region.

Jesuits. Spain.

123. Monasteries, abbeys, convents, etc.

A. Enter monasteries, abbeys, convents, priories, etc., (other tha*>
those of the United States and the British Empire whose names begin
with a proper noun or a proper adjective, cf. 123C) , which are located
in a city or town, under the name of the place. Give the name of the
institution in the vernacular followed in parentheses and in English

36 Cf. practice observed in the Annuario pontificio (Citta del Vaticano) in listing
the orders of which a cardinal may be the protector.

37 The Library of Congress has entered Cluniacs under their own name on the
strength of popular usage.

189

123A(1) _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

by the particular type of institution combined with the name of the
order. 38 Refer from the name of the institution.

Angers, France. Saint-Aubin (Benedictine abbey)

Refer from
Saint-Aubin (Benedictine abbey) Angers.

Rijnsburg, Netherlands. Sint Maria (Abbey of Benedictine
nuns)

Refer from

Sint Maria (Abbey of Benedictine nuns) Rijnsburg, Nether-
lands.

Vienna. Unsere Liebe Frau zu den Schotten (Benedictine
abbey)

Refer from

Unsere Liebe Frau zu den Schotten (Benedictine abbey)
Vienna.

Florence. San Onofrio (Convent)

Refer from
San Onofrio (Convent) Florence.

(1) If the specific name of the institution cannot be ascertained
use the descriptive name of the institution combined with that of
the order.

Barcelona. Monasterio Domenico.
Rheinfelden. Johanniterkommende.
New Orleans. Ursuline convent

(2) When a village or town has grown up around a monastic in-
stitution and bears the same name, the entry consists of the name of
the place followed by the type of institution combined with the order
in parentheses and in English.

Fulda, Ger. (Benedictine abbey)
Eiosiedeln, Switzerland (Benedictine abbey)
St. Gall, Switzerland (Benedictine abbey)

as distinct from

Fulda, Ger. (City)
Einsiedeln, Switzerland (City)
St. Gall, Switzerland (City)
St. Gall, Switzerland (Canton)

necessary to add the name of the province after the name
of the country in order to distinguish one town from another with
the same name, to avoid successive parentheses in the heading give

' Abbey of

190

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 124

the descriptive name of the institution in the vernacular and with-
out parentheses.

Eldena, Ger. (Pomerania) Cisterzienserkloster.
not Eldena, Ger. (Pomerania) (Cistercian abbey)

(3) When a village or town has grown up around a monastic in-
stitution and bears a different name, enter under the name of the
monastery followed by the name of the place.

Averbode (Premonstratensian abbey) Testelt, Belgium.

B. Enter a monastery or other monastic institution not located
in a city, town, or village under its own name. Add the name of the
province or other similar geographic designation and name of country
if necessary for purposes of identification.

Grande-Chartreuse (Monastery)

Monte Cassino (Benedictine abbey)

Santa Maria (Augustinian abbey) Estany, Spain.

C. Enter abbeys, priories, etc., of the United States and the British
Empire, whose names begin with a proper noun or a proper adjec-
tive, under the first word of their names. If the name of the place
does not occur in the name of the institution, add it in the heading
and refer from it. If the name includes the name of the place in
which the institution is located, the country may be added if neces-
sary to distinguish between two institutions having the same name.
Give the particular type of institution in parentheses if it is not evi-
dent from the name.

Ely Abbey.

Tintern Abbey.

St. Augustine's Abbey, Canterbury.

St. Augustine's Abbey, Ramsgate.

St. Benedict's Abbey, Atchison, Kan.

Bangor Abbey (Ireland)

Bangor Abbey (Wales)

124. Churches, cathedrals, etc. 39

Enter churches, cathedrals, basilicas, chapels, baptisteries, etc., also
synagogues, in accordance with the general rule (92) , under the name
of the place in which they are located, with exceptions as specified
in 124K-L, 125C. Refer from the name or names by which the church,
congregation, parish, etc., is known. 40

38 The term "church" for the purpose of these rules may be defined as a local estab-
lishment for the public observance of Christian worship. It covers (I) the edifice
used for the purposes of the establishment, whether denominated cathedral, church,
meeting-house, or other term; (2) the organization functioning as the establishment,
whether called church, parish, society, congregation, or other name (but cf . 125A) ; (3)
the geographical territory to which the activities of the establishment are limited,
usually denominated parish.

40 A general reference may serve the same purpose hi some cases, e.g.,
First Congregational Church.

Congregational churches designated merely by number are entered under
place, e.g., Moline, HI. First Congregational Church.

191

124A _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Philadelphia. Church of the Epiphany.

Refer from

Church of the Epiphany, Philadelphia.
Tenafly, N. J. Tenafly Presbyterian Church.

Refer from

Tenafly Presbyterian Church, Tenafly, N. J.
Hamburg. Israelitischer Tempel.

Refer from
Israelitischer Tempel, Hamburg.

Washington, D. C, Cathedral of Saint Peter and Saint Paul.

Refer from

Cathedral of Saint Peter and Saint Paul, Washington, D. C.
National Cathedral, Washington, D. C.
Washington, D. C. National Cathedral.
New York. Trinity Church.

Refer from

Trinity Church, New York.
Trinity Corporation, New "York.
Corporation of Trinity Church in New York City.
New York. Trinity Corporation.
Verona. Duomo di Santa Maria Matricolare.

Refer from

Duomo di Santa Maria Matricolare, Verona.
Santa Maria Matricolare, Duomo di, Verona.
Lisbon. Basilica do Santissimo Coracao de Jesus.

Refer from

Basilica do Santissimo Coragao de Jesus, Lisbon.
Santissimo Coragao de Jesus, Basilica do, Lisbon.

A. If the word church, cathedral, 41 etc., does not occur in the name,
add the appropriate designation in English and in parentheses.

Paris. Notre Dame (Cathedral)
Florence. San Giovanni (Baptistery)
Pavia. San Michele Maggiore (Basilica)
Mainz. St. Martin (Cathedral)
Xanten, Ger. Sankt Victor (Church)

But add without parentheses an explanatory word presupposed by
the use of the name of the church in the possessive case.

Bath, Eng. St. Michael's Church.
not Bath, Eng. St. Michael's (Church)
Quedlinburg, Ger. St. Servatiikirche.

B. For British cathedrals known familiarly by the name of the
city, the word CATHEDRAL (or MINSTER) is used in composition with
the name of the city.

York Minster.
Winchester Cathedral.

. "Dom" is used not only for a cathedral, but also for the prin-

i n S? 7 Clty ' TOien !t ^ necessar y t a *d an explanatory word to the
heading, use CATHEDRAL for churches that are the seat of a bishop and
her

CHURCH lor others.

192

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 124H

but

London. St. Paul's Cathedral.

Dublin. Cathedral Church of the Holy Trinity*

C. When it is necessary to distinguish between two or more
churches of the same name in a city, add the name of the denomina-
tion or the name of the locality within the city, or both.

Baltimore. St. James's Church (Catholic)
New York. St. Peter's Church, Manhattan (Catholic)
New York. St. Peter's Church, Manhattan (Protestant Epis-
copal) ^
London. St. Paul's Church, Covent Garden.

D. When it is necessary to distinguish between different church
edifices used concurrently or successively by the same church organ-
ization, include the name or address of the individual church in the
heading.

New York. Collegiate Church. Fifth Ave. and 48th Street.
New York. Collegiate Church. West End Ave. and 77th Street.

E. Congregational churches, especially in New England, that call
themselves "Church of Christ" or "First Church of Christ" of a given
city, frequently add the word Congregational to the name for the
purpose of popular identification (e.g., First Church of Christ, Con-
gregational) or incorporate the word in the name and drop "of Christ"
(e.g., First Congregational Church) . When usage on publications of

the same institution varies, prefer the form "Church of Christ" be-
cause it is the historical name and retains local coloring. If it is
necessary to add the denominational adjective for identification, give
it in parentheses following the usage for explanatory terms. Refer
from forms used but not adopted as heading.

East Haddam, Conn. First Church of Christ (Congregational)

F. When a church changes its denominational affiliation without
changing its name, add in parentheses the denominational adjective
of the new relationship.

Ipswich, Mass. Independent Congregational Church (Unitarian)

G. If the name of a church cannot be ascertained, or if it is not
commonly known and very rarely used, enter under the name of the
place followed by the generic term in the vernacular. Refer from the
specific name when known.

Tortosa, Spain. Catedral.
Bologna. Cattedrale.
Pisa. Battistero.
Chaumont, France, figlise.
Santillana, Spain. Iglesia Colegial.

H. Enter a church established to minister to the needs of foreign

193

1241 _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

residents, under the name of the city followed by the name of the
church in the language in which it functions.

Geneva. English Church.
Paris. American Church.
Philadelphia. %lise episcopate frangaise du St. Sauveur.

I* Enter a church organized by foreign immigrants who are poten-
tial citizens of the adopted country, under the name of the church in
the adopted language with reference from the original name.

St. Louis. Trinity Lutheran Church.

Refer from
St. Louis. Erste Deutsche Evangelisch-lutherische Gemeinde

U. A. C.
Deutsche Evangelisch-lutherische Gemeinde U. A. C. in St.

Louis.
Trinity Lutheran Church, St. Louis.

J. For churches in the Holy Land, in which the interest is uni-
versal throughout Christendom, use the conventional English form
of the name.

Jerusalem. Church of the Holy Sepulcher.
Bethlehem. Church of the Nativity.

K. Enter Spanish missions (e.g., those in California and the South-
west) directly under their names.

San Gabriel Mission.

San Carlos Borromeo Mission.

San Xavier del Bac Mission.

L. Enter churches, chapels, etc., located in the open country tinder
their own names followed by the name of the geographical territory
(i.e., township, county, state) in which they are located.
Bever Creek Church, Henry Co., Va.
Mount Pisgah Church (Presbyterian) Woodf ord Co., Ky.
Macedonia Christian Church, Taylor Township, Orange Co., Va.
125. Church vs. parish, 42 society, etc.

A. In older New England churches of congregational polity when
local congregational constituencies embrace two separate organiza-
tions one (the church) consisting of members in full and regular
standing, the otb* (the society of the church or parish) consfcting
of all m^nbers of the parish who do or do not have full member-
ship, both organizations must be considered and entered under their
own names.

New Haven. First Church.

Church *><^~mbers in good

194

COBPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 126B

New Haven. First Ecclesiastical Society.

[Used for the parish organization including both members in full
church standing and members of the parish not in full communion]

B. When in addition to the parish church, there are within the
parish subsidiary chapels at different locations, use the name of the
parish church in the heading for material involving the whole parish
or the parish church. If the chapels have distinctive names of their
own, use these in headings where they are concerned. Connect entries
by appropriate references.

Washington, D. C. St Alban's Church.

Refer from

St. Alban's Church, Washington, D. C.
Washington, D. C. St Alban's Parish.
Washington, D. C. St David's Chapel.

Refer from
St. David's Chapel, Washington, D. C.

and refer to and from
Washington, D. C. St. Alban's Church.

C. Enter under the name of the parish those "larger parishes"
composed of several congregations, each with its own church, which
set up or do not set up a larger organization, but have one common
pastor. Make separate headings when required for each individual unit
and correlate with the "larger parish" by means of cross references.

New Ringgold Parish, SchwylkiLl Co., Pa.

[This parish consists of four congregations: Christ Church, Mc-
Keansburg; Frieden's Church, New Ringgold; Zion Church,
Lewiston Valley; and Zion Church, Tuscarora]

Refer to and from
McKeansburg, Pa, Christ Church.
New Ringgold, Pa. Frieden's Church.
Tuscarora, Pa. Zion Church.
Zion Church, Lewiston Valley, Pa.
[Open country]

126. Subsidiary church institutions.

A. Enter the churches of monasteries, abbeys, convents, etc., as
subheadings under the heading appropriate to these institutions, using
the word church in the vernacular. If the church has a name different
from that of the institution to which it belongs, use this name as sub-
heading. If the monastic institution dies out, but the church con-
tinues in use as a parish church, follow the rule for monasteries if
the church has no special name; but if the church has a name of its
own, follow the rules for churches, in which case a separate entry
is made for the monastic establishment.

Ottobeuron, Ger. (Benedictine abbey) Kirche.

B. Enter altars, baptisteries, chapels, etc., subsidiary to the main
church edifice, as subheadings under the heading appropriate to the
main edifice. If the subheading consists of a distinctive name, refer
from it and from the place with it as a direct subheading.

195

126C A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Frejus, France. Notre Dame et Saint Leonce (Cathedral) Bap-
tistere.

Augsburg. St. Anna (Church) Fuggerkapelle.

Refer from

Fuggerkapelle, Augsburg.
Augsburg. Fuggerkapelle.
Florence. San Marco (Church) Capella di Santo Antonio.

Refer from

Capella di Santo Antonio, Florence.
Florence. Capella di Santo Antonio.

C. Enter cathedral and collegiate chapters as subheadings under
the heading for the cathedral or collegiate church with which they
are connected by adding the word chapter in the vernacular.

Passau. Dom. Kapitel.

Le Mans. Saint Julien (Cathedral) Chapitre.

For cathedral chapters, refer from the name of the diocese.

Passau (Diocese) Cathedral Chapter

see
Passau. Dom. Kapitel.

D. Enter the variously named boards of executives of a church
(trustees, elders, deacons, church wardens, vestry, church council,
etc.) , also special committees appointed by the church, as subheadings
under the heading used for the church.

New York. Trinity Church. Men's Committee,
Savannah. Independent Presbyterian Church. Flower Com-
mittee.

E. Enter Sunday schools, Bible classes, etc., that is, all institutions
whose purpose is to advance the religious knowledge of the church
members, as subheadings under the heading used for the church.

Chicago. Third Presbyterian Church. Sunday School
Philadelphia. Church of Our Redeemer. Christian Workers'

Bible Class.
Providence. First Baptist Church. Sunday School. Library.

For schools conducted by churches that provide religious and secu-
lar instruction see PRIVATE AND ENDOWED SCHOOLS. (108)
For church auxiliary societies see 128.

F. Enter the publications of unorganized groups of church members
under the heading used for the church with subheading MEMBERS, or
the term that is used in the publication itself.

Wayne, Neb. Methodist Episcopal Church. Members and
r riends.

Rochester, N. Y. Lake Avenue Memorial Baptist Church.

.Ladies.
Ishpeming, Mich. Grace Church. Women.

196

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS

129D

127. Denominational societies with local units.

Enter denominational or interdenominational religious societies
confraternities, sodalities, etc., under their names; regional groups of
such societies under the name of the society with the name of the
regional group as subheading; but enter local congregational or parish
units of these societies as subheadings under the heading for the church
in which they function.

Epworth League.

Still Pond, Md. Methodist Episcopal Church. Epworth Leajnie.
Society of St. Vincent de Paul. U. S. ^Bolivia, France, etc 3
Society of St. Vincent de Paul. U. S. Central Council of Phila-
delphia.

128. Church auxiliary societies.

Enter church auxiliary societies as subheadings under the heading
for the church in which they function. (Cf. 120D, 126D-F.)

Wilmington, Del. Holy Trinity Church. Ladies Parish Aid So-
ciety.

Evanston, 111. First Methodist Episcopal Church. Queen Esther
Circle.

Omaha. Temple Israel. Sisterhood.

129. Temples.

In general, follow the same rules of entry for temples as for
churches, except that for ancient temples, especially those in extinct
cities when they are known only from archaeological remains, use the
English form of name.

A. Enter a temple dedicated to a special deity under the name
of the city followed by the words TEMPLE OF [NAME OF DEITY] .

Dandara, Egypt. Temple of Hafhor.

Refer from

Hathor, Temple of, Dandara, Egypt.
Ephesus. Temple of Artemis.

Refer from
Artemis, Temple of, Ephesus.

B. Enter a temple named after the builder as in A. above, using the
name of the builder instead of the name of the special deity.

Abydos, Egypt. Temple of Rameses I.

Refer from
Rameses x, Temple of, Abydos, Egypt.

C. Enter the temple of a foreign ethnic deity under the name of the
city followed by the ethnic adjective governing the word temple.

Rome (City) Syrian Temple.

D. Enter a temple having a specific name under the city followed
by the name of the temple, adding the word TEMPLE in parentheses if
necessary for clarity. Refer from the specific name.

197

129E A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Kedu, Java. Tjandi Mendoet.

Refer from

Tjandi Mendoet, Kedu, Java.
Hanoi, Indochina. Chen Wu Pagoda.

Refer from

Chen Wu Pagoda, Hanoi, Indochina.
Cheribon, Java. Tiao-Kak-Sie (Temple)

Refer from
Tiao-Kak-Sie (Temple) Cheribon, Java.

E. Enter a temple having no particular designation under the name
of the city followed by the word TEMPLE.

Amritsar (City) Temple.
Madura, India (City) Temple.

F. Enter a temple located in the open country under its own name
with the word TEMPLE added in parentheses if necessary.

Ramesseuin.
Angkor Vat (Temple)

130. Mosques.

The same general rules which apply to temples apply also to
mosques, i.e., enter under the place followed by the name of the
mosque. Use the vernacular if that form of name is generally used
in western literature, otherwise use the English form of the name.
Refer from the name of the mosque.

Samarkand. Gur Emir (Mosque)

Refer from

Gur Emir (Mosque) Samarkand.
Istanbul St Sophia.

Refer from

Istanbul. Hagia Sophia.
Hagia Sophia, Istanbul.
St Sophia, Istanbul.
Kairwan. Mosque of Sidi Okba.

Refer from
Sidi Okba, Mosque of, Kairwan.

198

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 131

Miscellaneous Bodies Not Included

in the Specifications for Societies

and Institutions

This section includes conferences, congresses, exhibitions, and other
occasional meetings; firms, and other business concerns; commit-
tees and classes of citizens; foundations and endowments; parks,
cemeteries, etc.

131. Diplomatic congresses. 43

Enter diplomatic congresses or conferences for the negotiation of
a peace between belligerent powers, and all other official congresses or
conferences commonly known by the name of the place of meeting, and
noncontinuing, under the name of the place of meeting. (Cf. 88.)

Rastatt Congress, 1797-1799.
Vienna. Congress, 1814-1815.
Berlin. Congress, 1878.
Paris. Peace Conference, 1919.
Moscow. Conference, 1943.

In more recent years many conferences and congresses have been
called for the purpose of discussion, mutual understanding, and the
promotion of international agreement; some of them are consultative
only; others lead to international pacts and treaties. It is preferable to
enter congresses of this nature under their names, as they frequently
form a continuing sequence, held at intervals in different places.

The conventions or agreements resulting from international con-
ferences are entered under the name of the conference. 44 (Cf. 88B.)

Imperial Conference, London, 1930.
Imperial Economic Conference, Ottawa, 1932.

48 Diplomatic congresses are meetings of plenipotentiaries for the discussion and
settlement of international affairs. They are called at the invitation of one nation,
with the concurrence of the participating governments. Such congresses have fre-
quently been convoked for the negotiation of a peace between belligerent powers
and the redistribution of territory which, in most cases, is one of the conditions of
peace. Many of the earlier diplomatic congresses had no distinctive name, but were
known by the name of the city in which they were held. The more recent congresses
usually Have descriptive names but are nevertheless known by the name of the city.
44 For special treatment of an involved and interrelated series of international con-
ferences and resulting agreements, revisions, etc., see Library of Congress informa-
tion cards under the following headings:

International Telegraph Conference (36-23352)

International Radiotelegraph Conference (36-23357)

International Telegraph Union (36-23353)

International Telegraph Bureau, Bern (36-15303)

International Radiotelegraph Bureau, Bern (36*23371)

International Radiotelegraph Union (36-23367)

International Telecommunication Bureau* Bern (36-23372)

European Radio Conference (36-29054)

199

132 _ A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

132. International meetings.

Enter international meetings, conferences, and congresses, of private
persons, under their English names provided the English name has
appeared in any of the publications of the conference. In other cases
enter under the name in the language in which most of the publications
have appeared, or when this cannot be ascertained, under the name
by which the conference is best known. Make references from all other
forms of name, and from the place where each congress has been held.

International Congress of Orientalists.

Refer from

Orientalists, International Congress of.
Congres international des Orientalistes.
Internationaler Orientalisten Congress, etc., etc.

International Geographical Congress. 1st, Antwerp, 1871.

Refer jrom
Congres international pour le progres des sciences geo-

graphiques, cosmographiques et commerciales.
Congres international de geographic.
Antwerp. Congres international pour le progres des sciences

geographiques, cosmographiques et commerciales. 1st, 1871.

International Geographical Congress. 2d, Paris, 1875.

Refer from
Paris. Congres international de geographic. 2d, 1875.

International Geographical Congress. 3d, Venice, 1881.

Refer from

Congresso geografico internazionale.
Congresso internazionale geografico.
Venice. Congresso geografico internazionale. 3d, 1881.

International Geographical Congress. 4th, Paris, 1889.

Refer from
Paris. Congres international de geographic. 4th, 1889.

International Geographical Congress. 5th, Bern, 1891.

Refer from
Bern, Congres international de geographic. 5th, 1891.

International Geographical Congress. 6th, London, 1895.

Refer from
London. International Geographical Congress. 6th, 1895.

International Geographical Congress. 7th, Berlin, 1899
Refer from

Internationaler Geographen-Kongress.

Berlin. Internationaler Geographen-Kongress. 7th, 1899.
International Geographical Congress. 8th, Washington, D. C.,

XV/U4.
Refer from

D " * Intemational Geographical Congress. 8th,

International Geographical Congress. 9th, Geneva, 1908

Refer from
Geneva. Congres international de geographie. 9th, 1908.

200

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 132B

International Geographical Congress. 10th, Rome. 1913.
Refer from

Rome (City) Congresso internazionale di geografia. 10th 1913
etc., etc. 3

A. If the numbering of the congresses is very irregular, the num-
bers are to be omitted from the heading, and an information card, stat-
ing the sequence of the congresses, is to be made.

International Congress of Hygiene and Demography.

clstj Brussels, 1852 (Congres general dliygiene)

c2d 3 Brussels, 1876 (Congres international dliygiene)

[3d] Paris, 1878 (Congres international dlrygiene)

C 4th 3 Turin, 1880.

c5th] Geneva, 1882 (Congres international dliygiene et demographic)

c6th] The Hague,1884 (Congres international dliygiene et de demographic)

[7th] Vienna, 1887 (Internationaler Congress . . .)

[8th] Paris, 1889.

t9th] London, 1891 (International Congress . . .)

clOth] Budapest, 1894 (Nemzetkozi Kzegeszegi es Demografiai Congressus)

[llth] Madrid, 1898 (Congreso Internacional de Higiene y Demografia)

[12thj Paris, 1900.

Brussels, 1903.
c!4th] Berlin, 1907.

Washington, 1912.

The first three congresses (1852, 1876, 1878) were originally not
numbered; the congresses held 1880-1900 were numbered 3d-10lh with
reference to the Brussels congress, 1876 as the first, and leaving out of
the count, the Brussels congress, 1852, and the Paris congress, 1889. At
the Brussels congress, 1903, the present numbering was adopted. (The
place and date only are used in the heading)

B. The sessions of any one congress may be held successively in
two or more different places.

When held in two places, the names of both cities are to be used
in the heading, with reference from the name of each.

International Congress of Refrigeration. 3d, Washington, D. C.,
and Chicago, 1913.

Refer from
Washington, D. C. International Congress of Refrigeration.

oct, 1913.
Chicago. International Congress of Refrigeration. 3d, 1913.

When held in more than two places, the place of headquarters is
to be used in the heading, followed by "etc.," with reference from
the name of each city, if not more than three. A note of the places
entertaining the congress is to be given, if not included in the title
of the publication.

Congreso Internacional de la Prensa Tecnica y Profesional.

5th, Barcelona, etc., 1929.

Refer from
Barcelona. Congreso Internacional de la Prensa Tecnica y

Profesional. 5th, 1929.
Madrid. Congreso Internacional de la Prensa Tecnica y Pro-

fesional. 5th, 1929.
Seville. Congreso Internacional de la Prensa Tecnica y Pro-

fesional. 5th, 1929.

201

133 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

When there are many places visited in the course of a meeting
and the publications of the congress bear only the name of the coun-
try, the principal (usually the first) place of meeting is to be used
in the heading, with reference from that name and also from the
name of the country.

International Geological Congress* 15th, Pretoria, etc., 1929.

Refer from

Pretoria. International Geological Congress. 15th, 1929.
South Africa. International Geological Congress. 15th, 1929.
International Geological Congress. 15th, South Africa, 1929.

133. Congresses of groups of states having similar language or culture.

Enter congresses of groups of states having similar language, or cul-
ture (e.g., the Scandinavian countries, or countries of South America)
under the language in which most of the publications have appeared.
If this cannot be ascertained, enter under the language of the country
inaugurating the series.

No definite decision as to the final best form of entry can be made
until a considerable body of material has been assembled. In the
meanwhile references must be relied upon to make the entries read-
ily available.

Nordiske Juristm^de.

Refer from
Nordiska Juristmotet.

Nordiske Biblioteksm0de.

Refer from

Nordiske Biblioteksstaevne.
Nordiska Biblioteksmotet
Nordiske Bibliotekm0te.
Congreso Internacional de Historia de America.

Refer from
Congresso Internacional de Historia da America.

134. National congresses*

Enter national congresses under the vernacular form of the name.

Congres des ingenieurs en chef des associations de proprietaires
d'appareils a vapeur.

Compte rendu des seances du 1.- Congres des ingenieurs
en chef des associations de proprietaires d'appareils a vapeur.

In the following examples there is record of only two conferences,
both held in the same year, and two entries are preferable.

National Conference on Inheritance and Estate Taxation. 1st,

Washington, D. C., Feb., 1925.

Proceedings of National Conference on Inheritance and Estate
Taxation held at ... Washington, D. C., February 19-20, 1925.

National Conference on Inheritance and Estate Taxation. 2d

New Orleans, Nov., 1925.

Proceedings of the second National Conference on Inheritance
and Estate Taxation held at ... New Orleans, Louisiana,
Tuesday, November 10, 1925.

202

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 136A

135. Institutes, conferences, conventions, etc.

A. Enter institutes, meetings, conferences, etc., under the name of
the meeting, except when they are meetings of the members of a so-
ciety or other body and have no distinctive name of their own.

Pacific Northwest Regional Planning Conference.
Illinois Farmers' Institute.

but

International Co-operative Alliance. 2d congress, Paris, 1896.
Baptist Training Union. Southwide conference. 4th, Birming-
ham, Ala., 1925.

B. If the institute or meeting is held at some institution (college,
university, etc.) add the name of the institution to the heading.

Institute of Politics, Williams College, 1932.

Conference on Higher Education, University of Oregon, 1934.

Indiana Fire School, Purdue University, Lafayette, Ind.

Care should be taken not to confuse with such conferences, the
"institutes," "workshops," etc., which are departments or seminars in
departments of academic institutions, and which are entered as such.

Minnesota. University. Institute of Child Welfare.
Puerto Rico. University. Institute of Tropical Agriculture,
Mayaguez.

C. If the institute or meeting is associated with a particular city,
add the name of the city to the heading. If the meeting is held only
once,* or the heading applies to only one meeting, add the date also.

Institute of War Medicine and Surgery for Dentists, Chicago,

D. If no name can be found for the meeting, enter it under the
place and supply a name descriptive of the character of the meeting.

Syracuse, N. Y. Convention of mechanics and others, 1850.
Boston. Women's rights meeting, 1859.

136. Exhibitions, etc.

A. General exhibitions. Enter general exhibitions, fairs, bazaars,
etc., under the name of the place where they are held, and refer from
the official title and any other names by which the exhibition is gen-
erally known.

Philadelphia. Centennial Exhibition, 1876.

New Orleans. World's Industrial and Cotton Centennial Expo-

sition, 1884-1885.

Chicago. World's Columbian Exposition, 1893.
Buffalo. Pan-American Exposition, 1901.
London. Franco-British Exhibition, 1908.
St. Louis. Louisiana Purchase Exposition, 1904.
Paris. Exposition coloniale Internationale, 1931.
London. Lewis Carroll Centenary Exhibition, 1932.
London. International Exhibition of Chinese Art, 1931.

203

136B _ A.L.A, CATALOGING RULES

This rule applies to the official publications of an exhibition. Cata-
logs or descriptions of exhibits and other material published by com-
missions from the contributing countries, business firms, or other
contributors, are to be entered under the bodies or persons issuing
them. (Cf. 81B.)

U. S. Board of Management of Government Exhibit 9 Tennessee

Centennial Exposition, 1897.

. . . Report on the United States government exhibit at the
Tennessee Centennial Exposition, Nashville, 1897.

China. Organizing Committee, International Exhibition of

Chinese Art, London, 1935-1936.

Illustrated catalogue of Chinese government exhibits for the
International Exhibition of Chinese Art in London.

B. Exhibitions held by societies or other bodies. Enter exhibitions,
fairs, bazaars, etc., held by or under the auspices of some society or
institution 45 or in connection with an international or other .congress,
especially when they are numbered and occur at more or less regular
intervals in different places, under the name of the body or congress,
with reference from the name of the place and from the name of the
exhibition when this is at all distinctive.

Grolier Club, New York.

Catalogue of an exhibition of French engravings of the eight-
eenth century . . . exhibited at the Grolier Club . . . MDCCCCV.

Franklin Institute, Philadelphia.

Report of the . . . exhibition of American manufactures, held
in the city of Philadelphia ... by the Franklin Institute.

California State Agricultural Society.

Official report . . . annual agricultural fair.

Licking County (Ohio) Agricultural Society.

Premium list and regulations for the annual fair.

Public Works of Art Project.

National exhibition of art, by the Public Works of Art Proj-
ect, April 24, 1934 to May 20, 1934 (inclusive) the Corcoran
Gallery of Art, Washington, District of Columbia.

i. Corcoran Gallery of Art, Washington, D. C.

137. Pre-congress or pre-exhibition publications.

Enter pre-congress or pre-exhibition publications under the body
responsible for their preparation, if such body can be ascertained.
If, however, the authorship cannot be determined, enter under the
congress or exhibition.

International Child Welfare Association, llth session, Brussels,

Iuo5.

_ . . . Documents preparatoires . . . t Bruxelles? 1935j

n^!^ biti M n Jh 1 :? fa jhe&lteries or exhibition rooms of a society or institution
not necessarily held under the auspices of the society or institution.

204

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 139A

National Conference on Street and Highway Safety. 2d, Wash-

ington, D. 0, 1926.

. . . Report c s 3 . . . issued for consideration in advance of the
National Conference on Street and Highway Safety.

New York. World's Fair, 1939-1940.
Feria Mundial de Nueva York, 1939. Nueva York, 1936.

If the congress or exhibition for which the publications were pre-
pared is not held, add to the heading the words PROJECTED, NOT HELD
in parentheses.

International Congress of Architects. 15th, Washington, D. C.,
1939. (Projected, not held)

138. Festivals.

A. Enter festivals, athletic contests, etc., if held regularly in one
place, under the name of the place, with reference from the name
of the festival. Exception is made for festivals, etc., held under the
auspices of an institution, which are entered as subheadings under
the name of the institution.

Asheville, N. C. Music Festival.

Baldwin-Wallace College, Berea, Ohio. Conservatory of Music.

Bach Festival.
Refer from

Bach Festival of the Baldwin-Wallace Conservatory of Music.

B. Enter festivals, etc., held at different places under their own
names.

Olympic Games, Athens, 1906.
Niederrheinisches Musikf est.

C* Enter those held under the auspices of a society according
to the above provisions except when the name of the festival is not
distinctive. Such festivals are entered under the name of the society
without subheading.

Limestone Choral Society.

Annual music festival.

Cincinnati Musical Festival Association.

Music festival at Cincinnati.

Refer from the name of the sponsoring society to festivals, etc.,
entered under their own names.

Neue Bachgesellschaft. Deutsches Bachfest

see
Deutsches Bachfest.

139. Commissions and committees.

A. Enter autonomous commissions and committees, international,

205

139B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

national or local, under their names, adding the place of headquarters
only when necessary for identification.

International Commission for Air Navigation.
International Commission for the Study of Clouds.
Commission on Post-war Training and Adjustment.
Committee on International Economic Policy.
Committee for Refugee Education, New York.

For official commissions of governments see C. below and 81.

B. Enter commissions, committees and delegations appointed by
corporate bodies to perform particular functions, either permanent or
temporary, as a subheading under the name of the appointing body,
with references as required. (Cf. 81.)

American Council on Public Affairs. Committee on Economic

Defense.
Refer from

Committee on Economic Defense, American Council on Public
Affairs.

Social Science Research Council. Committee on Personality and

Culture.
Refer from

Committee on Personality and Culture, Social Science Re-
search Council.

London. Royal College of Physicians. Planning Committee,
{no reference needed^

The extent to which subdivision is made for routine committees
depends partly on the prominence given to the committee in the pub-
lication and partly on the amount of material published either by a
committee or by the whole body.

C. Enter joint commissions, committees or boards of two or more
governments or organizations under their own names, with either added
entries or references for each of the governments or bodies.

Mixed Claims Commission (17. S. and Germany)

Joint Board of Engineers on St. Lawrence Waterway Project

(17. S. and Canada)
Interstate Joint Interim Legislative Committee Relating to

Problems of the Interstate Columbia River Area.
Commission europeenne du Danube, Galati, 1856-
Palisades Interstate Park Commission (New York and New

Jersey)
Joint Committee of the National Association of Manufacturers

and National Industrial Council.

140. Committees and meetings of citizens.

Enter reports of meetings or committees of citizens not belonging
to any named body or class and having no definite name, under the
name of the place with subheading CITIZENS. Make reference or added
entry under the name of the chairman or first signer,

206

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 142

The subheading CITIZENS which is, in effect, a form subdivision,
is used m English regardless of the language of the country in which
the meeting takes place.

Albany. Citizens.

Proceedings of a meeting of citizens of the city of Albany, held

2mJ'c2' Jfil' f ^JW 086 f Promoting a system of literary
and scientific international exchanges.

Westchester Co., N. Y. Citizens.

The Post Office for the people, not for politicians and liquor
dealers. The conspiracy against the residents near Katonah
exposed, and the bargain for Whitlock's appointment disap-
proved. The proceedings of citizens of Westchester Co., New
York, at Putney's Hall, Katonah, March 27, 1862.
Geneva. Citizens.

Le recrutement force des Serbes par les Bulgares: protesta-
tions publiques de Geneve et Lausanne.

i. Lausanne. Citizens.

141. Classes of citizens.

Enter anonymous publications of any class of citizens (not organ-
ized) under the name of the place with the name of the class as sub-
heading in English, preferably, except in cases where it is not possible
to give a satisfactory English equivalent for a concise foreign phrase.
If the class is not clearly defined, prefer title entry.
Albany. Bar.

Memoir of William A. Jackson, a member of the Albany
bar . . .

Published by the bar of the city of Albany.
Baltimore. Merchants.

The memorial of the merchants & traders of the city of
Baltimore . . .

Geneva. American residents.

Celebration of the ninetieth anniversary of American inde-
pendance c! 3 in Geneva (Suisse) July 4th, 1866 . . .

London. Women.

A true copie of the petition of the gentlewomen, and trades-
mens-wives, in and about the City of London. Delivered to ...
the House of Commons in Parliament, the 4th of February,
1641 ...

Paris. Maitres techniques.

Le travail du fer pratique, 56 objets choisis suivant une pro-
gression geometrique. Les tours de main completes par un
vocabulaixe des mots techniques presente par les maitres tech-
niques de la ville de Paris . . .

142. Boards, trustees, etc.

Enter bodies whose legal names begin with such words as Board,
Corporation, Trustees, under the names of the institutions or bodies
over which they exercise supervision.

Harvard University. Board of Overseers.
British Museum. Trustees.

207

143 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

If, however, a board is organized to administer the combined funds
of several bodies, enter it under its own name.

Board of Trustees of the Belief and Red Cross Funds.

143. Foundations, endowments, funds.

Enter foundations and endowments, funds, etc., under their names.
Retain, at the beginning of the name of a foundation, forenames and
titles of honor, distinction or address which are given in full; initials
of forenames and abbreviations of titles may be omitted. (Cf. 92A,
93C.) Refer from place, and from the exact name if not used as
the heading.

Nobelstiftelsen, Stockholm.

Carlsbergfondet, Copenhagen.

Teyler's Stichting, Haarlem.

Fondation egyptologique Beine Elisabeth, Brussels.

Fondation Thiers, Paris.

Fondazione Leonardo per la cultura italiana, Home.

Russell Sage Foundation, New York.

Julius Rosenwald Fund.

Refer from
Rosenwald Fund.
Baron de Hirsch Fund.

Kellogg Foundation, Battle Creek, Mich.

Refer from

W. K. KeUogg Foundation.
KeUogg (W. K.) Foundation.

Endowments and special funds of institutions (universities, col-
leges, etc.) are usually to be entered under the institution, with a
reference from the name of the fund. (Cf. 101B.)

Smithsonian Institution. Hodgkins Fund.

Refer from
Hodgkins Fund.

Michigan. University. Harris Memorial Trust.

Refer from
Harris Memorial Trust.

Yale University. John Addison Porter Prize.

Refer from
John Addison Porter Prize.

144. Firms, business corporations, etc.

Enter firms, business corporations (including those owned by gov-
ernments) , hotels, 46 railway companies, etc., under the corporate name.
The terms incorporated (inc.) , limited (ltd.), etc., or their equivalents

48 Hotels, while they may be considered as institutions, are better treated as firms,
corporations, or business concerns and therefore entered under their names A sub-
ject reference is invariably made from the name of the city, subdivision HOTELS,

TAVERNS^ ETC.

208

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 144A

if included in the corporate name are to be retained. Add the place
in the heading for firms located in one city only, but not for those
with branches.

British Broadcasting Corporation.
General Electric Company.

Home Owners' Loan Corporation.

Refer from

U. S. Home Owners 9 Loan Corporation.
Greene-Cananea Copper Company.
New York, New Haven and Hartford Railroad Company.
International Harvester Company of America (incorporated)
Sears, Roebuck and Company.
Safeway Stores, inc.
Loew's, inc.
Asch, ltd.

Vickers (Aviation) limited.
Hamilton Watch Company, Lancaster, Pa.
Ambassador Hotel, Washington, D. C.
with see also reference from subject

Washington, D. C. Hotels, taverns, etc.

A. If the name begins with the forename or initials of a personal
name, enter under surname, giving forenames or initials according to
the usage of the firm or corporation. If the inversion brings them
within the corporate name, inclose them within parentheses rather
than commas.

Feather (William) Company, Cleveland.

Refer from
William Feather Company, Cleveland.

Harris (M.) and Sons, London.

Refer from
M. Harris and Sons, London.

Hostmann (Chr.)-Steinberg'sche Farbenfabriken Gjn.b.H.,

Celle.

Refer from
Chr, Hostmann-Steinberg'sche Farbenfabriken G.m.b.H M

Celle.
Celle. Chr. Hostmann-Steinberg'sche Farbenfabriken G.m.b.H.

Du Pont de Nemours (E. I) Powder Company.

Refer from
E. I. Du Pont de Nemours Powder Company.

Knight (Emerson B.) inc., Indianapolis.

Refer from
Emerson B. Knight, inc., Indianapolis.

Henley's (W. T.) Telegraph Works Co., ltd.

Refer from
W. T. Henley's Telegraph Works Co., ltd.

209

144B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Exception. Entry under forename may be preferred in a few cases,
favoring customary use.

Marshall Field and Company.

Refer from
Field (Marshall) and Company.

B. The names of many foreign firms begin with the words or
abbreviations denoting a joint stock company. It is preferable in these
cases to use an inverted form making entry under the first distinctive
word, with reference from the actual name.

Elektrometall, Aktiebolaget, Stockholm.

Refer from

Aktiebolaget Elektrometall, Stockholm.
Goteborgssystemet, Aktiebolaget, Stockholm.

Refer from

Aktiebolaget Goteborgssystemet i Stockholm.
Norsk varekrigsforsikring, A/S.

Refer from
A/S Norske varekrigsforsikring.

Svenska teknologforeningens fbrlag, Aktiebolaget, Stockholm.

Refer from
Aktiebolaget Svenska teknologforeningens forlag.

C. If a firm is known only by the name of the owner or founder,
add the designation FIRM to the heading to distinguish it from the
same name as personal entry.

Witte, Friedrich, firm, Rostock.

D. In dealing with a large number of entries, where slight changes
in the name are frequent, the following form of heading may prove
serviceable.

Scribner, firm, publishers, New York.
(1905. Charles Scri'bner's Sons)

Refer from

Charles Scribner's Sons.
Leavitt, firm, auctioneers. New York.
(1865. Geo. A. Leavitt)

Refer from
Leavitt, Geo. A., firm, New York.

The second line consists of the date of publication of the book cata-
loged and the form of name then in use.

145. Banks.

Enter banking institutions including government owned and con-
trolled banks under firm, association, or corporate name.

Bank of England.

Banque de France, Paris.

Refer from
Paris. Banque de France.

210

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 146A(1)

Cassa di risparmio deUe provincie Lombarde, Milan.

Refer from

Milan. Cassa di risparmio delle provincie Lombarde.
Chase National Bank of the City of New York.

Refer from
New York. Chase National Bank.

Commonwealth Bank of Australia, Sydney.

Refer from

Sydney. Commonwealth Bank of Australia.
Finlands bank, Helsingfors.

Refer from

Helsingfors. Finlands bank.
Suffolk Bank, Boston.

Refer from

Boston. Suffolk Bank.
Sveriges riksbank.

Refer from
Sweden. Riksbanken.
Rikets Standers bank.

Enter national banks in the United States designated merely by
number or without any special designation, under ihe place.

Philadelphia. First National Bank.
Geneva, N, Y. National Bank.

146. Chambers of commerce, boards of trade, stock, produce, and other
exchanges.

A. Enter chambers of commerce devoted mainly to the promotion
of business interests of a definite political division under the name
of the place 47 (country, state, province, city, etc.) .

Amsterdam. Kamer van Koophandel en Fabrieken.

Refer from
Kammer van Koophandel en Fabrieken, Amsterdam.

Kansas City, Mo. Chamber of Commerce.

Refer from
Chamber of Commerce of Kansas City, Mo.

New York. Chamber of Commerce of the State of New York.

Refer from
Chamber of Commerce of the State of New York.

Parma (Province) Camera di commercio e industria.

Refer from
Camera di commercio e industria della provincia di Parma.

Costa Rica. Camara de Comercio, San Jose*.

Refer from

Camara de Comercio de Costa Rica.
San Jose, Costa Rica. Camara de Comercio de Costa Rica.

(1) If the area is larger than national, or if the body is an association

47 The Library of Congress enters the Chamber of Commerce of the United States
of America under its name.

211

146A(2) A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

or union of chambers of commerce, or if the name begins with a national
adjective, entry under the name of the body is preferred.

Vsesoiuznaia torgovaia palata.

Uniunea Camerelor de Comert i de Industrie, Bucharest.

Canadian Chamber of Commerce.

Refer from

Canada. Chamber of Commerce.
Montreal. Canadian Chamber of Commerce.

(2) If the region represented is not identical with a political or
geographical division, enter under the name of the body.

Niederrheinische Industrie- und Handelskammer Duisburg-
Wesel zu Duisburg-Ruhrort.

Refer from

Duisburg, Ger. Niederrheinische Industrie- und Handels-
kammer Duisburg-Wesel zu Duisburg-Ruhrort.

Ruhrort, Ger. Niederrheinische Industrie- und Handels-
kammer Duisburg-Wesel zu Duisburg-Ruhrort.

(3) Enter chambers of commerce serving national interests in
foreign countries under the name of the body.

British Chamber of Commerce in Brazil, Rio de Janeiro.

Refer from

Rio de Janeiro. British Chamber of Commerce in Brazil.
Chambre de commerce beige aux Etats-Unis.

Camara Oficial Espanola de Comercio en los Estados Unidos
Mexicanos.

Refer from
Mexico. Camara Oficial Espanola de Comercio.

(4) Enter associations and clubs functioning as chambers of com-
merce under the name of the body.

Merchants' Association of New York.

Refer from

New York. Merchants' Association.
Long Island Association.

B. Enter boards of trade, stock, produce, and other exchanges,
under the place (city, etc.) .

Boston. Board of Trade.

Refer from

Board of Trade of Boston.
Montreal. Stock Exchange.

Refer from

Stock Exchange of Montreal.
Salt Lake City. Stock and Mining Exchange.

Refer from

Stock and Mining Exchange of Salt Lake City,
bait Lake Stock and Mining Exchange.

212

CORPORATE BODIES AS AUTHORS 148

Vienna. Biirse.

Refer from
Wiener Borse.
Vienna. Wiener Borse.

Sao Paulo, Brazil (City) Bolsa de Mercadorias.

Refer from
Bolsa de Mercadorias de Sao Paulo.

147. Parks.

Enter reports and other material of official character under the
name of the administrative body having charge of the park, as sub-
heading under the jurisdiction (country, state, or city).

For subject entry, city parks are entered under the name of the
city, ^subheading PARKS whether the name of the park be distinctive
(beginning with a proper noun or adjective) or not, e.g., BOSTON-
PARKS-FRANKLIN PARK. National, state and regional parks are entered
under their names if distinctive, e.g., YELLOWSTONE NATIONAL PARK.
U. S. National Park Service.

Circular of general information regarding Yellowstone Na-
tional Park.

For earlier reports see: U. S. Superintendent of Yellowstone National
Park.

1. Yellowstone National Park.
Canada. Dept. of the Interior. Dominion Parks Branch.

The call of untrodden ways.

1. Jasper Park, Alberta.
District of Columbia. Commissioners.

Report upon improvement of valley of Rock Creek.

1. Washington, D. C. Parks Rock Creek Park.

New York (State) Commissioners of Fire Island State Park.
Annual report.
1. Fire Island State Park, N. Y.

New York (State) Attegany State Park Commission.

Annual report.

1. Allegany State Park, N. Y.
Boston. Dept. of Parks.

Notes on the plan of Franklin Park.

1. Boston Parks Franklin Park.

Chicago. Lincoln Park Commissioners.
Report.
1. Chicago Parks Lincoln Park.

148. Cemeteries*

Enter local cemeteries under place. Enter city cemeteries located at
a distance from the city under the name of the cemetery, adding the
name of the city. Reports issued by cemetery associations are to be
entered under the name of the cemetery, with reference from the name
of the association.

Boston. South Burying Ground.

Refer from
South Burying Ground, Boston.

213

A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

New York. Calvary Cemetery.

Refer from
Calvary Cemetery, New York.

New York Cemetery of New Jersey, Hackensack.

Refer from

Hackensack, N. J. New York Cemetery of New Jersey.
Gettysburg. National Cemetery.

Refer from

Soldiers' National Cemetery, Gettysburg.
Mt Auburn Cemetery, Cambridge, Mass.

Refer from
Cambridge, Mass. Mt. Auburn Cemetery.

149. Botanical and zoological gardens.

Enter botanical and zoological gardens under the name of the place
where located.

Botanical and zoological gardens whose names are preceded by the
titular designations Imperial, Royal, National, etc., are to be entered
according to this rule even when supported wholly or in part bv
public funds. y

Cincinnati. Zoological Garden.
Brussels. Jardin botanique de l'tat.
Kew. Royal Gardens.

Exceptions.

A. When distinctly a part of some university or school enter
under the name of the university or school.

Cambridge. University. Botanic Garden.
Munden, Ger. Forstakademie. BotaniscTier Garten.

B. When owned or controlled by a society and constantly referred
to by its name, enter under the society.

Royal Society of Tasmania, Hobart. Gardens.
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Garden
Zoological Society of London. Gardens.

C When private property, enter under the name of the owner
or under the estate to which it belongs.

Aken, Hermann von.

214

IV. Geographic Headings

150. Language of heading,

A. Give countries, self-governing dominions, colonies and protec-
torates in the conventional English form.

Austria not Oesterreich.
Bavaria not Bayern.
Morocco not Moghreb-el-Aksa.
Sweden -not Sverige.

B. Give local geographic names usually in the vernacular form
but where a well-established English form differs, prefer the English
form. 1

Dauphine not Dauphiny.
Lyon not Lyons.
Mainz not Mayence.
Marseille not Marseilles.
Tucmnan not Tucuman.
but

Copenhagen not K0benhavn.
Florence not Firenze.
Munich not Mtinchen.
Vienna not Wien.

151. States, provinces, etc.

The states of the United States, and the provinces of Canada and
the more familiar foreign states, provinces and "departements," do not
require the addition of the name of the country.

Ohio.

British Columbia.

Liguria.

Seine (Dept)' 2

1 In deciding between different forms of place names consult U. S. __ w __^

Board, Sixth report, 1933, and the Decisions of its successor, the U. S. Board on
Geographical Names; Canada Geographic Board; Permanent Committee on Geo-
graphical Names for British Official Use; Times gazetteer of tiie world; Bartholomew's
Survey gazetteer; Lippincotfs new gazetteer; Longmans' gazetteer; Century Cyclo-
pedia of names; flitters geographvsch-statistisches Lexikon; Vivien de Saint-Martin,
Nouveau dictionnaire de geographic universelle, etc,, giving preference in all instances
to official sources.
a Cf. 154.

215

152 A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Bayaria.

Rajputana.

Yucatan.

For publications of the colonial and territorial periods of the pres-
ent states of the United States, see 154C.

152. Counties.

Counties in the United States and Canada when used as entry
word are followed by the name of the state or province, elsewhere
by the name of the country, in accepted abbreviated form.

Charlotte Co., N. B.
Durham Co., Out
East Feliciana Parish, La.
Washington Co., Ohio.
Washington Co., Pa.
but

Limerick, Ire. (County)

153. Cities and towns.

A. When used as entry word, cities and towns in the United States
and Canada are followed by the name of the state or province, in
accepted abbreviated form. (Cf. C, p. 217.)

Alexandria, Va.
Cumberland, Md.
Victoria, B. C.
Hamilton, Out.

B. Cities and towns other than those in the United States and
Canada are followed by the name of the country (not by the name
of the province or smaller division) ox region. The name of the region
is used for cities and towns in areas whose political jurisdiction has
been unstable, as, for example, Sardinia.

Alexandria, Egypt.
Alexandria, Scot
Eberbach, Ger.
Fulda, Ger.
Saint-Dizier, France.
Smolensk, Russia.
Tananarive, Madagascar.

Designation follows local usage if distinctive.

Frankfurt am Main.
Freiburg L B*

The name of the country is used in direct form even though in-
verted for its own entry.

Elisabethvffle, Belgian Kongo,
not Elisabethville, Kongo, Belgian.

216

GEOGRAPHIC HEADINGS 154A

C. Exception. Enter largest or best-known city of its name in
America or elsewhere, without further designation. 3

Athens but Athens, Ga., Athens, Ohio etc

Berlin.

Boston,

Chicago.

Dublin.

Johannesburg.

London.

Montreal.

Paris.

D. Suburbs. Enter publications of a town or village which later
became part of a larger place (thus losing administrative entity)
under the name of the original unit, followed by the name of the
state, province or country according to rule 153.

Germantown, Pa. wow a part of Philadelphia^

Boxbury, Mass. L now a part of Boston^

Charlottenburg. [now a part of Berlinj

For entry of institutions located in suburbs later absorbed in a
metropolitan area see 103.

Note that in some cases towns which are adjacent to a larger place
remain administratively independent.

West Springfield, Mass, suburb of Springfield^

Brookline, Mass. suburb oj Boston]

Schaerbeek, Belgium. ^suburb of Brussels^

Frederiksberg, Denmark, ^suburb of Copenhagen^

154. Political division in heading.

A. When different political or administrative units have the same
name, distinguish them by adding the particular designation in
parentheses, preferably in English, though a term without a precise
English equivalent is given in the vernacular form.

New York (City)
New York (State)

3 Library of Congress omits designation of state or province in the heading for the
following cities and towns in the United States and Canada.

Albany Grand Rapids Quebec

Annapolis Hartford Richmond

Atlanta Indianapolis St. Augustine

Atlantic City Jersey City St. Louis

Baltimore Los Angeles St. Paul

Boston Memphis Salt Lake City

Brooklyn Milwaukee San Antonio

Buffalo Minneapolis San Francisco

Chattanooga Montreal Savannah

Chicago Nashville Scranton

Cincinnati New Haven Seattle

Cleveland New Orleans Spokane

Colorado Springs New York Tacoma

Dallas Oklahoma City Tallahassee

Denver Omaha Toledo

DCS Moines Ottawa Toronto

Detroit Philadelphia Trenton

Duluth Pittsburgh Wheeling

Fort Wayne Providence

217

154B A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

Mexico (City)

Mexico (Federal District)

Sao Paulo (City)

Sao Paulo (Province)

Kassel (City)

Kassel (Regierungsbezirk)

B. Add an explanatory designation whenever the particular kind
of political or administrative unit needs to be specified.

Bramhall, Eng. (Manor)
Bromfield and Yale, Wales (Lordship)
Diepholz (Grafschaft)
San Marino (Republic)

C. For countries or other political units in which a different gov-
ernment needs to be specified in the 'heading for official publications,
add to the usual name of the unit a word or phrase designating the
period covered.

Mexico (Viceroyalty)
Mexico (Empire, 1864-1867)
but Mexico.

tfor publications since its independence^
Netherlands (before 1581)
Netherlands (Southern Provinces, 1581-1793)
Netherlands (United Provinces, 1581-1795)
Netherlands (Batavian Republic, 1795-1806)
Netherlands (Kingdom of Holland, 1806-1813)
Netherlands (Kingdom, 1815- )
Netherlands (Territory under German occupation, 1940-1945)

Publications of the colonial and territorial periods of states of the
United States are distinguished by the designation COLONY or TER.

Georgia (Colony)
Oklahoma (Ter.)

155. Places of the same name in one country.

Distinguish two or more places of the same name, the same type
of unit, and in the same country by the addition, in parentheses, of the
name of the province, "departement," county, etc.

Athies, France (Aisne)
Athies, Fran.ce (Pas-de-Calais)
Athies, France (Somme)
Bradford, Eng. (Devonshire)

R r o^ r f ng ' (Worthumberlanil: Berwick-upon-Tweed Div.)
Bradford, Eng. (Northumberland: Wansbeck Div.)
Templemore, Ire. (Co. Mayo)
Templemore, Ire. (Co. Tipperary)
Washington, Ohio (Fayette Co.)
Washington, O7iio (Guernsey Co.)

218

GEOGRAPHIC HEADINGS 156B

156. Special rulings.

A. Place names beginning with an article have the article as entry
word. Refer from the part of the name following the article. Excep-
tion may be made in the case of place names familiarly referred to in
English under the part of the name following the article,

La Rochelle, France.

Refer from
Rochelle, La, France.
Le Mans, France.

Refer from
Mans, Le, France.
La Paz, Bolivia.
Refer from
Paz, La, Bolivia.
but
Havre.

Refer from
Le Havre.

B. Enter German health resorts beginning with the word Bad
under the name of the place, omitting "Bad." Refer from name be-
ginning with Bad,

Eilsen, Ger.

Refer from
Bad-Eilsen, Ger.
Eilsen, Bad-
Nauheim, Ger.
Refer from
Bad-Nauheim, Ger.
Nauheim, Bad-

219

V. Added Entries. References

157. Added entries.

The chief function of an added entry is to enable the user of the
catalog to find a work when incomplete knowledge or imperfect
memory of the work, or unfamiliarity with the rules of entry, would
prevent ready access to the main entry. Added entries serve also the
purpose of assembling closely related matter which has main entry
under various headings.

If it is desirable to make an added entry for a name not included
in the title of the work, an explanatory note or a contents note should
make the reason apparent.

The necessity for added entries varies somewhat with the individual
library and the extent to which they are made is a matter for each
library to determine according to its particular needs. In general, the
more indeterminate or divided the responsibility for authorship, the
more need for added entries. In the foregoing rules, added entries have
been specified wherever they would be appropriate, as follows:

A. Make added entries for joint authors, collaborators, editors,
compilers, translators, illustrators (if the illustrations form an impor-
tant feature of the work) in short, for any person or corporate body
other than the one chosen for the main entry that has a significant
part in or responsibility for the production of the work. 1 Names, per-
sonal and corporate, used as added entries are established by the same
rules as those used as main entries. The designations ED., COMP., TR.,
ILLUS., JOINT AUTHOR, JOINT COMP., etc., are included in the heading
and if the added entry bears more than one relation to the work, e.g.,
ed. and tr., it is so designated. These designations are used only with
personal, never with corporate names.

B. Make added entries for the purpose of assembling closely re-
lated matter, e.g., an added entry under the original author of a work
when a free adaptation of it has been entered under the adapter;
or an added entry under a uniform heading for the various ver-
sions of an anonymous classic whose main entries are under their
own titles. (C133C(3).)

l Make added entry for a foundation, corporation, or other body that provides
funds for publication or carrying on of studies, only when the work is done on the
initiative of the body supplying the funds, or as one of its acknowledged interests.
An added entry is not ordinarily made for a foundation, corporation, etc., that makes
a grant to another corporate body or to an individual who assumes responsibility for
the work.

220

ADDED ENTRIES. REFERENCES 158

In libraries which make use of printed cards, the use of an added
entry on the unit card may serve to list the contents of a series.

C. Make added entries for titles also; in general, whenever an
entry under the title will insure the ready finding of the book, in
particular:

(1) For all single works of the imagination such as novels, plays,
poems, and other literary forms

(2) For all works entered under author which were published
anonymously

(3) For composite works and collections where main entry is not
under title

(4) For works (except Reports, Transactions, Proceedings, etc.)
the author entries for which are corporate names

(5) For all works of any character bearing a distinctive or striking
title; make partial title entry in cases where a subtitle, alternative
title, or some striking part of the title (catchword title) is likely to
be remembered, but prefer a subject heading, or a reference to a
subject heading, where the title added entry would be substantially
the same.

D. In a library which uses printed cards chiefly, added entries may
serve as analytics (e.g., when a work includes a brief work by another
author) or added entries may take the place of references. (Cf. 158.)
On the other hand, in some cases a reference may take the place of
several added entry cards, e.g., from title to author where there are
many editions of a given work in which there is little or no change of
title; or under similar conditions, from editor to work edited. Added
entry and reference may be combined by making a regular added
entry for one edition and writing or stamping on the card: "Other
editions under author." If the reference to author heading is not clear,
or if the entry referred to is not an author entry, instead of "author"
give the exact heading to which reference is made.

'.58. References.

The function of a reference is to direct the user of a catalog from
one of several headings under which an entry might be looked for to
the one adopted (see reference) , or to indicate other headings under
which related material may be found (see also reference) . This latter
type of reference occurs most often in subject headings. The follow-
ing rules deal with the most frequently recurring instances in author
and title entries where references are required. Other specific cases
where references are necessary are noted throughout the rules. A
reference may always be made wherever good judgment and expe-
rience agree upon its usefulness. In making references, bear in mind
the following points: (1) There must always be an entry in the cata-
log under the heading to which reference is made; (2) There must
always be something in the catalog under the heading from which a

221

158A A.L.A. CATALOGING RULES

see also reference is made; (3) Every reference must be carefully
recorded so that in the event of future changes all references may be
brought into line.

Whenever a heading, whether for main or added entry, is chosen
from two or more possible forms, make references freely from the
alternative forms to the form of heading chosen, e.g.,

A. From full name to shorter form used by author and adopted
as heading.

Tarkington, Newton Booth

see
Tarkington, Booth, 1869-1946.

B. From original name to name adopted in civil or religious life.

Herzog, fimile Salomon Wilhelm

see
Maurois, Andre, 1885-

Hess, Lawrence Anthony

see
Cuthbert, Father, 1866-1939.

C. Conversely, refer from name in religion to real name if the
latter is chosen as heading.

Mary Alphonsa Lathrop, Mother

see
Lathrop, Rose (Hawthorne) 1851-1926.

Lathrop, Mary Alphonsa, Mother

see
Lathrop, Rose (Hawthorne) 1851-1926.

D. From parts of a compound name to the part selected as entry
word.

Salignac de La Mothe-Fenelon, Francois de

see
Fenelon, Francois de Salignac de La Mothe-, Abp., 1651-1715.

La Mothe-Fenelon, Francois de Salignac de

see
Fenelon, Francois de Salignac de La Mothe-, Abp., 1651-1715

E. From the part of a prefix name following the prefix if entry is
under prefix, and conversely.

Essarts, Francois des

see
Des Essarts, Francois.

D'Alembert, Jean Lerond

see
Alembert, Jean Lerond d', 1717-1783.

F. From family name to title when entry is under title, and con-
versely. '

222

ADDED ENTRIES. REFERENCES 158K

St. Leonards, Edward Burtenshaw Sudden, baron
see

Sugden, Edward Burtenshaw, baron St. Leonards, 1781-1875.

Disraeli, Benjamin, 1st earl of Beaconsfield

see
Beaconsfield, Benjamin Disraeli, 1st earl of, 1804-1881.

G. From maiden name to married name when entry is under the
latter, and conversely, if both names have been used by the author.

Duncan, Sara Jeannette

see
Cotes, Sara Jeannette (Duncan) 18627-1922.

Boissevain, Edna St. Vincent (Millay)

see
Millay, Edna St. Vincent, 1892-

H. From pseudonym to real name when entry is under real name,
and conversely.

Morgan, De Wolfe, pseud.

see

Williamson, Thames Ross, 1894-

Webb, Frances (Vinciguerra) 1900-

see
Winwar, Frances, pseud.

I. When such pseudonyms as Aristides, Spectator, etc., have been
used by different writers, include in the reference a brief title.

Aristides, pseud.
An address to the country.

see
Evans, Estwick, 1787-1866.

Aristides, pseud,
Essays on the spirit of Jacksonism.

see
McKenney, Thomas Loraine, 1785-1859.

J. When an author's works may appear in the catalog under his
personal name and also under an official heading connect the differ-
ent headings by references.

Roosevelt, Franklin Delano, Pres. U. S., 1882-1945.

Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "A. L. A. Cataloging Rules For Author And Title Entries"

See other formats